2013 Chevrolet Trax Manual en CA

Chevrolet TRAX Owner Manual - 2013 - CRC - 3/6/13 Black plate (1,1)
2013 Chevrolet TRAX Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Bluetooth Phone/Devices . . . . . 7-52

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Trademarks and License
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Performance and Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Keys, Doors, and Warning Lights, Gauges, and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-27 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-14
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-23
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-30
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-36
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-44
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Downloadable Applications . . . 7-47
2013 Chevrolet TRAX Owner Manual M
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-16
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 Vehicle Data Recording and
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 OnStar Additional
Special Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-13
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-16
Introduction iii
This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are Propriétaires Canadiens
options that you did not purchase or A French language copy of this
due to changes subsequent to the manual can be obtained from your
printing of this owner manual. dealer or from:
Please refer to the purchase
The names, logos, emblems, documentation relating to your On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, and specific vehicle to confirm each of ce guide en français auprès du
vehicle body designs appearing in the features found on your vehicle. concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
this manual including, but not limited For vehicles first sold in Canada, suivante:
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, substitute the name “General
the CHEVROLET Emblem, and Helm, Incorporated
Motors of Canada Limited” for Attention: Customer Service
TRAX are trademarks and/or Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it
service marks of General Motors 47911 Halyard Drive
appears in this manual. Plymouth, MI 48170
LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,
or licensors. Keep this manual in the vehicle for
quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 22789121 A First Printing 2012 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
Using this Manual Warning or Caution indicates a Symbols

hazard that could result in injury or
To quickly locate information about death. The vehicle has components and
the vehicle, use the Index in the labels that use symbols instead of
back of the manual. It is an text. Symbols are shown along with
alphabetical list of what is in the { WARNING the text describing the operation or
manual and the page number where These mean there is something information relating to a specific
it can be found. that could hurt you or other component, control, message,
gauge, or indicator.
people.
Danger, Warnings, and M : This symbol is shown when
Cautions Notice: This means there is
you need to see your owner manual
for additional instructions or
Warning messages found on vehicle something that could result in
information.
labels and in this manual describe property or vehicle damage. This
hazards and what to do to avoid or would not be covered by the * : This symbol is shown when
reduce them. vehicle's warranty. you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
Danger indicates a hazard with a
information.
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
A circle with a slash through it is a

safety symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let
this happen.”
Introduction v
Vehicle Symbol Chart " : Charging System * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Here are some additional symbols I : Cruise Control : : Oil Pressure
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more B : Engine Coolant Temperature P : Power
information on the symbol, refer to O : Exterior Lamps / : Remote Vehicle Start
the Index.
# : Fog Lamps > : Safety Belt Reminders
9 : Airbag Readiness Light . : Fuel Gauge 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
# : Air Conditioning + : Fuses d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam M : Windshield Washer Fluid
% : Audio® Steering Wheel Controls Changer
or OnStar
j : LATCH System Child
$: Brake System Warning Light Restraints
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-18

Steering Wheel Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Instrument Panel Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Performance and Maintenance
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12 Traction Control
Initial Drive Information Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-19
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Vehicle Features Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-20
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Driving for Better Fuel
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-15 Roadside Assistance
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-16 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Driver Information
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-8 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Rear Vision
Passenger Sensing System Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
(Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
In Brief 1-3
1. Air Vents on page 8‑4. 8. Instrument Panel Storage on 16. Traction Control System (TCS)/
2. Turn and Lane-Change Lever. page 4‑1 (If Equipped). StabilitTrak Button. See
See Turn and Lane-Change 9. Hood Release. See Hood on Traction Control System (TCS)
Signals on page 6‑4. page 10‑4. on page 9‑30/StabiliTrak®
System on page 9‑31.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam 10. Exterior Lamp Controls on
Changer on page 6‑2. page 6‑1. 17. Climate Control Systems on
page 8‑1.
3. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑9. Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6‑5. 18. Safety Locks on page 2‑8.
4. Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑3. Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑4. 19. Parking Brake on page 9‑29.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer on 11. Data Link Connector (DLC) 20. Shift Lever. See Automatic
page 5‑4. (Out of View). See Malfunction Transmission on page 9‑23 or
Indicator Lamp on page 5‑13. Manual Transmission on
5. Light Sensor. See Automatic page 9‑26.
Headlamp System on page 6‑3. 12. Instrument Panel Storage on
page 4‑1. 21. Hazard Warning Flashers on
6. Instrument Panel Storage on page 6‑4.
page 4‑1. 13. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
page 5‑2. 22. Passenger Safety Belt
USB Port and Auxiliary Input Reminder Light. See Safety
Jack (Inside Instrument Panel 14. Horn on page 5‑2. Belt Reminders on page 5‑11.
Storage). See Auxiliary Devices 15. Ignition Positions on
on page 7‑24 page 9‑14.
7. Infotainment on page 7‑2.
1-4 In Brief
Initial Drive 7 : For vehicle with this feature,

press and hold briefly to initiate
Information vehicle locator. Press and hold for at
This section provides a brief least three seconds to sound the
overview about some of the panic alarm. Press again to cancel
important features that may or may the panic alarm.
not be on your specific vehicle. See Keys on page 2‑1 and Remote
For more detailed information, refer Keyless Entry (RKE) System
to each of the features which can be Operation on page 2‑3.
found later in this owner manual.
Remote Vehicle Start
Remote Keyless Entry Press the key release button to For vehicles with this feature, the
(RKE) System extend the key blade. The key can engine can be started from outside
be used for the ignition and all the vehicle.
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter may work up to 30 m locks. Starting the Vehicle
(98 ft) away from the vehicle. K: Press to unlock the driver door, 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
all doors or, if equipped, a locking vehicle.
fuel door.
Q: Press to lock all doors or, if 2. Press and release Q.
equipped, a locking fuel door. 3. Immediately after completing
Lock and unlock feedback can be Step 2, press and hold / for at
personalized. See Vehicle least four seconds or until the
Personalization on page 5‑27. turn signal lamps flash.
In Brief 1-5
When the engine starts, the parking Door Locks Q: Press to lock the doors.
lamps will turn on and remain on as
long as the engine is running. The To lock or unlock a door manually: See Power Door Locks on page 2‑7.
doors will be locked and the climate . From the inside, to lock the door,
control system may come on. use the lock knob on the top of Liftgate
The engine will continue to run for the door panel. To lock or unlock the liftgate,
10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a . From the outside, turn the key press Q or K on the door lock
10-minute time extension. Remote toward the front or rear of the switch or Remote Keyless
start can be extended only once. vehicle, or press K or Q on the Entry (RKE) transmitter. See Remote
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Canceling a Remote Start
transmitter. Operation on page 2‑3.
To cancel a remote start, do one of
the following: Power Door Locks
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle and press and hold /
until the parking lamps turn off.
. Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
. Turn the vehicle on and then off.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2‑5.
To open the liftgate, press K on the

RKE transmitter, then use the
K: Press to unlock the doors. touch pad.
1-6 In Brief
See Liftgate on page 2‑8. Seat Adjustment Height Adjustment
Windows Manual Seats
If available, move the lever up or

down to manually raise or lower
Press the switch to lower the To adjust a manual seat: the seat.
window. Pull up on the front edge of 1. Pull the handle at the front of See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3.
the switch to raise it. See Power the seat.
Windows on page 2‑14.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
The switches work when the position and release the handle.
vehicle is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY, or when Retained 3. Try to move the seat back and
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. forth to be sure it is locked in
See Retained Accessory Power place.
(RAP) on page 9‑18.
In Brief 1-7
Power Seats See Power Seat Adjustment on Reclining Seatbacks

page 3‑4.
Lumbar Adjustment
Manual Seat Shown, Power Seat

To adjust the power driver seat, Similar
if available:
Manual Seat Shown, Power Seat To recline the seatback:
. Move the seat forward or Similar
rearward by sliding the control 1. Lift the lever.
forward or rearward. If available, press the front or rear of If necessary, move the safety
the switch to increase or decrease belt out of the way to access the
. Raise or lower the front part of lumbar support. Release the switch
the seat cushion by moving the lever.
when the desired level of support is
front of the control up or down. reached. 2. Move the seatback to the
. Raise or lower the entire seat by desired position, then release
See Lumbar Adjustment on the lever to lock the seatback in
moving the rear of the control up page 3‑5.
or down. place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
1-8 In Brief
To return the seatback to an upright Heated Seats Head Restraint

position:
Adjustment
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the Do not drive until the head restraints
seatback, and the seatback for all occupants are installed and
returns to the upright position. adjusted properly.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to To achieve a comfortable seating

make sure it is locked. position, change the seatback
recline angle as little as necessary
See Reclining Seatbacks on while keeping the seat and the head
page 3‑5. restraint height in the proper
position.
Second Row Seats See Head Restraints on page 3‑2
The rear seatbacks can be folded and Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3.
down to increase cargo space. If available, the controls are on the
See Rear Seats on page 3‑9. climate control panel. To operate,
the engine must be running.
Press L or M to heat the driver or
passenger seat.
See Heated Front Seats on
page 3‑7.
In Brief 1-9
Safety Belts Passenger Sensing Mirror Adjustment

System (Canada) Exterior Mirrors
The passenger sensing system

turns off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag and knee
airbag under certain conditions.
No other airbag is affected by
Refer to the following sections for the passenger sensing system.
important information on how to use See Passenger Sensing System
safety belts properly: To adjust the mirrors:
(Canada) on page 3‑32 for
. Safety Belts on page 3‑13. important information. 1. Turn the selector switch to
L (Left) or R (Right) to choose
. How to Wear Safety Belts The passenger airbag status the driver or passenger mirror.
Properly on page 3‑14. indicator will be visible on the
instrument panel when the vehicle is 2. Move the control to adjust the
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑15. mirror.
started. See Passenger Airbag
. Lower Anchors and Tethers for Status Indicator (Canada) on
Children (LATCH System) on page 5‑12.
3. Turn the selector switch to 9 to
deselect the mirror.
page 3‑45.
1-10 In Brief
Interior Mirror Steering Wheel Interior Lighting

Adjustment Adjustment Dome Lamps
Hold the rearview mirror in the
center and move it to view the area
behind the vehicle.
Manual Rearview Mirror
For vehicles with a manual rearview
mirror, push the tab forward for
daytime use and pull it for nighttime
use to avoid glare from the
headlamps from behind. See
Manual Rearview Mirror on
page 2‑13.
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror To adjust the steering wheel: The dome lamp controls are in the
1. Pull the lever down. headliner above the rear seats.
For vehicles with an automatic
dimming rearview mirror. The mirror 2. Move the steering wheel up, 9 : Press to turn the lamps off,
will automatically reduce the glare down, forward, and backward. even when a door is open.
from the headlamps from behind. H : When the button is returned to
3. Pull the lever up to lock the
The dimming feature comes on the middle position, the lamps turn
steering wheel in place.
when the vehicle is started. on automatically when a door is
Do not adjust the steering wheel opened.
See Automatic Dimming Rearview
while driving.
Mirror on page 2‑13. R: Press to turn on the dome lamps.
In Brief 1-11
Reading Lamps Exterior Lighting ; : Turns on the parking lamps,

taillamps, license plate lamps,
sidemarker lamps, and instrument
panel lights.
5 : Turns on the headlamps,
parking lamps, taillamps, license
plate lamps, sidemarker lamps, and
instrument panel lights. A warning
chime sounds if the driver door is
opened when the ignition switch is
off and the headlamps are on.
For vehicles with front reading The exterior lamp control is to the
lamps, they are in the overhead left of the steering column on the # : For vehicles with fog lamps,
console. instrument panel. press to turn the lamps on or off.
# or $ : Press to turn each lamp There are four positions: See:
on or off. . Exterior Lamp Controls on
O: Briefly turn to this position to
page 6‑1
For more information about interior turn the automatic lamp control off
lighting, see Instrument Panel or on again. . Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Illumination Control on page 6‑5 or on page 6‑2
Courtesy Lamps on page 6‑5. AUTO: Turns the headlamps on
automatically at normal brightness, . Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑4
together with the parking lamps,
taillamps, license plate lamps,
sidemarker lamps, and instrument
panel lights.
1-12 In Brief
Windshield Wiper/Washer INT: Move the lever up to INT for

intermittent wipes, then turn
the x INT band up for more
frequent wipes or down for less
frequent wipes.
OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.
8: For a single wipe, briefly move
the wiper lever down. For several
The windshield wiper/washer lever wipes, hold the wiper lever down.
is located on the right side of the
steering column. b : Pull the windshield wiper lever
toward you to spray windshield
Move the lever to one of the washer fluid and activate the wipers. Climate Control System with
following positions: Heater and Air Conditioning
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
HI: Use for fast wipes. page 5‑3 andRear Window Wiper/ 1. Temperature Control
LO: Use for slow wipes. Washer on page 5‑4. 2. Fan Control
Climate Controls 3. Air Delivery Mode Control

4. Driver and Passenger Heated
For vehicles with these climate
Seats
control systems, the heating,
cooling, and ventilation can be 5. Air Conditioning
controlled for the vehicle. 6. Rear Window Defogger
7. Recirculation
In Brief 1-13
Transmission 2. Press the + (plus) end of the

button on the side of the shift
Driver Shift Control (DSC) lever to upshift, or push the
− (minus) end of the button to
downshift.
See Manual Mode on page 9‑25.
Manual Transmission
Climate Control System with

Heater Only
1. Temperature Control
2. Fan Control DSC allows you to shift an
3. Air Delivery Mode Control automatic transmission similar to a
manual transmission. To use the
4. Rear Window Defogger DSC feature:
See Climate Control Systems on 1. Move the shift lever from
page 8‑1. D (Drive) rearward to To engage reverse, with the vehicle
M (Manual). stationary, pull up on the button on
the selector lever and engage the
gear. If the gear does not engage,
set the lever in neutral, release the
clutch pedal and apply it again; then
repeat gear selection.
1-14 In Brief
See Manual Transmission on Vehicle Features Storing a Favorite Station

page 9‑26.
Stations from all bands can be
Up-Shift Light Radio(s) stored in the favorite lists in any
order. Up to six stations can be
Radio Controls Without stored in each favorite page and the
Touchscreen number of available favorite pages
O VOL: Press to turn the system can be set.
on and off. Turn to increase or To store the station to a position in
decrease the volume. the list, press the corresponding
RADIO BAND: Press to select AM, button 1−6 until a beep is heard.
If the vehicle has a manual FM, or SiriusXM® (if equipped). For more information, see “Storing a
transmission, it may have an Station as a Favorite” in AM-FM
up-shift light that indicates when to © or ¨ (Seek): Press to seek the
previous or next station. Radio on page 7‑11.
shift to the next higher gear for the
best fuel economy. Buttons 1−6: Press to save and Radio Controls With
See Manual Transmission on select favorite stations. Touchscreen
page 9‑26. INFO: Press to view current radio Audio Source Menu
information.
z VOL y (Volume): Press to
For more information about these increase or decrease the volume.
and other radio features, see
Operation on page 7‑8.
O (Power): Press and hold to turn
the system on and off.
D (Home Page): Press to enter
the Home Page.
In Brief 1-15
Storing a Favorite Station 3. Hold down any of the preset commercial-free music, coast to
buttons to save the current radio coast, and in digital-quality sound.
Stations from all bands can be
station to that button of the A fee is required to receive the
stored in any order in the favorite
selected favorites page. SiriusXM service.
pages.
To change a preset button, tune to Refer to:
Up to five stations can be stored in
the new desired radio station and . www.siriusxm.com or call
each of the seven favorites pages.
hold the button. 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.).
Storing Stations See “Storing a Favorite Station” . www.xmradio.ca or call
To store the station to a position in under AM-FM Radio on page 7‑11. 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
the list, press the corresponding
button 1−5 until a beep is heard. Setting the Clock See Satellite Radio on page 7‑15.
1. Select the desired station. See Clock on page 5‑5.
Portable Audio Devices
2. Press S or T to select the Satellite Radio Some vehicles have a 3.5 mm
desired page of saved favorites. (1/8 in) auxiliary input and a
Vehicles with a SiriusXM® satellite
radio tuner and a valid SiriusXM USB port in the storage area to the
satellite radio subscription can right of the infotainment system.
receive SiriusXM programming. A second AUX input is on the
front of the infotainment system,
SiriusXM Satellite Radio if equipped. External devices such
Service as iPods®, laptop computers, MP3
SiriusXM is a satellite radio service players, CD changers, and USB
based in the 48 contiguous United storage devices may be connected,
States and 10 Canadian provinces. depending on the audio system.
SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑24.
variety of programming and
1-16 In Brief
Bluetooth® Steering Wheel Controls Press to silence the vehicle

speakers while using the
The Bluetooth® system allows users infotainment system. Press again to
with a Bluetooth-enabled mobile turn the sound on.
phone to make and receive
hands-free calls using the vehicle For vehicles with OnStar or
audio system and controls. Bluetooth systems, press to reject
an incoming call, or end a
The Bluetooth-enabled mobile current call.
phone must be paired with the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system before it _ SRC ^ : Press to select an audio
can be used in the vehicle. Not all source.
phones will support all functions. Toggle up or down to select the next
See Bluetooth (Overview) on or previous favorite radio station or
page 7‑28 or Bluetooth CD/MP3 track.
(Infotainment Controls) on Some audio steering wheel controls + x −: Press + or − to increase or
page 7‑30 or Bluetooth (Voice could differ depending on the decrease the volume.
Recognition) on page 7‑39 and vehicle's options. Some audio
Hands-Free Phone on page 7‑45. See Steering Wheel Controls on
steering wheel controls can be
page 5‑2.
adjusted at the steering wheel.
b / g : Press to interact with the
available Bluetooth or OnStar
systems.
$ / i : Press to reject an
incoming call, or end a current call.
In Brief 1-17
Cruise Control *: Press to disengage cruise 3. MENU: Press to display the DIC
control without erasing the set menus. This button is also used
speed from memory. to return to or exit the last
screen displayed on the DIC.
See Cruise Control on page 9‑34.
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
Driver Information on page 5‑24.
Center (DIC) Rear Vision
The DIC display is in the instrument Camera (RVC)
cluster. It shows the status of many
vehicle systems. The controls for If available, the RVC displays a view
the DIC are on the turn signal lever. of the area behind the vehicle when
the vehicle is shifted into
R (Reverse). The display will appear
on the radio screen.
5 : Press to turn the cruise control To clean the camera lens above the
system on and off. license plate, rinse it with water and
RES/+: Move the thumbwheel up to wipe it with a soft cloth.
resume a previously set speed or to See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on
accelerate. 1. SET/CLR: Press to set or clear page 9‑37.
the menu item displayed.
SET/−: Move the thumbwheel down
to set a speed or to make the 2. w x : Use the thumbwheel to
vehicle decelerate. scroll through the items in
each menu.
1-18 In Brief
Ultrasonic Parking Assist Power Outlets On vehicles with this feature, the
sunroof only operates when the
If available, this system uses The accessory power outlets can be ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
sensors on the rear bumper to used to plug in electrical equipment, Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
assist with parking and avoiding such as a cell phone or MP3 player. active.
objects while in R (Reverse). The vehicle has an accessory
It operates at speeds less than Open/Close: Press and hold the
power outlet located in front of the front or rear of switch (1) to open or
8 km/h (5 mph). URPA uses audible cupholders on the center stack.
beeps to provide distance and close the sunroof.
system information. See Power Outlets on page 5‑6. Vent: Press and hold the front or
Keep the sensors on the vehicle's rear of switch (2) to vent or close
rear bumper clean to ensure proper Sunroof the sunroof.
operation. Manually close the sunshade.
See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on The sunroof will not operate if the
page 9‑36. vehicle has an electrical failure.
See Sunroof on page 2‑16.
In Brief 1-19
Performance and StabiliTrak® System Tire Pressure Monitor

Maintenance The StabiliTrak system assists with This vehicle may have a Tire
directional control of the vehicle in Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
difficult driving conditions. The
Traction Control system is on when the vehicle is
System (TCS) started.
The traction control system limits . To turn off both Traction
wheel spin. The system is on when Control and StabiliTrak, press
the vehicle is started. and hold g until g and
. To turn off traction control, press i illuminate in the instrument
The low tire pressure warning light
and release g on the center cluster.
alerts to a significant loss in
stack. i illuminates in the . Press g again to turn on both pressure of one of the vehicle's
instrument cluster. systems. tires. If the warning light comes on,
stop as soon as possible and inflate
. Press and release g again to StabiliTrak will automatically turn
the tires to the recommended
turn traction control back on. back on when the vehicle speed
pressure shown on the Tire and
exceeds 50 km/h (31 mph).
See Traction Control System (TCS) Loading Information label. See
on page 9‑30. See StabiliTrak® System on Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑10.
page 9‑31. The warning light will remain on until
the tire pressure is corrected.
1-20 In Brief
The low tire pressure warning light Remember, the oil life display must Be careful not to reset the oil life
may come on in cool weather when be reset after each oil change. It will display accidentally at any time
the vehicle is first started, and then not reset itself. Also, be careful not other than after the oil is changed.
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This to reset the oil life display It cannot be reset accurately.
may be an early indicator that the accidentally at any time other than See Engine Oil Life System on
tire pressures are getting low and when the oil has just been changed. page 10‑11.
the tires need to be inflated to the It cannot be reset accurately until
proper pressure. the next oil change.
Driving for Better Fuel
The TPMS does not replace normal Resetting the Oil Life System
monthly tire maintenance. Maintain
Economy
the correct tire pressures. 1. Press the MENU button to show Driving habits can affect fuel
Remaining Oil Life on the mileage. Here are some driving tips
See Tire Pressure Monitor System display. This display shows an to get the best fuel economy
on page 10‑49. estimate of the oil’s remaining possible.
useful life. If 99% is displayed,
Engine Oil Life System that means that 99% of the . Avoid fast starts and accelerate
current oil life remains. smoothly.
The engine oil life system calculates
engine oil life based on vehicle use 2. To reset the engine oil life . Brake gradually and avoid
and displays the Code 82 DIC system, press the SET/CLR abrupt stops.
message when it is necessary to button while the oil life display is . Avoid idling the engine for long
change the engine oil and filter. active. After a few seconds, periods of time.
there will be a single chime and
the oil life will be reset to 100%.
. When road and weather
conditions are appropriate, use
cruise control.
In Brief 1-21
Always follow posted speed

OnStar®
.
limits or drive more slowly when

Roadside Assistance
conditions require. Program If equipped, this vehicle has a
Canada: 1-800-268-6800 comprehensive, in-vehicle system
. Keep vehicle tires properly
that can connect to a live Advisor
inflated. Mexico: 01-800-466-0800 for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
. Combine several trips into a As the owner of a new Chevrolet, Connection, and Diagnostic
single trip. you are automatically enrolled in the Services. See OnStar Overview on
. Replace the vehicle's tires with Roadside Assistance program. page 14‑1.
the same TPC Spec number See Roadside Assistance Program
molded into the tire's sidewall (Canada) on page 13‑5 or Roadside
near the size. Assistance Program (Mexico) on
. Follow recommended scheduled page 13‑7.
maintenance. Roadside Assistance and
OnStar (Canada)
If the vehicle has an active OnStar
subscription, contact OnStar and the
vehicle’s current GPS location will
be sent to an OnStar advisor to
assess the situation, contact
Roadside Assistance, and relay the
exact location to send help.
1-22 In Brief
2 NOTES
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Keys and Locks
Windows Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Keys
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Keys and Locks Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 { WARNING
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Interior Mirrors
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Leaving children in a vehicle with
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-13 the ignition key is dangerous and
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Automatic Dimming Rearview
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) children or others could be
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 seriously injured or killed. They
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Windows could operate the power windows
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 or other controls or make the
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 vehicle move. The windows will
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 function with the keys in the
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 ignition, and children or others
Roof could be caught in the path of a
Doors Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 closing window. Do not leave
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
children in a vehicle with the
Vehicle Security ignition key.
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-10
2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
If it becomes difficult to turn the key

in the ignition, inspect the key blade
for debris. Periodically clean with a
brush or pick.
See your dealer if a new key is
needed.
If locked out of the vehicle, see
Roadside Assistance Program
(Canada) on page 13‑5 or Roadside
Assistance Program (Mexico) on
page 13‑7.
The key that is part of the Remote Press the key release button on the With an active OnStar subscription,
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can RKE transmitter to extend the key an OnStar Advisor may remotely
be used for the ignition and all blade. Press the button and the key unlock the vehicle. See OnStar
locks. blade to retract the key. Overview on page 14‑1.
The key code is stamped on the key
number plate and can be used to
make new keys at any dealer. Store
this information in a safe place
outside the vehicle.
Remote Keyless Entry Remote Keyless Entry The following may be available:
(RKE) System (RKE) System Operation Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors
or, if equipped, a locking fuel door.
See Radio Frequency Statement The RKE transmitter may work up to
(Canada) on page 13‑18 for 30 m (98 ft) away from the vehicle. The turn signal indicators may flash
information regarding Part 15 of and/or the horn may sound to
Other conditions can affect the indicate locking. See “Locking
the Federal Communications performance of the transmitter.
Commission (FCC) rules and Feedback” under Vehicle
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Personalization on page 5‑27.
Industry Canada Standards System on page 2‑3.
RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
If the driver door is open when Q is
If there is a decrease in the RKE pressed and Unlocked Door Anti
operating range: Lock Out is enabled through vehicle
. Check the distance. The personalization, all doors will lock
transmitter may be too far from and then the driver door will unlock.
the vehicle. See “Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out”
under Vehicle Personalization on
. Check the location. Other page 5‑27.
vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Pressing Q may also arm the
theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle
. Check the transmitter's battery.
Alarm System on page 2‑9.
See “Battery Replacement” later
in this section. K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
. If the transmitter is still not driver door, all doors or, if equipped,
a locking fuel door. See “Door
working correctly, see your
Unlock Options” under Vehicle
dealer or a qualified technician
for service. Personalization on page 5‑27.
The turn signal indicators may flash / (Remote Vehicle Start): For Battery Replacement
and/or the horn may sound to vehicles with this feature, press Q The battery is not rechargeable.
indicate unlocking. See “Unlock
Feedback” under Vehicle and then press and hold / to start To replace the battery:
Personalization on page 5‑27. the engine from outside the vehicle
using the RKE transmitter. See
Pressing K will disarm the Remote Vehicle Start on page 2‑5.
theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle
The buttons on the keys are
Alarm System on page 2‑9.
disabled when there is a key in
7 (Vehicle Locator/Panic the ignition.
Alarm): For vehicles with this
feature, press and hold briefly to Programming Transmitters to
initiate vehicle locator. The exterior the Vehicle
lamps flash and the horn chirps Only RKE transmitters programmed
three times. to this vehicle will work. If a
Press and hold 7 for at least transmitter is lost or stolen, a
three seconds to sound the panic replacement can be purchased and
programmed through your dealer. 1. Extend the key blade and open
alarm. The horn sounds and the the battery cover on the back of
turn signals flash for 30 seconds, When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to this vehicle, all the transmitter by prying with a
or until 7 is pressed again or the remaining transmitters must also be finger.
key is placed in the ignition and reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen 2. Remove the used battery by
turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or transmitters will no longer work pushing on the battery and
ON/RUN. once the new transmitter is sliding it toward the key blade.
programmed.
3. Insert the new battery, positive Laws in some local communities When the engine starts, the parking
side facing up. Push the battery may restrict the use of remote lamps will turn on and remain on as
down until it is held in place. starters. For example, some laws long as the engine is running. The
Replace with a CR2032 or require a person using remote start doors will be locked and the climate
equivalent battery. to have the vehicle in view. Check control system may come on.
4. Snap the battery cover back on local regulations for any The engine will continue to run for
to the transmitter. requirements. 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
Other conditions can affect the 10-minute time extension. Remote
Remote Vehicle Start performance of the transmitter. start can be extended only once.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Start the vehicle before driving.
The vehicle may have this feature System on page 2‑3.
that allows you to start the engine Extending Engine Run Time
from outside the vehicle. Starting the Vehicle
For a 10-minute extension, repeat
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): To start the engine using the remote Steps 1–3 while the engine is still
This button will be on the RKE start feature: running. The remote start can be
transmitter if the vehicle has remote 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the extended once.
start. vehicle. When the remote start is extended,
The climate control system will use
the previous settings during a 2. Press and release Q. the second 10 minutes will start
immediately.
remote start. The rear defog may 3. Immediately after completing
come on during remote start based For example, if the engine has been
Step 2, press and hold / for at
on cold ambient conditions. The running for five minutes, and
least four seconds or until the 10 minutes are added, the engine
rear fog indicator light does not turn signal lamps flash. The turn
come on during remote start. If the will run for a total of 15 minutes.
signal lamps flashing confirms
vehicle has heated seats, they may the request to remote start the
come on during a remote start. See vehicle has been received.
Heated Front Seats on page 3‑7.
A maximum of two remote starts, Conditions in Which Remote Start Door Locks
or a single start with an extension, Will Not Work
is allowed between ignition cycles.
The vehicle's ignition must be
The remote vehicle start feature will
not operate if:
{ WARNING
turned on and then back off before . The key is in the ignition (key Unlocked doors can be
the remote start procedure can be access) or if the key is in the dangerous.
used again. vehicle (keyless access). . Passengers, especially
Canceling a Remote Start . The hood is not closed. children, can easily open the
doors and fall out of a moving
To cancel a remote start, do one of . The hazard warning flashers vehicle. When a door is
the following: are on. locked, the handle will not
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the . The malfunction indicator lamp open it. The chance of being
vehicle and press and hold / is on. thrown out of the vehicle in a
until the parking lamps turn off. crash is increased if the
. The engine coolant temperature doors are not locked. So, all
. Turn on the hazard warning is too high. passengers should wear
flashers. . The oil pressure is low. safety belts properly and the
. Turn the vehicle on and then off. doors should be locked
. Two remote vehicle starts, or a
whenever the vehicle is
single remote start with an
driven.
extension, have already
been used. . Young children who get into
unlocked vehicles may be
. The vehicle is not in P (Park).
unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Power Door Locks Automatic Door Locks
Automatic Door Lock
injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock the When the doors are closed, the
vehicle whenever leaving it. ignition is on, and the shift lever is
moved out of P (Park) for automatic
. Outsiders can easily enter transmissions, or when vehicle
through an unlocked door speed becomes faster than 13km/h
when you slow down or stop (8mph) for manual transmissions,
the vehicle. Locking the doors the doors will lock.
can help prevent this from
happening. The automatic door lock feature
cannot be disabled.
To lock or unlock a door manually: Automatic Door Unlock
. From the inside, to lock the door, When the shift lever is moved into
use the lock knob on the top of K (Unlock): Press to unlock the P (Park) for automatic transmission
the door panel. doors. vehicles or when the ignition is
. From the outside, turn the key Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors. turned off for manual transmission
toward the front or rear of the vehicles, the doors will automatically
unlock.
vehicle, or press K or Q on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) See Vehicle Personalization on
transmitter. page 5‑27.
Safety Locks Press { to activate the rear door Doors

safety locks. The indicator light in
the switch will illuminate. Liftgate
Press { again to deactivate the
safety locks. { WARNING
If an inside rear door handle is Exhaust gases can enter the
pulled when the safety lock is vehicle if it is driven with the
activated, that door will remain
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
locked and the indicator light may
any objects that pass through the
flash. Release the handle, then
deactivate the safety locks to allow seal between the body and the
the door to open from the inside. trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which cannot be
The rear door safety locks prevent seen or smelled. It can cause
passengers from opening the rear unconsciousness and even death.
doors from inside the vehicle.
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate or trunk/hatch open:
. Close all of the windows.
. Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued) Vehicle Security

This vehicle has theft-deterrent
. Adjust the climate control features; however, they do not make
system to a setting that the vehicle impossible to steal.
brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See “Climate
Vehicle Alarm System
Control Systems” in the For vehicles with an anti-theft alarm
Index. system.
. If the vehicle is equipped with The indicator light, on the
a power liftgate, disable the instrument panel near the
power liftgate function. windshield, shows the status of
To open the liftgate from outside of the system.
For more information about the vehicle, press K on the
carbon monoxide, see Engine RKE transmitter, then use the
Exhaust on page 9‑22. touch pad.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
To lock or unlock the liftgate, System Operation on page 2‑3.
press Q or K on the door lock
When closing the liftgate, close from
switch or Remote Keyless the center to ensure that it fully
Entry (RKE) transmitter. See Remote latches.
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Arming the System Disarming the System How to Detect a Tamper

1. Close all doors, the hood, and To disarm the system, either unlock Condition
the liftgate. the doors using the transmitter, If K is pressed and the horn chirps
2. Lock the vehicle using the or start the vehicle. three times, an attempted break-in
transmitter or the power door To avoid setting off the alarm by has occurred while the system was
lock button with the door open. accident: armed.
The indicator light on the . Lock the vehicle with the
instrument panel should come transmitter after all occupants Immobilizer
on and flash for about have left the vehicle and all
30 seconds. See Radio Frequency Statement
doors are closed. (Canada) on page 13‑18 for
3. After 30 seconds, or if the Q . Always unlock a door with the information regarding Part 15 of the
button on the transmitter is transmitter. Unlocking the driver Federal Communications
pressed twice, the alarm system door with the backup key will not Commission (FCC) rules and
will arm, and the indicator light disarm the alarm. Industry Canada Standards
will begin to slowly flash to show RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
that the alarm is operating. If you set off the alarm by accident,
turn off the alarm by pressing K the Immobilizer Operation
If any door, or the hood is opened transmitter, or start the vehicle with
without first unlocking with the a recognized transmitter in the This vehicle has a passive
transmitter, the turn signals will flash vehicle. The alarm will not stop if theft-deterrent system.
and the horn will sound for about you unlock the driver door with The system does not have to be
30 seconds. The alarm system will the key. manually armed or disarmed.
then re-arm to monitor for the next
unauthorized event. The vehicle is automatically
immobilized when the key is
The theft-deterrent alarm system will
removed from the ignition.
not activate if the doors are locked
with the key.
The system is automatically If the engine does not start and the Exterior Mirrors
disarmed when the vehicle is security light stays on, there is a
started with the correct key. The key problem with the system. Turn the
uses a transponder that matches an ignition off and try again. Convex Mirrors
immobilizer control unit in the If the engine still does not start, and
vehicle and automatically disarms the key appears to be undamaged { WARNING
the system. Only an authorized key or the light continues to stay on, try
starts the vehicle. The vehicle may A convex mirror can make things,
another ignition key. If the engine like other vehicles, look farther
not start if the key is damaged. does not start with the other key, the
away than they really are. If you
vehicle needs service. If the vehicle
cut too sharply into the right lane,
does start, the first key may be
damaged. See your dealer who can you could hit a vehicle on the
service the theft-deterrent system right. Check the inside mirror or
and have a new key made. glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the
The security light in the instrument The passenger side mirror is convex
theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
cluster comes on if there is a shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
problem with arming or disarming curved so more can be seen from
the theft-deterrent system. the driver seat.
When trying to start the vehicle, the
security light comes on briefly when
the ignition is turned on.
Power Mirrors For vehicles with folding mirrors and

heated mirrors. See Folding Mirrors
on page 2‑12 or Folding Mirrors on
page 2‑12 and Heated Mirrors on
page 2‑12.
Folding Mirrors
Manual Folding Mirrors
For vehicles with manual folding
mirrors, these mirrors can be folded
inward to prevent damage when
going through an automatic car 2. Pull the selector switch back to
wash. To fold, pull the mirror toward fold the mirrors.
the vehicle. Push the mirror outward
To adjust the mirrors: to return it to the original position. 3. Pull the selector switch back
1. Turn the selector switch to again to return the mirrors to
L (Left) or R (Right) to choose Folding Mirrors their original position.
the driver or passenger mirror.
Power Folding Mirrors Heated Mirrors
2. Move the control to adjust the
mirror. The vehicle may have power folding For vehicles with heated mirrors:
mirrors.
3. Turn the selector switch to 9 to 1 (Rear Window Defogger):
To fold the mirrors: Press to heat the mirrors.
deselect the mirror.
1. Turn the selector switch to 9. See “Rear Window Defogger” under
Climate Control Systems on
page 8‑1.
Interior Mirrors Automatic Dimming Windows

Rearview Mirror
Manual Rearview Mirror To adjust the inside rearview mirror, { WARNING
Hold the rearview mirror in the hold the rearview mirror in the
center and move it to view the area Never leave a child, a helpless
center and move it to view the area
behind the vehicle. adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
behind the vehicle.
especially with the windows
For vehicles with a manual rearview For vehicles with an automatic closed in warm or hot weather.
mirror, push the tab forward for dimming rearview mirror, the mirror They can be overcome by the
daytime use and pull it for nighttime will automatically reduce the glare extreme heat and suffer
use to avoid glare from the from the headlamps from behind. permanent injuries or even death
headlamps from behind. The dimming feature and the
from heat stroke.
indicator light come on when the
Vehicles with OnStar have three
vehicle is started.
control buttons at the bottom of the
mirror. See your dealer for more Vehicles with OnStar have three
information about OnStar and how control buttons at the bottom of the
to subscribe to it. See OnStar mirror. See your dealer for more
Overview on page 14‑1. information about OnStar and how
to subscribe to it. See OnStar
Overview on page 14‑1.
Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water.
The vehicle aerodynamics are Express-Up/Express-Down

designed to improve fuel economy Windows
performance. This may result in a
pulsing sound when either rear If equipped, a window with the
window is down and the front express-up/down feature can be
windows are up. To reduce the raised or lowered without holding
sound, open either a front window the switch. Press or pull the window
or the sunroof (if equipped). switch fully and release it to activate
the express feature. The express
mode can be canceled by pressing
Power Windows or pulling the switch.
{ WARNING Programming the Power

The driver door also has switches Windows
Children could be seriously that control the passenger and rear If the battery on the vehicle has
injured or killed if caught in the windows. The switches work when been recharged, disconnected,
path of a closing window. Never the vehicle is in ON/RUN or ACC/ or replaced, windows with the
leave keys in a vehicle with ACCESSORY, or when Retained express-up feature need to be
children. When there are children Accessory Power (RAP) is active. reprogrammed for this feature to
in the rear seat, use the window See Retained Accessory Power work. To program the window:
lockout button to prevent (RAP) on page 9‑18.
operation of the windows. 1. Close all doors with the
Press the switch to lower the ignition in ON/RUN or ACC/
See Keys on page 2‑1. window. Pull up on the front edge of ACCESSORY, or when RAP is
the switch to raise it. active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 9‑18.
2. Press and continue to hold the
window switch until the window
is fully open.
3. Pull up and hold the window Rear Window Lockout Sun Visors
switch to close the window.
Continue to hold it briefly after
the window is fully closed.
4. Repeat for each window that has
the express-up feature.
Anti-Pinch Feature
The anti-pinch feature is on
windows with the express-up
feature. If an object is in the way of
the window as it is express-closing, Pull the sun visor down to block
or in certain weather conditions like glare. Detach the sun visor from the
severe icing, the window will stop center mount to pivot to the side
and open to a factory preset The rear window lockout feature window, or to extend along the rod,
position. The window functions prevents the rear passenger if available.
normally once the obstruction is windows from operating, except
removed. from the driver position.
Press v to activate the rear
window lockout switch. The
indicator light comes on when
activated.
Press v again to deactivate the
lockout switch.
Roof Open/Close: Press and hold the

front or rear of switch (1) to open or
close the sunroof.
Sunroof
Vent: Press and hold the front or
rear of switch (2) to vent or close
the sunroof.
Manually close the sunshade.
The sunroof will not operate if the
vehicle has an electrical failure. Dirt and debris may collect on the
sunroof seal or in the track. This
could cause an issue with sunroof
operation or noise. It could also plug
the water drainage system.
Periodically open the sunroof and
remove any obstacles or loose
debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and
On vehicles with this feature, the roof sealing area using a clean
sunroof only operates when the cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
ignition is turned to ON/RUN or remove grease from the sunroof.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
active.
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Safety Belt Use During Servicing the Airbag-Equipped

Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Restraints Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Adding Equipment to the
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-20 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-36
Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-37
Head Restraints Replacing Safety Belt System Replacing Airbag System
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Front Seats Airbag System Child Restraints
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Airbag System (Canada) . . . . . 3-22 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4 Airbag System (Mexico) . . . . . 3-24 Infants and Young
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Where Are the Airbags? Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 (Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-42
Front Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Where Are the Airbags? Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-44
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 (Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 When Should an Airbag for Children (LATCH
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Rear Seats
What Makes an Airbag Replacing LATCH System
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
How Does an Airbag Securing Child Restraints
Safety Belts Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 (Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 What Will You See after an Securing Child Restraints
How to Wear Safety Belts Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 (Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-53
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Passenger Sensing System
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 (Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints Front Seats

The front seats have adjustable
{ WARNING head restraints in the outboard
seating positions.
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
The height of the head restraint can
be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. Try to move the head
restraint to make sure that it is
locked in place.
Adjust the head restraint so that the To lower the head restraint, press
top of the restraint is at the same the button, located on the top of the
height as the top of the occupant's seatback, and push the head
head. This position reduces the restraint down. Try to move the
chances of a neck injury in a crash. head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is
locked in place.
The front seat outboard head
restraints are not designed to be
removed.
Rear Seats To lower the head restraint, press Front Seats

the button, located on the top of
The vehicle's rear seats have
the seatback, and push the head
adjustable head restraints in the
restraint down. Try to move the Seat Adjustment
outboard seating positions.
head restraint after the button is Seat Position
released to make sure that it is
locked in place.
Rear outboard head restraints are
{ WARNING
not designed to be removed. You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a driver
seat while the vehicle is moving.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
The height of the head restraint can

be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. Try to move the head
restraint to make sure that it is
locked in place.
Height Adjustment Power Seat Adjustment
To adjust a manual seat:

1. Pull the handle at the front of
the seat. If available, move the lever up or To adjust the power driver seat,
down to manually raise or lower if available:
2. Slide the seat to the desired the seat.
position and release the handle. . Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the control
3. Try to move the seat back and
forward or rearward.
forth to be sure it is locked in
place. . Raise or lower the front part of
the seat cushion by moving the
front of the control up or down.
. Raise or lower the entire seat by
moving the rear of the control up
or down.
To adjust the seatback, see Reclining Seatbacks

Reclining Seatbacks on page 3‑5.
To adjust the lumbar support, see
Lumbar Adjustment on page 3‑5.
{ WARNING
If either seatback is not locked, it
Lumbar Adjustment could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
Manual Seat Shown, Power Seat
Similar
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the lever.
If necessary, move the safety
belt out of the way to access the
Manual Seat Shown, Power Seat lever.
Similar
2. Move the seatback to the
If available, press the front or rear of desired position, then release
the switch to increase or decrease the lever to lock the seatback in
lumbar support. Release the switch place.
when the desired level of support is
reached. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
To return the seatback to an upright

position: WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the The shoulder belt will not be For proper protection when the
seatback, and the seatback against your body. Instead, it will vehicle is in motion, have the
returns to the upright position. be in front of you. In a crash, you seatback upright. Then sit well
2. Push and pull on the seatback to could go into it, receiving neck or back in the seat and wear the
make sure it is locked. other injuries. safety belt properly.
The lap belt could go up over
{ WARNING your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not at your pelvic
Sitting in a reclined position when bones. This could cause serious
the vehicle is in motion can be internal injuries.
dangerous. Even when buckled
(Continued)
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job.
(Continued)
Do not have a seatback reclined if

the vehicle is moving.
Front Seat Armrest Heated Front Seats
{ WARNING
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns. To
reduce the risk of burns, people
with such a condition should use
care when using the seat heater,
especially for long periods of
time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against If available, the controls are on the
heat, such as a blanket, cushion, climate control panel. To operate,
There may be an armrest on the cover, or similar item. This may the engine must be running.
inboard side of the driver seat. To cause the seat heater to Press M or L to turn the driver or
raise or lower the armrest, push up overheat. An overheated seat passenger heated seat on or off.
or pull down on the armrest. heater may cause a burn or may The indicator light on the control
damage the seat. turns on when this feature is on.
The passenger seat may take
longer to heat up.
Remote Start Heated Seats Folding Seatback

If available, the heated seats can be
{ WARNING
The front passenger seatback may
turned on automatically during a fold flat. Things you put on this seatback
remote start when it is cold outside. can strike and injure people in a
The heated seats will be canceled
when the ignition is turned on. Press
{ WARNING sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.
Remove or secure all items
the control to use the heated seats If you fold the seatback forward to before driving.
after the vehicle is started. carry longer objects, such as skis,
The heated seat indicator lights do be sure any such cargo is not To fold the seatback:
not turn on during a remote start. near an airbag. In a crash, an
inflating airbag might force that 1. Lower the head restraint all the
The temperature performance of an way. See Head Restraints on
unoccupied seat may be reduced. object toward a person. This
could cause severe injury or even page 3‑2.
This is normal.
death. Secure objects away from 2. Move the seat as far back as
The heated seats will not turn on the area in which an airbag would possible. See Seat Adjustment
during a remote start unless the on page 3‑3.
inflate. For more information, see
heated seat feature is enabled in
Where Are the Airbags? (Canada)
the vehicle personalization menu.
See Remote Vehicle Start on on page 3‑26 or Where Are the
page 2‑5 and Vehicle Airbags? (Mexico) on page 3‑27
Personalization on page 5‑27. and Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑10.
To raise the seatback: Rear Seats

1. Lift the lever fully to unlock the
seatback. Then, raise the Folding the Seatback
seatback and push it rearward Either side of the seatback can be
until it re-engages. folded down for more cargo space.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to Fold a seatback only when the
make sure it is locked in place. vehicle is not moving.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
{ WARNING the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
If either seatback is not locked, it safety belts. Always unbuckle the
could move forward in a sudden safety belts and return them to
3. Lift the lever fully and fold the their normal stowed position
seatback forward. before folding a rear seat.
If necessary, move the safety Always push and pull on the Notice: Folding the rear seatback
belt out of the way to access the seatbacks to be sure they are prior to tilting the seat cushion
lever. locked. forward may damage the rear
4. Continue lowering the seatback seat. Always tilt the rear seat
until it is completely folded and cushion forward before folding
locks in place. the seatback.
To fold a seatback down:
1. Make sure the floor area in front
of the rear seats is clear.
2. Fully lower the head restraint.
See Head Restraints on
page 3‑2.
3. Slide the front seats forward and 4. Pull the strap on the front edge
place the front seatbacks in the of the rear seat cushion to
upright position. See Seat release the cushion. Tilt the seat
Adjustment on page 3‑3 and cushion forward toward the front
Reclining Seatbacks on of the vehicle.
page 3‑5. The seat cushion must be tilted
forward before the seatback is
folded down. Otherwise, the
seatback will not fold down
properly.
Rear Seat with Retainer Hook

on the Seatback
6. Reach under the belt and pull
the lever on top of the seatback
to unlock the seatback.
A tab near the seatback lever
raises when the seatback is
unlocked.
Rear Seat with Retainer Hook

on the Seatback
5. Make sure the safety belt is in
the retainer hook on top of the
seatback, if equipped.
Raising the Seatback
{ WARNING
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
7. Fold the seatback forward Safety Belt Clip on Side Trim

and down. 8. Place the outboard safety belt in
the safety belt clip (if equipped)
{ WARNING
on the side trim of the vehicle. A safety belt that is improperly
9. Repeat Steps 1–8 for the other routed, not properly attached,
seatback and seat cushion, or twisted will not provide the
if desired. protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the
rear seatback, always check to be
sure that the safety belts are
properly routed and attached, and
are not twisted.
To return the rear seatback to the 2. Lift the seatback and push it If additional cargo space is not
normal seating position: rearward to lock it in place. A tab needed, the seatbacks should be
near the seatback lever retracts kept in the upright, locked position.
when the seatback is locked in
place. Rear Seat Armrest
Make sure the safety belts are
not pinched by the seatback
locking mechanism.
The center rear safety belt may
lock when you raise the
seatback. If this happens, let
the belt go back all the way and
start again.
Safety Belt Clip on Side Trim 3. Push and pull the top of the
seatback to be sure it is locked
1. Remove the outboard safety belt into position.
from the safety belt clip
(if equipped) on the side trim 4. Return the seat cushion to its
of the vehicle. original position and push down If available, the rear seat has an
on the front part of the seat armrest in the center of the
cushion until it latches. seatback. Lower the armrest to
Make sure the safety belts and access the cupholders.
safety belt buckles are not To fold, lift the armrest up and push
trapped under the seat cushion. it rearward until it is flush with the
5. Repeat Steps 1–4 for the other seatback.
seatback and seat cushion,
if necessary.
Safety Belts Why Safety Belts Work

WARNING (Continued)
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts It is extremely dangerous to ride
properly. It also describes some
in a cargo area, inside or outside
things not to do with safety belts.
of a vehicle. In a collision,
passengers riding in these areas
{ WARNING are more likely to be seriously
Do not let anyone ride where a injured or killed. Do not allow
safety belt cannot be worn passengers to ride in any area of
properly. In a crash, if you or your the vehicle that is not equipped
passenger(s) are not wearing with seats and safety belts.
safety belts, injuries can be much Always wear a safety belt, and
worse than if you are wearing check that all passenger(s) are
When riding in a vehicle, you travel
safety belts. You can be seriously restrained properly too. as fast as the vehicle does. If the
injured or killed by hitting things vehicle stops suddenly, you keep
inside the vehicle harder or by This vehicle has indicators as a going until something stops you.
being ejected from the vehicle. reminder to buckle the safety belts. It could be the windshield, the
In addition, anyone who is not See Safety Belt Reminders on instrument panel, or the safety belts!
buckled up can strike other page 5‑11. When you wear a safety belt, you
passengers in the vehicle.
and the vehicle slow down together.
(Continued) There is more time to stop because
you stop over a longer distance and,
when worn properly, your strongest
bones take the forces from the Also, in nearly all states and in
safety belts. That is why wearing all Canadian provinces, the law
safety belts makes such good requires wearing safety belts.
sense.
Questions and Answers About
How to Wear Safety Belts
Safety Belts Properly
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle This section is only for people of
after a crash if I am wearing a adult size.
safety belt? There are special things to know
A: You could be — whether you are about safety belts and children. And
wearing a safety belt or not. there are different rules for smaller
Your chance of being conscious children and infants. If a child will be . Sit up straight and always keep
during and after a crash, so you riding in the vehicle, see Older your feet on the floor in front
can unbuckle and get out, is Children on page 3‑38 or Infants of you.
much greater if you are belted. and Young Children on page 3‑40. . Always use the correct buckle
Follow those rules for everyone's for your seating position.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why protection.
should I have to wear safety . Wear the lap part of the belt low
belts? It is very important for all occupants and snug on the hips, just
to buckle up. Statistics show that touching the thighs. In a crash,
A: Airbags are supplemental unbelted people are hurt more often
systems only; so they work with this applies force to the strong
in crashes than those who are pelvic bones and you would be
safety belts — not instead of wearing safety belts.
them. Whether or not an airbag less likely to slide under the lap
is provided, all occupants still There are important things to know belt. If you slid under it, the belt
have to buckle up to get the about wearing a safety belt properly. would apply force on your
most protection. abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over the
shoulder and across the chest.
Lap-Shoulder Belt 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
the belt across you. Do not let it
These parts of the body are best All seating positions in the vehicle get twisted.
able to take belt restraining have a lap-shoulder belt.
forces. The shoulder belt locks if The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
The following instructions explain you pull the belt across you very
there is a sudden stop or crash. how to wear a lap-shoulder belt quickly. If this happens, let the
properly. belt go back slightly to unlock it.
{ WARNING 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is Then pull the belt across you
You can be seriously injured, adjustable, so you can sit up more slowly.
or even killed, by not wearing straight. To see how, see If the shoulder portion of a
your safety belt properly. “Seats” in the Index. passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
. Never allow the lap or locking feature may be engaged.
shoulder belt to become If this happens, let the belt go
loose or twisted.
back all the way and start again.
. Never wear the shoulder belt
The rear center safety belt can
under both arms or behind only be withdrawn from the
your back. retractor if the seatback is in the
. Never route the lap or upright locked position.
shoulder belt over an
armrest.
5. If equipped with a shoulder belt

height adjuster, move it to the
height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”
later in this section for
instructions on use and
important safety information.
3. Push the latch plate into the To unlatch the belt, push the button
buckle until it clicks. on the buckle. The belt should
4. Pull up on the latch plate to return to its stowed position. Slide
make sure it is secure. If the belt the latch plate up the safety belt
is not long enough, see Safety webbing when the safety belt is not
Belt Extender on page 3‑20. in use.
Position the release button on Before a door is closed, be sure the

the buckle so that the safety belt safety belt is out of the way. If a
6. To make the lap part tight, pull door is slammed against a safety
could be quickly unbuckled if up on the shoulder belt.
necessary. belt, damage can occur to both the
It may be necessary to pull the safety belt and the vehicle.
stitching on the safety belt
through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster Safety Belt Pretensioners

The vehicle has a shoulder belt This vehicle has safety belt
height adjuster for the driver and pretensioners for the front outboard
right front passenger seating occupants. Although the safety belt
positions. pretensioners cannot be seen, they
Adjust the height so the shoulder are part of the safety belt assembly.
portion of the belt is on the shoulder They can help tighten the safety
but not falling off of it. The belt belts during the early stages of a
should be close to but not moderate to severe frontal and near
contacting the neck. Improper frontal crash if the threshold
shoulder belt height adjustment conditions for pretensioner
could reduce the effectiveness of activation are met. And, for vehicles
the safety belt in a crash. See How To move the shoulder belt height with side impact airbags, safety belt
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on adjuster down, push down on the pretensioners can help tighten the
page 3‑14. release button and move the height safety belts in a side crash or a
adjuster to the desired position. You rollover event.
can move the height adjuster up by Pretensioners work only once. If the
pushing up on the shoulder belt pretensioners activate in a crash,
guide. the pretensioners and probably
After the adjuster is set to the other parts of the vehicle's safety
desired position, try to move it down belt system will need to be replaced.
without pushing the release button See Replacing Safety Belt System
to make sure it has locked into Parts after a Crash on page 3‑21.
position.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort To install the adjustable comfort

Guides guide to the seatback and the
safety belt:
Rear safety belt comfort guides may
provide added safety belt comfort
for older children who have
outgrown booster seats and for
some adults. When installed on a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide
positions the shoulder belt away
from the neck and head.
Safety belt comfort guides are
available through your dealer.
3. Place the guide over the belt,
and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
1. Locate the anchorage loop on

the rear outboard seatback, near
the top.
2. Attach the adjustable comfort
guide to the anchor loop by
threading the hook through
the loop.
6. Adjust the guide so the shoulder

portion of the belt is on the
shoulder and not falling off of it.
The belt should be close to, but
not contacting, the neck.
Improper comfort guide
adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in
a crash.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
4. Be sure that the belt is not 7. Buckle and position the safety
worn may not provide the
twisted and it lies flat. The belt as described previously in
elastic cord must be under the protection needed in a crash. The this section. Make sure that the
belt and the guide on top. person wearing the belt could be shoulder belt crosses the
seriously injured. The shoulder shoulder.
5. The elastic cord on the comfort belt should go over the shoulder
guide is adjustable. You can and across the chest. These parts To remove and store the comfort
make it longer or shorter by of the body are best able to take guide, squeeze the belt edges
squeezing both ends of the together so that the safety belt can
belt restraining forces.
plastic adjuster and pulling on be removed from the guide.
the elastic cord or the guide. Un-hook the guide from the loop on
the seat. Store the guide in a
convenient place like the glove box
for the next time it is needed.
Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is Safety System Check
to protect the mother. When a safety
Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely Now and then, check that the safety
Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a belt reminder light, safety belts,
including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety anchorages are all working properly.
be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them Look for any other loose or
wear safety belts. properly. damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
Safety Belt Extender from doing its job. See your dealer
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten safety belts may not protect you in
around you, you should use it. a crash. They can rip apart under
But if a safety belt is not long impact forces. If a belt is torn or
enough, your dealer will order you frayed, get a new one right away.
an extender. When you go in to Make sure the safety belt reminder
order it, take the heaviest coat you light is working. See Safety Belt
will wear, so the extender will be Reminders on page 5‑11.
long enough for you. To help avoid
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
personal injury, do not let someone
See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑21.
else use it, and use it only for the
seat it is made to fit. The extender
A pregnant woman should wear a has been designed for adults. Never
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap use it for securing child seats. To
portion should be worn as low as wear it, attach it to the regular safety
possible, below the rounding, belt. See the instruction sheet that
throughout the pregnancy. comes with the extender.
Safety Belt Care Replacing Safety Belt After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
Keep belts clean and dry. System Parts after a But the safety belt assemblies that
Crash were used during any crash may
{ WARNING have been stressed or damaged.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.

{ WARNING See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or
It may severely weaken them. In A crash can damage the safety replaced.
a crash, they might not be able to belt system in the vehicle. New parts and repairs may be
provide adequate protection. A damaged safety belt system necessary even if the safety belt
Clean safety belts only with mild may not properly protect the system was not being used at the
soap and lukewarm water. person using it, resulting in time of the crash.
serious injury or even death in a
Have the safety belt pretensioners
crash. To help make sure the
checked if the vehicle has been in a
safety belt systems are working
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
properly after a crash, have them stays on after you start the vehicle
inspected and any necessary or while you are driving. See Airbag
replacements made as soon as Readiness Light on page 5‑12.
possible.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driver Airbags are designed to supplement
Airbag System and the passenger seated the protection provided by safety
directly behind the driver. belts. Even though today's airbags
Airbag System (Canada) . A roof-rail airbag for the front are also designed to help reduce
The vehicle has the following outboard passenger and the the risk of injury from the force of an
airbags: passenger seated directly inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
behind the front outboard very quickly to do their job.
. A frontal airbag for the driver.
passenger. Here are the most important things
. A frontal airbag for the front to know about the airbag system:
outboard passenger. All vehicle airbags have the word
AIRBAG on the trim or on a label
. A knee airbag for the driver. near the deployment opening. { WARNING
. A knee airbag for the front For frontal airbags, the word
outboard passenger. You can be severely injured or
AIRBAG is on the center of the
killed in a crash if you are not
. A seat-mounted side impact steering wheel for the driver and on
the instrument panel for the front wearing your safety belt, even
airbag for the driver. with airbags. Airbags are
outboard passenger.
. A seat-mounted side impact designed to work with safety
airbag for the front outboard For knee airbags, the word AIRBAG belts, not replace them. Also,
passenger. is on the lower part of the airbags are not designed to inflate
instrument panel. in every crash. In some crashes
. Seat-mounted side impact
airbags for the second row For seat-mounted side impact safety belts are the only restraint.
outboard passengers. airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the See When Should an Airbag
side of the seatback closest to Inflate? on page 3‑28.
the door. (Continued)
For roof-rail airbags, the word
AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

Wearing your safety belt during a you in position before and during Neither the vehicle's safety belt
crash helps reduce the chance of a crash. Always wear a safety system nor its airbag system is
hitting things inside the vehicle or belt, even with airbags. The driver designed for them. Young
being ejected from it. Airbags are should sit as far back as possible children and infants need the
“supplemental restraints” to the while still maintaining control of protection that a child restraint
safety belts. Everyone in the the vehicle. system can provide. Always
vehicle should wear a safety belt Occupants should not lean on or secure children properly in the
properly, whether or not there is sleep against the door or side vehicle. To read how, see Older
an airbag for that person. windows in seating positions with Children on page 3‑38 or Infants
seat-mounted side impact airbags and Young Children on
and/or roof-rail airbags. page 3‑40.
{ WARNING
Because airbags inflate with great
force and faster than the blink of { WARNING
an eye, anyone who is up Children who are up against,
against, or very close to any or very close to, any airbag when
airbag when it inflates can be it inflates can be seriously injured
seriously injured or killed. Do not or killed. Airbags plus
sit unnecessarily close to any There is an airbag readiness light
lap-shoulder belts offer protection on the instrument panel cluster,
airbag, as you would be if sitting for adults and older children, but which shows the airbag symbol. The
on the edge of the seat or leaning not for young children and infants. system checks the airbag electrical
forward. Safety belts help keep
(Continued) system for malfunctions.
(Continued)
The light tells you if there is an All vehicle airbags have the word Here are the most important things
electrical problem. See Airbag AIRBAG on the trim or on a label to know about the airbag system:
Readiness Light on page 5‑12. near the deployment opening.
Airbag System (Mexico)

For frontal airbags, the word { WARNING
AIRBAG is on the center of the
steering wheel for the driver and on You can be severely injured or
The vehicle has the following
the instrument panel for the front killed in a crash if you are not
airbags:
outboard passenger. wearing your safety belt, even
. A frontal airbag for the driver. with airbags. Airbags are
For seat-mounted side impact designed to work with safety
. A frontal airbag for the front airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the
outboard passenger. belts, not replace them. Also,
side of the seatback closest to
airbags are not designed to inflate
The vehicle may have the following the door.
in every crash. In some crashes
airbags: For roof-rail airbags, the word safety belts are the only restraint.
. A seat-mounted side impact AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim. See When Should an Airbag
airbag for the driver. Airbags are designed to supplement Inflate? on page 3‑28.
. A seat-mounted side impact the protection provided by safety Wearing your safety belt during a
airbag for the front outboard belts. Even though today's airbags crash helps reduce the chance of
passenger. are also designed to help reduce
hitting things inside the vehicle or
the risk of injury from the force of an
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver being ejected from it. Airbags are
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
and the passenger seated “supplemental restraints” to the
very quickly to do their job.
directly behind the driver. safety belts. Everyone in the
. A roof-rail airbag for the front vehicle should wear a safety belt
outboard passenger and the properly, whether or not there is
passenger seated directly an airbag for that person.
behind the front outboard
passenger.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Because airbags inflate with great Children who are up against,
force and faster than the blink of or very close to, any airbag when
an eye, anyone who is up it inflates can be seriously injured
against, or very close to any or killed. Airbags plus
There is an airbag readiness light
airbag when it inflates can be lap-shoulder belts offer protection
on the instrument panel cluster,
seriously injured or killed. Do not for adults and older children, but
which shows the airbag symbol. The
sit unnecessarily close to any not for young children and infants. system checks the airbag electrical
airbag, as you would be if sitting Neither the vehicle's safety belt system for malfunctions. The light
on the edge of the seat or leaning system nor its airbag system is tells you if there is an electrical
forward. Safety belts help keep designed for them. Young problem. See Airbag Readiness
you in position before and during children and infants need the Light on page 5‑12.
a crash. Always wear a safety protection that a child restraint
belt, even with airbags. The driver system can provide. Always
should sit as far back as possible secure children properly in the
while still maintaining control of vehicle. To read how, see Older
the vehicle. Children on page 3‑38 or Infants
Occupants should not lean on or and Young Children on
sleep against the door or side page 3‑40.
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.
Where Are the Airbags?

(Canada)
The driver knee airbag is below the Driver Side Shown, Passenger
steering column. The front outboard Side Similar
passenger knee airbag is below the The seat-mounted side impact
glove box. airbags for the driver and front
The driver frontal airbag is in the
center of the steering wheel. outboard passenger are in the side
of the seatbacks closest to the door.
The front outboard passenger
frontal airbag is in the passenger The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
side instrument panel. right front passenger, and second
row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
WARNING (Continued)
Where Are the Airbags?
(Mexico)
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that
Rear Seat Driver Side Shown, block the inflation path of a
Passenger Side Similar seat-mounted side impact airbag.
The second row seat-mounted side Never secure anything to the roof
impact airbags are in the sides of of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags The driver frontal airbag is in the
the rear seatback closest to by routing a rope or tie‐down center of the steering wheel.
the door. through any door or window
The front outboard passenger
opening. If you do, the path of an
frontal airbag is in the passenger
{ WARNING inflating roof-rail airbag will be side instrument panel.
blocked.
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
(Continued)
When Should an Airbag

{ WARNING Inflate?
If something is between an Frontal airbags are designed to
occupant and an airbag, the inflate in moderate to severe frontal
airbag might not inflate properly or near frontal crashes to help
or it might force the object into reduce the potential for severe
that person causing severe injury injuries, mainly to the driver's or
or even death. The path of an front outboard passenger's head
inflating airbag must be kept and chest. However, they are only
clear. Do not put anything designed to inflate if the impact
between an occupant and an exceeds a predetermined
Driver Side Shown, Passenger airbag, and do not attach or put deployment threshold. Deployment
Side Similar anything on the steering wheel thresholds are used to predict how
hub or on or near any other severe a crash is likely to be in time
If the vehicle has seat-mounted side airbag covering. for the airbags to inflate and help
impact airbags for the driver and restrain the occupants.
front outboard passenger, they are Do not use seat accessories that
in the side of the seatbacks closest block the inflation path of a Whether the frontal airbags will or
to the door. seat-mounted side impact airbag. should inflate is not based primarily
on how fast the vehicle is traveling.
If the vehicle has roof-rail airbags Never secure anything to the roof It depends on what is hit, the
for the driver, right front passenger, of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags direction of the impact, and how
and second row outboard by routing a rope or tie‐down quickly the vehicle slows down.
passengers, they are in the ceiling through any door or window
above the side windows. opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
Frontal airbags may inflate at severe frontal impact. For moderate Roof-rail airbags are not intended to
different crash speeds depending on frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags inflate in rear impacts.
whether the vehicle hits an object inflate at a level less than full A seat-mounted side impact airbag,
straight on or at an angle, and deployment. For more severe frontal if equipped, is intended to inflate on
whether the object is fixed or impacts, full deployment occurs. the side of the vehicle that is struck.
moving, rigid or deformable, narrow The vehicle has seat-mounted side Both roof-rail airbags will inflate
or wide. impact airbags for the driver and when either side of the vehicle is
Thresholds can also vary with front passenger. The vehicle may struck or if the sensing system
specific vehicle design. have seat-mounted side impact predicts that the vehicle is about to
airbags for the second row outboard roll over on its side, or in a severe
Frontal airbags are not intended to frontal impact.
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear passengers. The vehicle has
impacts, or in many side impacts. roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System In any particular crash, no one can
(Canada) on page 3‑22 or Airbag say whether an airbag should have
In addition, the vehicle has System (Mexico) on page 3‑24. inflated simply because of the
dual-stage frontal airbags. Seat-mounted side impact airbags, vehicle damage or repair costs.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the if equipped, and roof-rail airbags are
restraint according to crash severity. intended to inflate in moderate to What Makes an Airbag
severe side crashes depending on
Frontal knee airbags, if equipped,
the location of the impact. In
Inflate?
are designed to inflate in moderate
to severe frontal or near frontal addition, these roof-rail airbags are In a deployment event, the sensing
impacts that exceed a intended to inflate during a rollover system sends an electrical signal
predetermined deployment or in a severe frontal impact. triggering a release of gas from the
threshold. Seat-mounted side impact airbags, inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
if equipped, and roof-rail airbags will airbag causing the bag to break out
The vehicle has electronic frontal inflate if the crash severity is above of the cover. The inflator, the airbag,
sensors, which help the sensing the system's designed threshold and related hardware are all part of
system distinguish between a level. The threshold level can vary the airbag module.
moderate frontal impact and a more with specific vehicle design.
For airbag location, see Where Are full or partial ejection in rollover For location of the airbags, see
the Airbags? (Canada) on events, although no system can Where Are the Airbags? (Canada)
page 3‑26 or Where Are the prevent all such ejections. on page 3‑26 or Where Are the
Airbags? (Mexico) on page 3‑27. But airbags would not help in many Airbags? (Mexico) on page 3‑27.
types of collisions, primarily The parts of the airbag that come
How Does an Airbag because the occupant's motion is into contact with you may be warm,
Restrain? not toward those airbags. See When but not too hot to touch. There may
Should an Airbag Inflate? on be some smoke and dust coming
In moderate to severe frontal or
page 3‑28. from the vents in the deflated
near frontal collisions, even belted
Airbags should never be regarded airbags. Airbag inflation does not
occupants can contact the steering
as anything more than a supplement prevent the driver from seeing out of
wheel or the instrument panel. In
to safety belts. the windshield or being able to steer
moderate to severe side collisions,
the vehicle, nor does it prevent
even belted occupants can contact
people from leaving the vehicle.
the inside of the vehicle. What Will You See after
Airbags supplement the protection an Airbag Inflates? { WARNING
provided by safety belts by After the frontal airbags and
distributing the force of the impact seat-mounted side impact airbags When an airbag inflates, there
more evenly over the inflate, they quickly deflate, so may be dust in the air. This dust
occupant's body. quickly that some people may not could cause breathing problems
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags even realize an airbag inflated. for people with a history of
are designed to help contain the Roof-rail airbags may still be at least asthma or other breathing trouble.
head and chest of occupants in the partially inflated for some time after To avoid this, everyone in the
outboard seating positions in the they inflate. Some components of vehicle should get out as soon as
first and second rows. The rollover the airbag module may be hot for it is safe to do so. If you have
capable roof-rail airbags are several minutes. breathing problems but cannot
designed to help reduce the risk of (Continued)
parts for the airbag system.

WARNING (Continued) { WARNING If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there
get out of the vehicle after an A crash severe enough to inflate to help protect you in another
airbag inflates, then get fresh air the airbags may have also crash. A new system will include
by opening a window or a door. damaged important functions in airbag modules and possibly
If you experience breathing the vehicle, such as the fuel other parts. The service manual
problems following an airbag system, brake and steering for the vehicle covers the need
deployment, you should seek systems, etc. Even if the vehicle to replace other parts.
medical attention. appears to be drivable after a . The vehicle has a crash sensing
moderate crash, there may be
and diagnostic module which
The vehicle has a feature that may concealed damage that could records information after a
automatically unlock the doors, turn make it difficult to safely operate crash. See Vehicle Data
the interior lamps on, turn the the vehicle. Recording and Privacy on
hazard warning flashers on, and Use caution if you should attempt page 13‑16 and Event Data
shut off the fuel system after the to restart the engine after a crash Recorders on page 13‑17.
airbags inflate. You can lock the has occurred. . Let only qualified technicians
doors, turn the interior lamps off,
work on the airbag systems.
and turn the hazard warning
In many crashes severe enough to Improper service can mean that
flashers off by using the controls for an airbag system will not work
those features. inflate the airbag, windshields are
broken by vehicle deformation. properly. See your dealer for
Additional windshield breakage may service.
also occur from the front outboard
passenger airbag.
. Airbags are designed to inflate
only once. After an airbag
inflates, you will need some new
Passenger Sensing The passenger sensing system an older child riding in a booster
turns off the front outboard seat; and children, who are large
System (Canada) passenger frontal airbag and knee enough, using safety belts.
The vehicle has a passenger airbag under certain conditions. No Never put a rear-facing child seat in
sensing system for the front other airbag is affected by the the front. This is because the risk to
outboard passenger position. The passenger sensing system. the rear-facing child is so great,
passenger airbag status indicator The passenger sensing system if the airbag inflates.
will light on the instrument panel works with sensors that are part of
when the vehicle is started. the front outboard passenger seat.
The sensors are designed to detect
{ WARNING
the presence of a properly seated A child in a rear-facing child
occupant and determine if the front restraint can be seriously injured
outboard passenger frontal airbag or killed if the passenger frontal
and knee airbag should be allowed airbag inflates. This is because
to inflate or not. the back of the rear-facing child
According to accident statistics, restraint would be very close to
The symbol for on and off, will be children are safer when properly the inflating airbag. A child in a
visible during the system check. secured in a rear seat in the correct forward-facing child restraint can
If you use remote start, if equipped, child restraint for their weight be seriously injured or killed if the
to start the vehicle, you may not see and size. passenger frontal airbag inflates
the system check. When the system and the passenger seat is in a
check is complete, either the symbol We recommend that children be
secured in a rear seat, including: an forward position.
for on or off, will be visible. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator infant or a child riding in a Even if the passenger sensing
(Canada) on page 5‑12. rear-facing child restraint; a child system has turned off the front
riding in a forward-facing child seat; outboard passenger airbag(s), no
(Continued)

. A front outboard passenger For some children, including
WARNING (Continued) takes his/her weight off of the children in child restraints, and for
seat for a period of time. very small adults, the passenger
system is fail-safe. No one can sensing system may or may not turn
. There is a critical problem with
guarantee that an airbag will not off the front outboard passenger
the airbag system or the
inflate under some unusual frontal airbag and knee airbag,
passenger sensing system.
circumstance, even though the depending upon the person's
airbag(s) are off. When the passenger sensing seating posture and body build.
system has turned off the front Everyone in the vehicle who has
Secure rear-facing child restraints outboard passenger frontal airbag
in a rear seat, even if the outgrown child restraints should
and knee airbag, the off indicator wear a safety belt properly —
airbag(s) are off. If you secure a will light and stay lit as a reminder
forward-facing child restraint in whether or not there is an airbag for
that the airbags are off. See that person.
the front outboard passenger Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
seat, always move the seat as far (Canada) on page 5‑12.
back as it will go. It is better to
The passenger sensing system is
{ WARNING
secure the child restraint in a designed to turn on the front If the airbag readiness light ever
rear seat. outboard passenger frontal airbag comes on and stays on, it means
and knee airbag anytime the system that something may be wrong
The passenger sensing system is senses that a person of adult size is with the airbag system. To help
designed to turn off the front sitting properly in the front outboard avoid injury to yourself or others,
outboard passenger frontal airbag passenger seat. When the have the vehicle serviced right
and knee airbag if: passenger sensing system has away. See Airbag Readiness
allowed the airbags to be enabled, Light on page 5‑12 for more
. The front outboard passenger the on indicator will light and stay lit
seat is unoccupied. information, including important
as a reminder that the airbags are
safety information.
. The system determines that an active.
infant is present in a child
restraint.
If the On Indicator Is Lit for a 5. If, after reinstalling the child If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an
Child Restraint restraint and restarting the Adult-Size Occupant
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
If a child restraint has been installed turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
and the on indicator is lit: recline the vehicle seatback and
1. Turn the vehicle off. adjust the seat cushion,
if adjustable, to make sure that
2. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle seatback is not
the vehicle.
pushing the child restraint into
3. Remove any additional items the seat cushion. Also make
from the seat such as blankets, sure the child restraint is not
cushions, seat covers, seat trapped under the vehicle head
heaters, or seat massagers. restraint. If this happens, adjust
4. Reinstall the child restraint the head restraint. See Head
following the directions provided Restraints on page 3‑2.
by the child restraint 6. Restart the vehicle. If a person of adult size is sitting in
manufacturer and refer to
The passenger sensing system may the front outboard passenger seat,
Securing Child Restraints (Rear
or may not turn off the airbags for a but the off indicator is lit, it could be
Seat) on page 3‑51 or Securing
child restraint depending upon the because that person is not sitting
Child Restraints (Front
child’s seating posture and body properly in the seat.
Passenger Seat) on page 3‑53.
build. It is better to secure a child
seat in a rear seat.
Use the following steps to allow the Additional Factors Affecting vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
system to detect that person and System Operation the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
enable the front outboard passenger page 3‑36 for more information
frontal airbag: Safety belts help keep the about modifications that can affect
passenger in position on the seat how the system operates.
1. Turn the vehicle off. during vehicle maneuvers and
2. Remove any additional material braking, which helps the passenger A wet seat can affect the
from the seat, such as blankets, sensing system maintain the performance of the passenger
cushions, seat covers, seat passenger airbag status. See sensing system. Here is how:
heaters, or seat massagers. “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” . The passenger sensing system
in the Index for additional may turn off the passenger
3. Place the seatback in the fully information about the importance of
upright position. airbag when liquid is soaked into
proper restraint use. the seat. If this happens, the off
4. Have the person sit upright in A thick layer of additional material, indicator will be lit, and the
the seat, centered on the seat such as a blanket or cushion, airbag readiness light on the
cushion, with legs comfortably or aftermarket equipment such as instrument panel will also be lit.
extended. seat covers, seat heaters, and seat . Liquid pooled on the seat that
5. Restart the vehicle and have the massagers can affect how well the has not soaked in may make it
person remain in this position for passenger sensing system more likely that the passenger
two to three minutes after the on operates. We recommend that you sensing system will turn on the
indicator is lit. not use seat covers or other passenger airbag while a child
aftermarket equipment except when restraint or child occupant is on
approved by GM for your specific the seat. If the passenger airbag
is turned on, the on indicator will
be lit.
If the passenger seat gets wet, dry To purchase a service manual, see The operation of the airbag system
the seat immediately. If the airbag Service Publications Ordering can also be affected by changing or
readiness light is lit, do not install a Information on page 13‑15. moving any parts of the front seats,
child restraint or allow anyone to safety belts, the airbag sensing and
occupy the seat. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5‑12 for
{ WARNING diagnostic module, steering wheel,
instrument panel, roof-rail airbag
important safety information. For up to 10 seconds after the modules, ceiling headliner or pillar
vehicle is turned off and the garnish trim, overhead console,
{ WARNING battery is disconnected, an airbag front sensors, side impact sensors,
or airbag wiring.
can still inflate during improper
Stowing of articles under the service. You can be injured if you Your dealer and the service manual
passenger seat or between the are close to an airbag when it have information about the location
passenger seat cushion and inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. of the airbag sensors, sensing and
seatback may interfere with the They are probably part of the diagnostic module, and airbag
proper operation of the passenger airbag system. Be sure to follow wiring.
sensing system. proper service procedures, and If the vehicle has rollover roof‐rail
make sure the person performing airbags, see Different Size Tires
Servicing the work for you is qualified to do so. and Wheels on page 10‑57 for
important information.
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle
Adding Equipment to the If you have to modify your vehicle
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle because you have a disability and
should be serviced. There are parts have questions about whether the
of the airbag system in several Adding accessories that change the modifications will affect the vehicle's
places around the vehicle. Your vehicle's frame, bumper system, airbag system, or if you have
dealer and the service manual have height, front end or side sheet questions about whether the airbag
information about servicing the metal, may keep the airbag system system will be affected if the vehicle
vehicle and the airbag system. from working properly. is modified for any other reason,
call Customer Assistance. Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will need to
See Customer Assistance Offices replace airbag system parts. See
(Canada) on page 13‑4 or Customer
Parts after a Crash your dealer for service.
Assistance Offices (Mexico) on If the airbag readiness light stays on
page 13‑4. { WARNING after the vehicle is started or comes
A crash can damage the on when you are driving, the airbag
Airbag System Check system may not work properly. Have
airbag systems in the vehicle.
The airbag system does not need A damaged airbag system may the vehicle serviced right away. See
regularly scheduled maintenance or Airbag Readiness Light on
not work properly and may
replacement. Make sure the airbag page 5‑12.
not protect you and your
readiness light is working. See passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
Airbag Readiness Light on in serious injury or even death.
page 5‑12. To help make sure the airbag
Notice: If an airbag covering is systems are working properly
damaged, opened, or broken, the after a crash, have them
airbag may not work properly. inspected and any necessary
Do not open or break the airbag replacements made as soon as
coverings. If there are any possible.
opened or broken airbag covers,
have the airbag covering and/or
airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbags, see
Where Are the Airbags? (Canada)
on page 3‑26 or Where Are the
Airbags? (Mexico) on page 3‑27.
See your dealer for service.
Child Restraints The manufacturer's instructions that

come with the booster seat state the
Q: What is the proper way to
wear safety belts?
weight and height limitations for that
Older Children booster. Use a booster seat with a
A: An older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the
lap-shoulder belt until the child additional restraint a shoulder
passes the fit test below: belt can provide. The shoulder
. Sit all the way back on the seat. belt should not cross the face or
Do the knees bend at the seat neck. The lap belt should fit
edge? If yes, continue. If no, snugly below the hips, just
return to the booster seat. touching the top of the thighs.
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. This applies belt force to the
Does the shoulder belt rest on child's pelvic bones in a crash.
the shoulder? If yes, continue. It should never be worn over the
If no, return to the booster seat. abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal
. Does the lap belt fit low and injuries in a crash.
snug on the hips, touching the
thighs? If yes, continue. If no, According to accident statistics,
Older children who have outgrown
return to the booster seat. children and infants are safer when
booster seats should wear the
properly restrained in a child
vehicle safety belts. . Can proper safety belt fit be restraint system or infant restraint
maintained for the length of the system secured in a rear seating
trip? If yes, continue. If no, position.
return to the booster seat.
In a crash, children who are not

buckled up can strike other people WARNING (Continued)
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older The child might also slide under
children need to use safety belts the lap belt. The belt force would
properly. then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause
{ WARNING serious or fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the
Never allow more than one child shoulder and across the chest.
to wear the same safety belt. The
safety belt cannot properly spread
the impact forces. In a crash, they
can be crushed together and { WARNING
seriously injured. A safety belt
must be used by only one person Never allow a child to wear the
at a time. safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly.
In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child could move too far
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury.
(Continued)
Infants and Young Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer

WARNING (Continued)
protection for adults and older
Children children, but not for young children
Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's For example, in a crash at only
protection! This includes infants and safety belt system nor its airbag 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every infant will suddenly become a
distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the arms. An infant should be
need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate secured in an appropriate
restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints. restraint.
Canadian province says children up Children who are not restrained
to some age must be restrained properly can strike other people,
while in a vehicle. or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Children can be seriously injured Never hold an infant or a child
or strangled if a shoulder belt is while riding in a vehicle. Due to
wrapped around their neck and crash forces, an infant or a child
the safety belt continues to will become so heavy it is not
tighten. Never leave children possible to hold it during a crash.
unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the (Continued)
safety belts.
Q: What are the different types of

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) add-on child restraints?
Children who are up against, A: Add-on child restraints, which
If you must secure a
or very close to, any airbag when are purchased by the vehicle
forward-facing child restraint in
it inflates can be seriously injured owner, are available in four basic
the right front seat, always move types. Selection of a particular
or killed. Never put a rear-facing the front passenger seat as far
child restraint in the right front restraint should take into
back as it will go. consideration not only the child's
seat. Secure a rear-facing child
weight, height, and age but also
restraint in a rear seat. It is also
whether or not the restraint will
better to secure a forward-facing
be compatible with the motor
child restraint in a rear seat. vehicle in which it will be used.
(Continued) For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many
different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be
sure it is designed to be used in
a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer's Child Restraint Systems

instructions that come with the { WARNING
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular A young child's hip bones are still
child restraint. In addition, there so small that the vehicle's regular
are many kinds of restraints safety belt may not remain low on
available for children with the hip bones, as it should.
special needs. Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
{ WARNING the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
To reduce the risk of neck and any bony structure. This alone
head injury during a crash, infants could cause serious or fatal
need complete support. In a injuries. To reduce the risk of
crash, if an infant is in a serious or fatal injuries during a Rear-Facing Infant Seat
rear-facing child restraint, the crash, young children should A rear-facing infant seat provides
crash forces can be distributed always be secured in appropriate restraint with the seating surface
across the strongest part of an child restraints. against the back of the infant.
infant's body, the back and The harness system holds the infant
shoulders. Infants should always in place and, in a crash, acts to
be secured in rear-facing child keep the infant positioned in the
restraints. restraint.
Securing an Add-On Child

Restraint in the Vehicle
{ WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
Forward-Facing Child Seat Booster Seats instructions that came with that
A forward-facing child seat provides A booster seat is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions
restraint for the child's body with the designed to improve the fit of the in this manual.
harness. vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a To help reduce the chance of injury,
child to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by
the LATCH system. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑45 for
more information.
Children can be endangered in a with Transport Canada or the We recommend that children and
crash if the child restraint is not Provincial Ministry of Transportation child restraints be secured in a rear
properly secured in the vehicle. office. seat, including: an infant or a child
When securing an add-on child riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
Securing the Child within the a child riding in a forward-facing
restraint, refer to the instructions Child Restraint
that come with the restraint which child seat; an older child riding in a
may be on the restraint itself or in a booster seat; and children, who are
booklet, or both, and to this manual. { WARNING large enough, using safety belts.
The child restraint instructions are A child can be seriously injured or Never put a rear-facing child seat in
important, so if they are not the front. This is because the risk to
killed in a crash if the child is not
available, obtain a replacement the rear-facing child is so great,
properly secured in the child
copy from the manufacturer. if the airbag deploys.
restraint. Secure the child
Keep in mind that an unsecured properly following the instructions
child restraint can move around in a that came with that child restraint. { WARNING
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to A child in a rear-facing child
properly secure any child restraint in Where to Put the restraint can be seriously injured
the vehicle — even when no child is or killed if the right front
Restraint passenger airbag inflates.
in it.
According to accident statistics, This is because the back of the
In some areas, Certified Child children and infants are safer when rear-facing child restraint would
Passenger Safety Technicians properly restrained in a child be very close to the inflating
(CPSTs) are available to inspect restraint system or infant restraint
and demonstrate how to correctly airbag. A child in a forward-facing
system secured in a rear seating child restraint can be seriously
use and install child restraints. For position.
CPST availability in Canada, check injured or killed if the right front
(Continued)
When securing a child restraint in a Keep in mind that an unsecured

WARNING (Continued) rear seating position, study the child restraint can move around in a
instructions that came with your collision or sudden stop and injure
passenger airbag inflates and the child restraint to make sure it is people in the vehicle. Be sure to
passenger seat is in a forward compatible with this vehicle. properly secure any child restraint in
position. your vehicle — even when no child
Child restraints and booster seats
Even if the passenger sensing vary considerably in size, and some is in it.
system or airbag switch has may fit in certain seating positions
turned off the right front better than others. Always make Lower Anchors and
passenger frontal airbag, no sure the child restraint is properly Tethers for Children
system is fail-safe. No one can secured. (LATCH System)
guarantee that an airbag will not Depending on where you place the
deploy under some unusual The LATCH system secures a child
child restraint and the size of the restraint during driving or in a crash.
circumstance, even though it is child restraint, you may not be able
turned off. LATCH attachments on the child
to access adjacent safety belt restraint are used to attach the child
Secure rear-facing child restraints assemblies or LATCH anchors for restraint to the anchors in the
in a rear seat, even if the airbag additional passengers or child vehicle. This system is designed to
is off. If you secure a restraints. Adjacent seating make installation of a child restraint
forward-facing child restraint in positions should not be used if the easier.
the right front seat, always move child restraint prevents access to or
interferes with the routing of the Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
the front passenger seat as far child restraint is properly installed
safety belt.
back as it will go. It is better to using the anchors, or use the
secure the child restraint in a Wherever a child restraint is vehicle's safety belts to secure the
rear seat. installed, be sure to secure the child restraint, following the instructions
restraint properly. that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor
a top tether, you must also use
either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must
never be installed using only the top
tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in
your vehicle, you need a child
restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint
manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The
following explains how to attach a Lower anchors (1) are metal bars A top tether (3, 4) anchors the
child restraint with these built into the vehicle. There are top of the child restraint to the
attachments in your vehicle. two lower anchors for each vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
Not all vehicle seating positions or LATCH seating position that will into the vehicle. The top tether
child restraints have lower anchors accommodate a child restraint with attachment (2) on the child restraint
and attachments or top tether lower attachments (2). connects to the top tether anchor in
anchors and attachments. the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
The child restraint may have a Lower Anchor and Top Tether
single tether (3) or a dual tether (4). Anchor Locations
Either will have a single
attachment (2) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a
top tether are designed for use with To assist in locating the lower
or without the top tether being anchors, each seating position with
attached. Others require the top lower anchors has two labels, near
tether always to be attached. In the crease between the seatback
Canada, the law requires that and the seat cushion.
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for your child
restraint.
I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
H (Lower Anchor): Seating To assist in locating the top tether
positions with two lower anchors. anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is on the trim near the
anchor.
According to accident statistics,

children and infants are safer when { WARNING
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint Do not attach more than one child
system secured in a rear seating restraint to a single anchor.
position. See Where to Put the Attaching more than one child
Restraint on page 3‑44 for restraint to a single anchor could
additional information. cause the anchor or attachment
to come loose or even break
Securing a Child Restraint during a crash. A child or others
Designed for the LATCH could be injured. To reduce the
System risk of serious or fatal injuries
during a crash, attach only one
The top tether anchors are on the
back of the rear seatbacks. Be sure { WARNING child restraint per anchor.
to use an anchor on the same side If a LATCH-type child restraint is
of the vehicle as the seating not attached to anchors, the child
position where the child restraint will
be placed.
restraint will not be able to protect { WARNING
the child correctly. In a crash, the
Do not secure a child restraint in a Children can be seriously injured
child could be seriously injured or
position without a top tether anchor or strangled if a shoulder belt is
killed. Install a LATCH-type child
if a national or local law requires wrapped around their neck and
restraint properly using the
that the top tether be attached, or if the safety belt continues to
anchors, or use the vehicle safety
the instructions that come with the tighten. Buckle any unused safety
belts to secure the restraint,
child restraint say that the top tether belts behind the child restraint so
following the instructions that
must be attached. children cannot reach them. Pull
came with the child restraint and
the shoulder belt all the way out
the instructions in this manual.
(Continued)
use the vehicle's safety belts. properly install the child

WARNING (Continued) Instead use the vehicle's anchors restraint per the child
and child restraint attachments to restraint manufacturer
of the retractor to set the lock, secure the restraints. Some instructions. See Seat
if the vehicle has one, after the restraints also use another vehicle Adjustment on page 3‑3.
child restraint has been installed. anchor to secure a top tether. 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments to the lower restraint to the lower
attachments rub against the anchors. If the child restraint anchors.
vehicle’s safety belts. This may does not have lower
damage these parts. If necessary, 2. If the child restraint manufacturer
attachments or the desired recommends that the top tether
move buckled safety belts to seating position does not have
avoid rubbing the LATCH be attached, attach and tighten
lower anchors, secure the child the top tether to the top tether
attachments. restraint with the top tether and anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
Do not fold the empty rear seat the safety belts. Refer to your child restraint instructions and
with a safety belt buckled. This child restraint manufacturer the following steps:
could damage the safety belt or instructions and the instructions
the seat. Unbuckle and return the in this manual. 2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
safety belt to its stowed position, 1.1. Find the lower anchors for 2.2. Remove the cargo cover
before folding the seat. the desired seating before installing the top
If you need to secure more than one position. tether. Place the cargo
child restraint in the rear seat, see cover on the floor of the
1.2. Put the child restraint on cargo area. The cargo
Where to Put the Restraint on the seat.
page 3‑44. cover should remain off
When installing a while the top tether is
This system is designed to make rear-facing child restraint, it in use.
installation of child restraints easier. may be necessary to move
When using lower anchors, do not the front seat forward to
2.3. Route, attach, and tighten

the top tether according to
your child restraint
instructions and the
following instructions:
If the position you are using If the position you are using
does not have a head has an adjustable head
restraint and you are using restraint and you are using
a dual tether, route the a single tether, raise the
tether over the seatback. head restraint and route the
tether under the head
If the position you are using restraint and in between the
does not have a head head restraint posts.
restraint and you are using
a single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
Replacing LATCH System Securing Child Restraints

Parts After a Crash (Rear Seat)
When securing a child restraint in a
{ WARNING rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the child
A crash can damage the LATCH restraint to make sure it is
system in the vehicle. A damaged compatible with this vehicle.
LATCH system may not properly
secure the child restraint, If the child restraint has the LATCH
If the position you are using system, see Lower Anchors and
has an adjustable head resulting in serious injury or even
Tethers for Children (LATCH
restraint and you are using death in a crash. To help make
System) on page 3‑45 for how and
a dual tether, raise the head sure the LATCH system is
where to install the child restraint
restraint and route the working properly after a crash, using LATCH. If a child restraint is
tether under the head see your dealer to have the secured in the vehicle using a
restraint and around the system inspected and any safety belt and it uses a top tether,
head restraint posts. necessary replacements made as see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
3. Before placing a child in the soon as possible. Children (LATCH System) on
child restraint, make sure it is page 3‑45 for top tether anchor
securely held in place. To check, If the vehicle has the LATCH system locations.
grasp the child restraint at the and it was being used during a Do not secure a child seat in a
LATCH path and attempt to crash, new LATCH system parts position without a top tether anchor
move it side to side and back may be needed. if a national or local law requires
and forth. There should be no that the top tether be anchored, or if
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH the instructions that come with the
movement for proper installation. child restraint say that the top strap
system was not being used at the
time of the crash. must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that When installing a rear-facing 3. Push the latch plate into the
forward-facing child restraints have child restraint, it may be buckle until it clicks.
a top tether, and that the tether be necessary to move the front seat Position the release button on
attached. forward to properly install the the buckle so that the safety belt
If the child restraint does not have child restraint per the child could be quickly unbuckled if
the LATCH system, you will be restraint manufacturer necessary.
using the safety belt to secure the instructions.
child restraint in this position. Be 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
sure to follow the instructions that the lap and shoulder portions of
came with the child restraint. Secure the vehicle's safety belt through
the child in the child restraint when or around the restraint. The child
and as the instructions say. restraint instructions will show
If more than one child restraint you how.
needs to be installed in the rear
seat, be sure to read Where to Put
the Restraint on page 3‑44.
1. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
For outboard second row seating 4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
positions, remove the safety belt out of the retractor to set the
from the guide. Do not secure lock. When the retractor lock is
the child restraint with the safety set, the belt can be tightened but
belt routed through the guide. not pulled out of the retractor.
6. If the child restraint has a top Securing Child Restraints

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
(Front Passenger Seat)
regarding the use of the top This vehicle has airbags. A rear
tether. See Lower Anchors and seat is a safer place to secure a
Tethers for Children (LATCH forward-facing child restraint. See
System) on page 3‑45 for more Where to Put the Restraint on
information. page 3‑44.
7. Before placing a child in the Never put a rear-facing child seat in
child restraint, make sure it is the front. This is because the risk to
securely held in place. To check, the rear-facing child is so great,
grasp the child restraint at the if the airbag deploys.
5. To tighten the belt, push down safety belt path and attempt to
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. When the child
{ WARNING
tighten the lap portion of the belt, restraint is properly installed, A child in a rear-facing child
and feed the shoulder belt back there should be no more than restraint can be seriously injured
into the retractor. When installing 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement. or killed if the right front
a forward-facing child restraint, it To remove the child restraint, passenger airbag inflates.
may be helpful to use your knee unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and This is because the back of the
to push down on the child let it return to the stowed position. rear-facing child restraint would
restraint as you tighten the belt. If the top tether is attached to a top be very close to the inflating
Try to pull the belt out of the tether anchor, disconnect it. airbag. A child in a forward-facing
retractor to make sure the child restraint can be seriously
retractor is locked. If the injured or killed if the right front
retractor is not locked, repeat (Continued)
Steps 4 and 5.
If the child restraint has the LATCH You will be using the lap-shoulder
WARNING (Continued) system, see Lower Anchors and belt to secure the child restraint in
Tethers for Children (LATCH this position. Follow the instructions
passenger airbag inflates and the System) on page 3‑45 for how and that came with the child restraint.
passenger seat is in a forward where to install the child restraint
position. 1. Move the seat as far back as it
using LATCH. If a child restraint is will go before securing the
Even if the passenger sensing secured using a safety belt and it forward-facing child restraint.
system has turned off the right uses a top tether, see Lower
front passenger frontal airbag, no Anchors and Tethers for Children 2. Put the child restraint on
(LATCH System) on page 3‑45 for the seat.
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not top tether anchor locations. 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
deploy under some unusual Do not secure a child seat in a the lap and shoulder portions of
circumstance, even though it is position without a top tether anchor the vehicle's safety belt through
turned off. if a national or local law requires or around the restraint. The child
that the top tether be anchored, or if restraint instructions will show
Secure rear-facing child restraints the instructions that come with the you how.
in a rear seat, even if the airbag child restraint say that the top strap
is off. If you secure a must be anchored.
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move In Canada, the law requires that
the front passenger seat as far forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
back as it will go. It is better to
attached.
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System
(Canada) on page 3‑32 for
additional information.
4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down
buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the
Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to
the buckle, so that the safety set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt,
belt could be quickly unbuckled not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back
if necessary. into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the 7. Before placing a child in the
retractor to make sure the child restraint, make sure it is
retractor is locked. If the securely held in place. To check,
retractor is not locked, repeat grasp the child restraint at the
Steps 5 and 6. safety belt path and attempt to
If the vehicle does not have a move it side to side and back
rear seat and the child restraint and forth. When the child
has a top tether, follow the child restraint is properly installed,
restraint manufacturer's there should be no more than
instructions regarding the use of 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
the top tether. See Lower To remove the child restraint,
Anchors and Tethers for unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
Children (LATCH System) on let it return to the stowed position.
page 3‑45 for more information.
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage
Compartments
Storage Compartments
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1 Instrument Panel Storage
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Underseat Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Management
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
If equipped with upper storage, slide
Warning Triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
the latch to open.
Roof Rack System
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
If equipped, pull the handle to open.

4-2 Storage
Cupholders Underseat Storage
If equipped with storage above the

glovebox, push the button to open.
If equipped, pull the rear seat If equipped with storage under the
armrest down to access. front passenger seat, pull out to
access the storage area.
Sunglasses Storage
There may be sunglasses storage
over the driver door. Pull to open.
Storage 4-3
Additional Storage Convenience Net

Features
Cargo Management
System
This vehicle has a cargo
management system in the rear.
Fold the load floor. Place the hook

from the load floor inside the hook
on the side trim. The vehicle may have a
convenience net. Attach the net to
the cargo tie-downs.
The net is used to store small loads
and should not be used for heavy
loads.
Pull the strap to lift.

4-4 Storage
Warning Triangle Roof Rack System Notice: Loading cargo on the

roof rack that weighs more than
75 kg (165 lbs) or hangs over the
{ WARNING rear or sides of the vehicle may
damage the vehicle. Load cargo
If something is carried on top of so that it rests evenly between
the vehicle that is longer or wider the crossrails, making sure to
than the roof rack — like paneling, fasten cargo securely.
plywood, or a mattress — the
wind can catch it while the vehicle To prevent damage or loss of cargo
is being driven. The item being when driving, check to make sure
crossrails and cargo are securely
carried could be violently torn off,
fastened. Loading cargo on the roof
and this could cause a collision
rack will make the vehicle’s center
and damage the vehicle. Never of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,
carry something longer or wider sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden
If equipped, the warning triangle is than the roof rack on top of the braking, or abrupt maneuvers;
stowed in the rear storage vehicle unless using a GM otherwise it may result in loss of
compartment. certified accessory carrier. control. If driving for a long distance,
on rough roads, or at high speeds,
For vehicles with a roof rack, the occasionally stop the vehicle to
rack can be used to load items. make sure the cargo remains in its
For roof racks that do not have place. Do not exceed the maximum
crossrails included, GM Certified vehicle capacity when loading the
crossrails can be purchased as an vehicle.
accessory. See your dealer for See Vehicle Load Limits on
additional information. page 9‑10.
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Engine Coolant Temperature

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-11 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Controls Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-12 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Passenger Airbag Status Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-20
Indicator (Canada) . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-21
Controls Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-13 Immobilizer Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Malfunction Reduced Engine Power
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2 Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Service Vehicle Soon High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Daytime Running Lamps
Rear Window Wiper/ Brake System Warning (DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . 5-22
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-22
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Descent Control System
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Information Displays
Power Steering Warning Driver Information
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Indicators Ultrasonic Parking Sensor
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Vehicle Messages
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-19 Vehicle Personalization
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Traction Control System Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-27
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-19
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Controls Steering Wheel Controls $ / i (Mute/End Call): Press to

reject an incoming call, or end a
Steering Wheel current call. Press to silence the
vehicle speakers while using the
Adjustment infotainment system. Press again to
turn the sound on.
For vehicles with OnStar or
Bluetooth systems, press to reject
an incoming call, or end a
current call.
_ SRC ^ (Source): Press to select
an audio source.
Use to scroll up or down to select
Some audio controls can be the next or previous favorite radio
adjusted at the steering wheel. station or CD/MP3 track.
b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicles + x − (Volume): Press + or − to

To adjust the steering wheel: with Bluetooth or OnStar, press to increase or decrease the volume.
interact with those systems. See
1. Pull the lever down. Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑28 Horn
2. Move the steering wheel up, or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)
down, forward, and backward. on page 7‑30 or Bluetooth (Voice Press a on the steering wheel pad
Recognition) on page 7‑39 or to sound the horn.
3. Pull the lever up to lock the OnStar Overview on page 14‑1.
steering wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Windshield Wiper/Washer INT (Intermittent Wipes): Move

the lever up to INT for intermittent { WARNING
wipes, then turn the x INT band In freezing weather, do not use
up for more frequent wipes or down the washer until the windshield is
for less frequent wipes. warmed. Otherwise the washer
OFF: Use to turn the wipers off. fluid can form ice on the
8 (Mist): For a single wipe, briefly windshield, blocking your vision.
move the wiper lever down. For
The windshield wiper/washer lever several wipes, hold the wiper Clear snow and ice from the wiper
is on the right side of the steering lever down. blades before using them. If frozen
column. to the windshield, carefully loosen or
b (Windshield Washer): Pull the
Move the lever to one of the windshield wiper lever toward you to thaw them. Damaged wiper blades
following positions: spray windshield washer fluid and should be replaced. See Wiper
activate the wipers. The wipers will Blade Replacement on page 10‑26.
HI: Use for fast wipes.
continue until the lever is released Heavy snow or ice can overload the
LO: Use for slow wipes. or the maximum wash time is wiper motor. A circuit breaker will
reached. When the windshield wiper stop the motor until it cools down.
lever is released, additional wipes
may occur depending on how long
the windshield washer had been
activated. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑21 for information on filling
the windshield washer fluid
reservoir.
Rear Window Wiper/ m = REAR (Rear Washer): Push Use the DIC buttons to set the
the windshield wiper lever forward compass zone:
Washer
to spray washer fluid on the rear 1. While the vehicle is in P (Park),
For vehicles with the rear wiper/ window. The lever returns to its press the MENU button to
washer, the controls are on the end starting position when released. display the DIC menu.
of the windshield wiper lever.
The windshield washer reservoir is 2. Press and hold SET/CLR while
used for the windshield and the rear the Set Area display is active.
window. Check the fluid level in the
reservoir if either washer is not
working. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑21.
Compass
ON: Press the upper portion of the The vehicle may have a compass
button for continuous rear window display in the Driver Information
wipes. Center (DIC).
OFF: The rear wiper turns off when Setting the Compass Zone
the button is returned to the middle
position. Under certain circumstances, such
as during a long trip or moving to a
INT (Intermittent Rear Wipes): new area, the compass zone will 3. Find the vehicle's current
Press the lower portion of the button need to be reset. If the compass is location and zone number on the
to set a delay between wipes. not set to the correct zone, it may map. Zones 1 through 15 are
give false readings. The compass available.
zone should be set to the area in
which the vehicle is currently
travelling.
4. Use w x to change to the Use the DIC buttons to begin 3. Turn the Menu/Tune knob to the
correct zone number. recalibrating the compass: desired value.
5. Press SET/CLR to confirm the 1. While the vehicle is in P (Park), 4. Press the Menu/Tune knob to
setting. press the MENU button to select the value.
display the DIC menu. 5. Turn the Menu/Tune knob to
Recalibrating the Compass 2. Press and hold SET/CLR while change the desired value.
Whenever the DIC or the battery is the Set Cal display is active. 6. To save and return to the Time
disconnected, the compass must be
recalibrated. To do this, the vehicle
3. Drive the vehicle in tight circles. Settings menu, press / BACK
The display will begin to flash. button at any time.
must be driven in circles. Only
Continue driving in circles for
calibrate the compass in a Setting the 12/24 Hour Format
about 30 seconds. The compass
magnetically clean and safe
direction will be displayed.
location, such as an open parking 1. Press the H.
lot, where driving the vehicle in
circles is not a danger. It is Clock 2. Select Set Time Format.
suggested to calibrate away from Radio Without Touchscreen 3. Press the Menu/Tune knob to
tall buildings, utility wires, manhole select the 12 hour or 24 hour
covers, or other industrial structures, The infotainment system controls display format.
if possible. are used to access the time and
date settings through the menu Setting the Month and Day
If code 125 is displayed on the DIC, system. See Operation on page 7‑8 Format
the compass needs to be for information about how to use the
recalibrated. menu system. 1. Press the H.
2. Select Set Date Format.
Setting the Time and Date
3. Turn the Menu/Tune knob to the
1. Press H. desired setting.
2. Select Set Time or Set Date.
4. Press the Menu/Tune knob to Setting the 12/24 Hour Format The vehicle has an accessory
select the DD/MM/YYYY (day/ power outlet in front of the
month/year), MM/DD/YYYY 1. Press D , and then press cupholders on the center stack.
(month/day/year), or YYYY/MM/ settings. There may also be one on the rear
DD (year/month/day) display 2. Press time and date settings, of the center console.
format. and then set time format. Remove the cover to access and
Radio With Touchscreen 3. Select 12/24 HR Format. replace when not in use.
The infotainment system controls
are used to access the time and
Setting the Month and Day
Format
{ WARNING
date settings through the menu Power is always supplied to the
system. See Operation on page 7‑8 1. Press D , and then press
outlets. Do not leave electrical
for information about how to use the settings. equipment plugged in when the
menu system.
2. Press time and date settings, vehicle is not in use because the
Setting the Time and Date and then set date format. vehicle could catch fire and cause
3. Set the date display to DD/MM/ injury or death.
1. Press D, and then press
YYYY (day/month/year), MM/
settings.
DD/YYYY (month/day/year), Notice: Leaving electrical
2. Press time and date settings, or YYYY/MM/DD (year/month/ equipment plugged in for an
and then set time and date. day) display format. extended period of time while the
3. Press y or z to adjust the vehicle is off will drain the
value.
Power Outlets battery. Always unplug electrical
The accessory power outlets can be equipment when not in use and
4. Press OK. do not plug in equipment that
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player. exceeds the maximum 20 ampere
rating.
Certain accessory power plugs may Cigarette Lighter Ashtrays

not be compatible with the
accessory power outlet and could For vehicles with a cigarette lighter, The vehicle may have a removable
overload vehicle or adapter fuses. it is located in the center floor ashtray.
If a problem is experienced, see console. The removable ashtray can be
your dealer. The ignition must be turned to ACC/ placed in the front cupholders. To
When adding electrical equipment, ACCESSORY or ON/RUN. open the removable ashtray, lift the
be sure to follow the proper To activate the cigarette lighter, lid of the ashtray. After using, close
installation instructions included with push it into the heating element and the lid.
the equipment. See Add-On let go. When the lighter is ready it Notice: If papers, pins, or other
Electrical Equipment on page 9‑44. will pop back out. flammable items are put in the
Notice: Hanging heavy Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
equipment from the power outlet in while it is heating does not let smoking materials could ignite
can cause damage not covered the lighter back away from the them and possibly damage the
by the vehicle warranty. The heating element when it is hot. vehicle. Never put flammable
power outlets are designed for Damage from overheating can items in the ashtray.
accessory power plugs only, such occur to the lighter or heating
as cell phone charge cords. element, or a fuse could be
blown. Do not hold a cigarette
lighter in while it is heating.
Warning Lights, Warning lights come on when there

could be a problem with a vehicle
When one of the warning lights
comes on and stays on while
Gauges, and function. Some warning lights come driving, or when one of the gauges
on briefly when the engine is started shows there may be a problem,
Indicators to indicate they are working. check the section that explains what
Warning lights and gauges can Gauges can indicate when there to do. Follow this manual's advice.
signal that something is wrong could be a problem with a vehicle Waiting to do repairs can be costly
before it becomes serious enough function. Often gauges and warning and even dangerous.
to cause an expensive repair or lights work together to indicate a
replacement. Paying attention to the problem with the vehicle.
warning lights and gauges could
prevent injury.
Instrument Cluster
Mexico Shown, Canada Similar

Speedometer Trip Odometer Fuel Gauge

The speedometer shows the
vehicle's speed in either kilometers
per hour (km/h) or miles per
hour (mph).
Odometer
The trip odometer measures the
distance the vehicle has been
driven since the function was last
reset.
To reset the trip odometer to zero,
press and hold the reset button on
The odometer shows how far the the lower right of the tachometer The fuel gauge indicates about how
vehicle has been driven, in either while the trip odometer is being much fuel is left when the ignition is
kilometers or miles. displayed. Be careful not to reset turned to ON/RUN.
the engine oil life monitor When the tank nears empty, the low
accidentally. fuel warning light will come on.
There is still a little fuel left, but the
Tachometer vehicle's fuel tank should be filled
The tachometer displays the engine soon. See Low Fuel Warning Light
speed in revolutions per on page 5‑21 for more information.
minute (rpm). An arrow on the fuel gauge
indicates on which side of the
vehicle the fuel door is located.
Here are four things that some

owners ask about. None of these
show a problem with the fuel gauge:
. At the service station, the gas
pump shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
When the vehicle is started, this When the vehicle is started, this
. It takes a little more or less fuel
light flashes and a chime may come light flashes and a chime may come
to fill up than the gauge
on to remind the driver to fasten on to remind passengers to fasten
indicated. For example, the
their safety belt. Then the light stays their safety belt. Then the light stays
gauge may have indicated the
on solid until the belt is buckled. on solid until the belt is buckled.
tank was half full, but it actually
This cycle may continue several This cycle continues several times if
took a little more or less than
times if the driver remains or the front passenger remains or
half the tank's capacity to fill
becomes unbuckled while the becomes unbuckled while the
the tank.
vehicle is moving. vehicle is moving.
. The indicator moves a little when
If the driver safety belt is buckled, If the front passenger safety belt is
turning a corner or speeding up.
neither the light nor the chime buckled, neither the chime nor the
. The gauge goes back to empty comes on. light comes on.
when the ignition is turned off.
Passenger Safety Belt The front passenger safety belt
Safety Belt Reminders Reminder Light warning light and chime may turn on
The vehicle may also have a if an object is put on the seat such
Driver Safety Belt Reminder passenger safety belt reminder light. as a briefcase, handbag, grocery
Light bag, laptop, or other electronic
device. To turn off the warning light
There is a driver safety belt
and/or chime, remove the object
reminder light on the instrument
from the seat or buckle the
cluster.
safety belt.
Airbag Readiness Light

{ WARNING
This light shows if there is an
electrical problem with the airbag If the airbag readiness light stays
system. The system check includes on after the vehicle is started or
the airbag sensor(s), passenger comes on while driving, it means
sensing system (if equipped), the the airbag system might not be
pretensioners, the airbag modules, working properly. The airbags in When the vehicle is started, the
the wiring, and the crash sensing the vehicle might not inflate in a passenger airbag status indicator
and diagnostic module. For more crash, or they could even inflate will light the symbol for on and off,
information on the airbag system, without a crash. To help avoid for several seconds as a system
see Airbag System (Canada) on injury, have the vehicle serviced check. If you use remote start,
page 3‑22 or Airbag System right away. if equipped, to start the vehicle, you
(Mexico) on page 3‑24. may not see the system check.
Then, after several seconds, the
Passenger Airbag Status status indicator will light the on or off
symbol to let you know the status of
Indicator (Canada) the front outboard passenger frontal
The vehicle has a passenger airbag and knee airbag.
sensing system. See Passenger If the on symbol is lit on the
Sensing System (Canada) on passenger airbag status indicator, it
page 3‑32 for important safety means that the front outboard
The airbag readiness light comes on
information. The instrument panel passenger frontal airbag and knee
for several seconds when the
has a passenger airbag status airbag are allowed to inflate.
vehicle is started. If the light does
indicator.
not come on then, have it fixed
immediately.
If the off symbol is lit on the Charging System Light Malfunction

passenger airbag status indicator, it
means that the passenger sensing
Indicator Lamp
system has turned off the front A computer system called OBD II
outboard passenger frontal airbag (On-Board Diagnostics-Second
and knee airbag. Generation) monitors the operation
If, after several seconds, both status of the vehicle to ensure emissions
indicator lights remain on, or if there are at acceptable levels, helping to
are no lights at all, there may be a maintain a clean environment. The
This light will come on briefly when malfunction indicator lamp comes
problem with the lights or the the ignition is turned on, and the
passenger sensing system. See on when the vehicle is placed in
engine is not running, as a check to ON/RUN, as a check to show it is
your dealer for service. show it is working. working. If it does not, have the
It should go out when the engine is vehicle serviced by your dealer. See
{ WARNING started. If it stays on, or comes on Ignition Positions on page 9‑14 for
while driving, there may be a more information.
If the airbag readiness light ever
problem with the electrical charging
comes on and stays on, it means
system. Have it checked by your
that something may be wrong
dealer. Driving while this light is on
with the airbag system. To help could drain the battery. If a short
avoid injury to yourself or others, distance must be driven with the
have the vehicle serviced right light on, turn off all accessories,
away. See Airbag Readiness such as the radio and air
Light on page 5‑12 for more conditioner, to help reduce the drain If the malfunction indicator lamp
information, including important on the battery. comes on while the engine is
safety information. running, this indicates that the
OBD II system has detected a affect the vehicle's emission If the light continues to flash, find a
problem and diagnosis and service controls and can cause this light safe place to stop and park the
might be required. to come on. Modifications to vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at
Malfunctions often are indicated by these systems could lead to least 10 seconds, and restart the
the system before any problem is costly repairs not covered by the engine. If the light is still flashing,
apparent. Being aware of the light vehicle warranty. This could also follow the previous steps and see
can prevent more serious damage result in a failure to pass a your dealer for service as soon as
to the vehicle. This system also required Emission Inspection/ possible.
assists the service technician in Maintenance test. See Light On Steady: An emission
correctly diagnosing any Accessories and Modifications on control system malfunction has
malfunction. page 10‑3. been detected on the vehicle.
Notice: If the vehicle is This light comes on during a Diagnosis and service might be
continually driven with this light malfunction in one of two ways: required.
on, the emission controls might Light Flashing: A misfire condition The following may correct an
not work as well, the vehicle fuel has been detected. A misfire emission control system
economy might not be as good, increases vehicle emissions and malfunction:
and the engine might not run as could damage the emission control . Check that the fuel cap is fully
smoothly. This could lead to system on the vehicle. Diagnosis installed. See Filling the Tank on
costly repairs that might not be and service might be required. page 9‑42. The diagnostic
covered by the vehicle warranty. To prevent more serious damage to system can determine if the fuel
Notice: Modifications made to the the vehicle: cap has been left off or
engine, transmission, exhaust, . Reduce vehicle speed. improperly installed. A loose or
intake, or fuel system of the missing fuel cap allows fuel to
vehicle or the replacement of the . Avoid hard accelerations. evaporate into the atmosphere.
original tires with other than . Avoid steep uphill grades. A few driving trips with the cap
those of the same Tire properly installed should turn the
Performance Criteria (TPC) can light off.

. Check that good quality fuel is Emissions Inspection and the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
used. Poor fuel quality causes Maintenance Programs while the engine is off. See your
the engine not to run as dealer for assistance in verifying
efficiently as designed and may Depending on where you live, your proper operation of the
cause stalling after start-up, vehicle may be required to malfunction indicator lamp.
stalling when the vehicle is participate in an emission control
changed into gear, misfiring, system inspection and maintenance . The OBD II (On-Board
hesitation on acceleration, program. For the inspection, the Diagnostics) system determines
or stumbling on acceleration. emission system test equipment will that critical emission control
These conditions might go away likely connect to the vehicle's Data systems have not been
once the engine is warmed up. Link Connector (DLC). completely diagnosed. The
vehicle would be considered not
If one or more of these conditions ready for inspection. This can
occurs, change the fuel brand used. happen if the 12-volt battery has
It may require at least one full tank recently been replaced or run
of the proper fuel to turn the light off. down. The diagnostic system is
See Recommended Fuel on designed to evaluate critical
page 9‑40. emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take
If none of the above have made the The DLC is under the instrument several days of routine driving.
light turn off, your dealer can check panel to the left of the steering If this has been done and the
the vehicle. The dealer has the wheel. See your dealer if assistance vehicle still does not pass the
proper test equipment and is needed. inspection for lack of OBD II
diagnostic tools to fix any system readiness, your dealer
mechanical or electrical problems The vehicle may not pass
inspection if: can prepare the vehicle for
that might have developed. inspection.
. The malfunction indicator lamp is
on with the engine running, or if
the light does not come on when
Service Vehicle Soon The vehicle brake system consists

Light of two hydraulic circuits. If one { WARNING
circuit is not working, the remaining
circuit can still work to stop the The brake system might not be
vehicle. For normal braking working properly if the brake
performance, both circuits need to system warning light is on.
be working Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to a
If the warning light comes on and a crash. If the light is still on after
chime sounds there could be a
the vehicle has been pulled off
brake problem. Have the brake
For vehicles with this light, it comes the road and carefully stopped,
system inspected right away.
on if a condition exists that may have the vehicle towed for
require the vehicle to be taken in for This light can also come on due to service.
service. low brake fluid. See Brake Fluid on
page 10‑22 for more information.
If the light comes on, take the If the light comes on while driving,
vehicle to your dealer for service as pull off the road and stop carefully.
soon as possible. The pedal might be harder to push
or might go closer to the floor. It can
Brake System Warning take longer to stop. If the light is still
Light on, have the vehicle towed for
service. See Towing the Vehicle on
With the ignition on, the brake page 10‑71.
system warning light comes on This light comes on briefly when the
when the parking brake is set. If the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN.
vehicle is driven with the parking If it does not come on then, have it
brake engaged, a chime sounds fixed so it is ready to warn if there is
when the vehicle speed is greater a problem.
than 8 km/h (5 mph).
Antilock Brake System problem with the regular brakes. Descent Control System
See Brake System Warning Light on
(ABS) Warning Light page 5‑16.
Light
The ABS warning light will come on
briefly when the ignition is turned to
ON/RUN. This is normal. If the light
does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn if there is
a problem.
This light comes on briefly when the When the DCS light comes on
engine is started. Up-Shift Light steady, the system is ready for use.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition When the light flashes, the system
to LOCK/OFF or if the light comes is active.
on, stop as soon as possible and See Descent Control System (DCS)
turn the ignition off. Then start the on page 9‑33 for more information.
engine again to reset the system.
If the light still stays on, or comes
on again while driving, the vehicle
needs service. See your dealer. The vehicle may have an up-shift
If the regular brake system warning light.
light is not on, the brakes will still When this light comes on, shift to
work, but the antilock brakes will not the next higher gear if weather,
work. If the regular brake system road, and traffic conditions allow.
warning light is also on, the antilock
brakes will not work and there is a
Power Steering Warning Ultrasonic Parking dealer. If the system is working

normally, the indicator light then
Light Sensor Light turns off.
The traction off light comes on when
the Traction Control System (TCS)
has been turned off by pressing and
releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak
button.
This light and the StabiliTrak OFF
This light comes on briefly when the This light comes on to indicate that light come on when StabiliTrak is
ignition is turned to ON/RUN as a there is a malfunction in the system. turned off.
check to show it is working. See your dealer for service. If the TCS is off, wheel spin is not
If it does not come on have the See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on limited. Adjust driving accordingly.
vehicle serviced by your dealer. page 9‑36 for more information. See Traction Control System (TCS)
If this light stays on, or comes on on page 9‑30 and StabiliTrak®
while driving, the system may not be Traction Off Light System on page 9‑31.
working. If this happens, see your
dealer for service.
This light comes on briefly while

starting the engine. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your
StabiliTrak® OFF Light Traction Control System See StabiliTrak® System on

page 9‑31 and Traction Control
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light System (TCS) on page 9‑30.
Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning
Light
This light comes on briefly while
starting the engine. If it does not, The StabiliTrak or Traction Control
have the vehicle serviced by your System (TCS) indicator/warning
dealer. light comes on briefly when the
This light comes on when the engine is started.
StabiliTrak system is turned off. If the light does not come on, have
If StabiliTrak is off, the Traction the vehicle serviced by your dealer. This light comes on briefly while
Control System (TCS) is also off. If the system is working normally, starting the vehicle.
If the TCS is off, the system does the indicator light turns off. If it does not, have the vehicle
not assist in controlling the vehicle. If the light is on and not flashing, the serviced by the dealer. If the system
Turn on the TCS and the StabiliTrak TCS, and potentially the StabiliTrak is working normally the indicator
systems and the warning light system have been disabled. light goes off.
turns off.
If the indicator/warning light is on Notice: The engine coolant
See Traction Control System (TCS) and flashing, the TCS and/or the temperature warning light
on page 9‑30 and StabiliTrak® StabiliTrak system is actively indicates that the vehicle has
System on page 9‑31. working. overheated. Driving with this light
on can damage the engine and it
may not be covered by the When the Light Is On Steady Engine Oil Pressure Light
vehicle warranty. See Engine This indicates that one or more of
Overheating on page 10‑18. the tires are significantly
The engine coolant temperature underinflated.
warning light comes on when the Stop as soon as possible, and
engine has overheated. inflate the tires to the pressure value
If this happens, pull over and turn shown on the Tire and Loading
off the engine as soon as possible. Information label. See Tire Pressure
See Engine Overheating on on page 10‑48. The oil pressure light should come
page 10‑18. on briefly as the engine is started.
When the Light Flashes First and If it does not come on, have the
Then Is On Steady vehicle serviced by your dealer.
Tire Pressure Light
If the light flashes for about a minute Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
and then stays on, there may be a maintenance can damage the
problem with the TPMS. If the engine. Driving with the engine
problem is not corrected, the light oil low can also damage the
will come on at every ignition cycle. engine. The repairs would not be
See Tire Pressure Monitor covered by the vehicle warranty.
Operation on page 10‑50. Check the oil level as soon as
For vehicles with the Tire Pressure possible. Add oil if required, but
Monitor System (TPMS), this light if the oil level is within the
comes on briefly when the engine is operating range and the oil
started. It provides information pressure is still low, have the
about tire pressures and the TPMS. vehicle serviced. Always follow
the maintenance schedule for
changing engine oil.
If the vehicle has low engine oil Low Fuel Warning Light Immobilizer Light
pressure, this light will stay on after
the engine is started, or come on
while driving.
This indicates that the engine is not
receiving enough oil. The engine
could be low on oil, or could have
some other oil problem. Have it
fixed immediately by your dealer. This light comes on for a few The immobilizer light should come
The oil pressure light could also seconds when the ignition is turned on briefly as the engine is started.
come on in other situations: on as a check to indicate it is If it does not come on, have the
working. If it does not come on, vehicle serviced by your dealer.
. When the ignition is on but the have it fixed. If the system is working normally,
engine is not running, the light the indicator light turns off.
will come on as a test to show it This light comes on when the
is working. The light will go out vehicle is low on fuel. If the light stays on and the engine
when the ignition is turned on. The low fuel warning light comes on does not start, there could be a
If it does not come on with the when there are approximately 6.0 L problem with the immobilizer
ignition on, there may be a (1.7 gal) of fuel remaining in system. See Immobilizer Operation
problem with the fuse or bulb. the tank. on page 2‑10.
Have it fixed right away.
To turn the light off, add fuel to the
. If the vehicle comes to a hard fuel tank. See Filling the Tank on
stop, the light may come on for a page 9‑42.
moment. This is normal.
Reduced Engine Power The vehicle can be driven at a Daytime Running Lamps
reduced speed when the reduced
Light engine power light is on but
(DRL) Indicator Light
acceleration and speed might be
reduced. The performance could be
reduced until the next time the
vehicle is driven. If this light stays
on, see your dealer as soon as
possible for diagnosis and repair.
The reduced engine power light High-Beam On Light This light turns on whenever the
should come on briefly as the Daytime Running Lamps are in use.
engine is started. If it does not come See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
on, have the vehicle serviced by on page 6‑2.
your dealer.
This light, along with the malfunction Front Fog Lamp Light
indicator lamp, displays when a
noticeable reduction in the vehicle's
performance occurs. Stop the This light comes on when the
vehicle and turn off the ignition. Wait high-beam headlamps are in use.
10 seconds and restart the vehicle.
This might correct the condition. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 6‑2.
For vehicles with front fog lamps,

this light comes on when the front
fog lamps are in use.
The light goes out when the front Cruise Control Light Door Ajar Light
fog lamps are turned off. See Front
Fog Lamps on page 6‑4 for more
information.
Lamps On Reminder
For vehicles with cruise control, the This light comes on when a door is
cruise control light is white when the open or not securely latched. Before
cruise control is on and ready, and driving, check that all doors are
turns green when the cruise control properly closed.
is set and active.
This light comes on when the
The light turns off when the cruise
exterior lamps are in use. See
control is turned off. See Cruise
Exterior Lamp Controls on page 6‑1.
Control on page 9‑34.
Information Displays DIC Buttons DIC Menu Items

Press MENU to view the DIC
Driver Information menus. Some items display in the
Center (DIC) upper display area, some in the
lower display area, and others use
The DIC displays information about both the upper and lower display
your vehicle. It also displays areas. Use w x to scroll through
warning messages if a system the menu items. Not all items are
problem is detected. See Vehicle 1. SET/CLR: Press to set or clear
available on every vehicle. The
Messages on page 5‑27. All the menu item displayed. This is
following is a list of all possible
messages appear in the DIC display not used to reset the trip
menu items:
in the instrument cluster. odometer. To reset the trip
odometer, use the reset button . Average Speed
DIC Operation and Displays on the tachometer in the . Fuel Range
The DIC has different displays instrument cluster.
. Average Fuel Economy
which can be accessed by using the 2. w x (Thumbwheel): Use to
DIC buttons on the turn signal lever . Timer
scroll through the items in
on the left side of the steering . Remaining Oil Life
each menu.
wheel. The DIC displays trip, fuel,
. Units
and warning messages if a system 3. MENU: Press to display the DIC
problem is detected. menus. This button is also used . Language
to return to or exit the last
screen displayed on the DIC.
. Tire Learn
. Compass
Average Speed This displays the approximate press and hold the SET/CLR button
distance the vehicle can be driven while the average fuel economy is
without refueling. The fuel range displayed.
estimate is based on an average of
the vehicle's fuel economy over Timer
recent driving history and the
amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
Average Fuel Economy
Canada Shown, Mexico Similar
This display shows the average
speed. To reset the average speed
to zero, press and hold the SET/
CLR button while the average This display can be used as a timer.
speed is displayed. To start the timer, press SET/CLR
while the timer is displayed. The
Fuel Range display will show the amount of time
Canada Shown, Mexico Similar that has passed since the timer was
last reset, not including time the
This display shows the approximate ignition is off. The timer will record
average liters per 100 kilometers up to 99:59 hours, after which the
(L/100 km) or miles per display will return to zero. To reset
gallon (mpg). This number is the timer to zero, press and hold
calculated based on the number of SET/CLR.
L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the
last time this menu item was reset.
To reset the average fuel economy,
Remaining Oil Life SET/CLR button while the oil life Tire Learn
This menu is not available while the display is active. See Engine Oil This menu is not available while the
vehicle is moving. This display Life System on page 10‑11. vehicle is moving. This display
shows an estimate of the oil's Units allows for matching of the TPMS
remaining useful life. If 99 : % is sensors. See Tire Pressure Monitor
This menu is not available while the System on page 10‑49 and Tire
displayed, that means 99% of the vehicle is moving. Press SET/CLR
current oil life remains. Pressure Monitor Operation on
while the unit display is active and page 10‑50.
When the remaining oil life is low, move w x to change units when
the Code 82 message will appear UNIT SET is displayed. Press SET/ Compass
on the display. The oil should be CLR to confirm the setting. Select 1, See Compass on page 5‑4 for
changed as soon as possible. See 2, or 3 for the unit display. 1 is information on setting and
Engine Oil on page 10‑9. In addition Imperial units, 2 is US units, and 3 recalibrating the compass.
to the engine oil life system is metric units. This will change the
monitoring the oil life, additional displays on the cluster and DIC to
maintenance is recommended in the the type of measurements selected.
Maintenance Schedule. See
Maintenance Schedule on Language
page 11‑3. This menu is not available while the
Remember, the oil life display must vehicle is moving. Press SET/CLR
be reset after each oil change. It will while the language display is active
not reset itself. Also, be careful not and move w x to change the
to reset the oil life display language of the displays when
accidentally at any time other than LANG SET is displayed. Select 1 or
when the oil has just been changed. 2 for the language display. 1 is
It cannot be reset accurately until Alphabet and 2 is Arabic Numeral.
the next oil change. To reset the Press SET/CLR to confirm the
engine oil life system, press the setting.
Vehicle Messages 23: Back-up Lamp Failure Vehicle

24: License Plate Lamp Failure
DIC messages display when the Personalization
status of the vehicle has changed 25: Left Front Turn Indicator Failure
and action may be needed to Personalization Menu (Radio
26: Left Rear Turn Indicator Failure
correct the condition. Multiple Without Touchscreen)
messages appear one after another. 27: Right Front Turn Indicator
The audio system controls and
Failure
Press any of the DIC buttons on the touchscreen are used to access the
turn signal lever to acknowledge 28: Right Rear Turn Indicator personalization menus for
and clear them from the display. Failure customizing vehicle features.
More urgent messages cannot be 73: Service All Wheel Drive System The following are all possible
cleared from the DIC display. All personalization features. Depending
messages should be taken 82: Change Engine Oil Soon
on the vehicle, some may not be
seriously. Clearing messages will 84: Engine Power Is Reduced available.
not correct the problem.
89: Service Vehicle Soon CONFIG (Configuration): Press to
Vehicle messages appear as code access the Configuration
125: Compass Calibrating — Drive
numbers. Settings Menu.
in Circles
15: Center High Mounted Brake MENU/TUNE: Turn to scroll
173: All Wheel Drive Off
Lamp Failure through the menus or setup items.
16: Service Brake Lamps Press to enter the menus and select
the menu items.
21: Left Front Position Lamp
Failure / BACK : Press to exit, or return to
the previous screen or menu.
22: Right Front Position Lamp
Failure
To access a menu:
. Spanish 3. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to
1. Press the CONFIG button. 1. Turn MENU/TUNE to the desired change the desired value.
language. 4. To save and return to the Time
2. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to
select the desired menu. 2. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to Settings menu, press / BACK
select. button at any time.
3. Press the MENU/TUNE knob.
Settings menus and functions may Press / BACK to go back to the Set Date
vary depending on vehicle option. last menu. Select this to manually set the date.
Press the CONFIG button and the Time and Data Settings 1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to
following list of menu items may be Select the Time and Data Settings the desired value.
available: menu and the following may be 2. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to
. Languages displayed: select the value.
. Time and Data Settings . Set Time 3. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to
. Radio Settings . Set Data change the desired value.
. Vehicle Settings . Set Time Format 4. To save and return to the Time
. Settings menu, press / BACK
. Comfort & Convenience Set Date Format
button at any time.
. Collision/Detection Systems . Auto Time Adjust
Set Time Format
Language Set Time
Select this to set the 12/24 hour
Select the Language menu and the Select this to manually set the time. format.
following may be displayed: 1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to 1. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to
. English the desired value. select the 12 hour or 24 hour
2. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to display format.
. French
select the value.
Set Date Format Auto Volume 2. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to

Select this to set the month and day The auto volume feature select the value.
format. automatically adjusts the radio Vehicle Settings
1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to volume to compensate for road and
wind noise as the vehicle speeds up Select the Radio Settings menu and
the desired setting. the following may be displayed:
or slows down, so that the volume
2. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to level is consistent. . Comfort and Convenience
select the DD/MM/YYYY (day/
month/year), MM/DD/YYYY 1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to . Collision/Detection Systems
(month/day/year), or YYYY/MM/ the desired value. . Lighting
DD (year/month/day) display 2. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to . Power Door Locks
format. select the value.
. Lock, Unlock, Settings
Auto Time Adjust Maximum Startup Volume
. Vehicle Factory Settings
Select this to turn the auto time Select this to manually set the
adjust on or off. startup volume of the radio. Comfort and Convenience
1. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to 1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to Select the Comfort and
turn On or Off. increase or decrease the value. Convenience menu and the
2. To save press the MENU/TUNE following may be displayed:
Radio Settings
Select the Radio Settings menu and or / BACK button. . Chime Volume
the following may be displayed: Radio Favorites
. Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear
. Auto Volume This feature allows for the manually Chime Volume
. Maximum Startup Volume setting of the number of favorite Select this to set the chime volume
pages. level to Normal or High.
. Radio Favorites
1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to 1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to
select 1-6. select Chime Volume.
2. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to Park Assist 2. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to
select. Select this to set the Ultrasonic select.
3. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to Parking Assist feature, audible only, Power Door Locks
the desired level. to be turned on or off.
Select Power Door Locks and the
4. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to 1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to following may be displayed:
select the level. select Park Assist. . Auto Door Unlock
Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear 2. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to .
select. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
This allows selection of the Auto
. Delayed Door Lock
Wipe in Reverse Gear feature to be
turned on or off. When on, and the select On or Off. Auto Door Unlock
front wipers are on, the rear window 4. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to This allows selection of which of the
wiper will turn on automatically confirm. doors will automatically unlock when
when the vehicle is shifted into
Lighting the vehicle is shifted into P (Park),
R (Reverse).
select from All Doors, Driver Door,
1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to Select the Lighting menu and the or Off.
select Auto Wipe in following may be displayed:
Reverse Gear. . Exit Lighting the desired selection.
2. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to
Exit Lighting 2. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to
turn On or Off.
This allows the selection of how select.
Collision/Detection Systems long the exterior lamps stay on Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
If equipped, select the Collision/ when leaving the vehicle and it is
dark outside. When on, this feature will keep the
Detection Systems menu and Park driver door from locking when the
Assist will be displayed. 1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to door is open. If Off is selected, the
the desired time.
Delayed Door Lock menu will be Remote Unlock Light Feedback Remote Door Unlock
available and the door will lock as When on, the exterior lamps will This allows selection of which doors
programmed through this menu. flash when unlocking the vehicle will unlock when pressing K on the
1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter, select from All
On or Off. (RKE) transmitter, select Flash Doors or Driver Door.
2. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to Lights or Lights Off.
When set to Driver Door, the driver
select. 1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to
door will unlock the first time K is
the desired selection.
Delayed Door Lock pressed and all doors will unlock
2. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to when the button is pressed a
When on, this feature will delay the select.
locking of the doors after the last second time. When set to All Doors,
door is closed. Remote Lock Light and Horn all of the doors will unlock at the first
Feedback press of K.
On or Off. This allows the selection of what 1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to
type of feedback is given when the desired selection.
2. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to
select. pressing Q on the RKE transmitter, 2. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to
select from Lights and Horn, Lights select.
Lock, Unlock, Settings only, Horn Only, or Off.
Vehicle Factory Settings
Select Power Door Locks and the 1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to
following may be displayed: the desired selection. Select Vehicle Factory Settings to
. return all of the vehicle
Remote Unlock Light Feedback 2. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to personalization to the default
. Remote Lock Light and Horn select. settings. Press MENU/TUNE when
Feedback Vehicle Factory Settings is selected
. Remote Door Unlock and open the menu. Select Yes or
No by turning and pressing the
MENU/TUNE knob.
Personalization Menu (Radio Settings menus and functions may Climate and Air Quality
With Touchscreen) vary depending on vehicle option.
Select the Climate and Air Quality
Settings can be made with the The following list of menu items may menu and the following may be
ignition ON and the vehicle not be available: displayed:
moving. . Climate & Air Quality . Auto Fan Speed
The following are all possible . Cluster display info . Auto Compartment Zone Temp
personalization features. Depending
on the vehicle, some may not be
. Comfort & Convenience . Rear Zone Temp
available. . Collision/detection . Air Quality Sensor
D (Home): Press to access the . Lighting . Air Conditioning Mode
Home Page Menu. . Power Door Locks . Auto Defog
Q or R : Press to scroll through the . Lock, Unlock Settings
menus or setup items.
. Auto Rear Defog
. Rear Camera Option . Auto Cooled Vented Seats
4: Press to exit, or return to the
previous screen or menu. . Vehicle Factory Settings . Auto Heated Seats
To access the menu: . Sport Mode Settings . Remote Start Auto Seat Cool
1. Press D. . Language . Remote Start Heated Seats
. Text Scroll
2. Press Settings. Auto Fan Speed
3. Press Vehicle Settings.
. Touch Beep Volume This allows the selection of the
. Max Startup Volume automatic fan speed. It can be
Press the menu item to select it. adjusted to run lower or higher than
Each of the menus is detailed in the . About normal.
following information. . DivX® VOD
Press Auto Fan Speed when Press Air Quality Sensor when Auto Rear Defog
highlighted. Select Low, Medium, highlighted. Select Off, Low This allows the auto rear defog to
or High. Press 4. Sensitivity, High Sensitivity. be turned on or off. This feature will
Press 4. automatically turn on the rear
Auto Compartment Zone Temp
Air Conditioning Mode window defogger when it is cold
This allows the selection of the outside.
compartment zone temperature This allows the selection of
setting when the vehicle is automatic start of the air Press Auto Rear Defog when
restarted. conditioning upon vehicle start. highlighted. Select On or Off.
Selecting On indicates the air Press 4.
Press Auto Compartment Zone
Temp when highlighted. Select conditioning will be on when the Auto Cooled Vented Seats
Single Zone, Dual Zone, or Last vehicle is started. Selecting Off
turns the air conditioning off each When on, this feature will turn the
Setting. Press 4. time the vehicle is started. Last cooled seats on when using remote
Rear Zone Temp Setting will resume the last setting start on warm days.
when the vehicle was shut off. Press Auto Cooled Vented Seats
This allows the selection of the rear
temperature setting when the Press Air Conditioning Mode when when highlighted. Select On or Off.
vehicle is restarted. highlighted. Select Off, On, or Last Press 4.
Setting. Press 4.
Press Rear Zone Temp when Auto Heated Seats
highlighted. Select Off, Rear Mimic Auto Defog When on, this feature will turn the
Front, or Rear Last Known. heated seats on.
This allows the auto defog to be
Press 4. turned on or off. Press Auto Heated Seats when
Air Quality Sensor Press Auto Defog when highlighted. highlighted. Select On or Off.
This allows the selection of whether Select On or Off. Press 4. Press 4.
the system will operate at high or
low sensitivity.
Remote Start Auto Seat Cool Press Cluster Eco Telltale when Easy Exit Steering Column
When on, this feature will turn the highlighted. Select On or Off or turn. This allows the selection of the
cooled seats on when using the Press 4. Easy Exit Steering Column position
remote start on hot days. when exiting the vehicle.
Comfort and Convenience
Press Remote Start Auto Seat Cool Press Easy Exit Steering Column
Select the Comfort and
when highlighted and open the when highlighted. Select Off,
Convenience menu and the
menu. Select On or Off. Press 4. following may be displayed:
On-Column In, On-Column Up,
On-Column In & Up. Press 4.
Remote Start Heated Seats . Chime Volume
When on, this feature will turn the Easy Exit Driver Seat
. Easy Exit Steering Column
heated seats on when using the This will move the seat back to
. Easy Exit Driver Seat
remote start on cold days. make it easier to exit the vehicle.
. Auto Parking Mirror Tilt
Press Remote Start Heated Seats Press Easy Exit Driver Seat when
when highlighted. Select On or Off. . Personalization By Driver highlighted. Select On or Off.
Press 4. . Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear Press 4.
Cluster Display Info Chime Volume Auto Parking Mirror Tilt
Select the Cluster Display Info This allows selection of the chime This allows the selection of the
menu and the following may be volume level. reverse tilt mirror feature on or off.
displayed: When on, both the driver and
Press Chime Volume when
passenger mirrors will tilt downward
. Cluster Eco Telltale highlighted. Select Normal or High.
when vehicle is shifted to
Cluster Eco Telltale Press 4. R (Reverse) to improve visibility of
the ground near the rear wheels.
This allows eco telltale information
They will return to their previous
display to be turned on or off.
driving position when the vehicle is
shifted out of R (Reverse), the Collision/Detection Systems Press Side Blind Zone Alert when
ignition is turned to OFF, or the highlighted. Select On or Off.
Select the Collision/Detection
vehicle is left in reverse. Press 4.
Systems menu and the following
Press Auto Parking Mirror when may be displayed:
highlighted. Select On or Off.
Lighting
. Park Assist Select the Lighting menu and the
Press 4.
. Towbar Attached following may be displayed:
Personalization By Driver . Side Blind Zone Alert . Vehicle Locator Lights
This allows the Personalization by
Park Assist . Exit Lighting
Driver feature to be turned on or off.
Press Personalization By Driver This allows the Ultrasonic Parking Vehicle Locator Lights
when highlighted and open the Assist feature, audible only, to be This allows the vehicle locator lights
turned on or off.
menu. Select On or Off. Press 4. to be turned on or off. The vehicle
Press Park Assist when highlighted. locator lights come on when
Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear Select On or Off. Press 4. unlocking the vehicle with the
This allows selection of the Auto RKE transmitter.
Wipe in Reverse Gear feature to be Towbar Attached
Press Vehicle Locator Lights when
turned on or off. When on, and the This allows the towbar feature to be highlighted. Select Off, 30 Sec,
front wipers are on, the rear window turned on or off . 60 Sec, or 120 Sec. Press 4.
wiper will turn on automatically
Press Towbar Attached when
when the vehicle is shifted into Exit Lighting
highlighted. Select Off, On,
R♦(Reverse).
or Towbar Attached. Press 4. This allows selection of how long
Press Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear the exterior lamps stay on when
when highlighted. Select On or Off. Side Blind Zone Alert leaving the vehicle and it is dark
Press 4. This allows the Side Blind Zone outside.
Alert feature to be turned on or off.
Press Exit Lighting when Press Auto Door Lock when Press Delayed Door Lock when
highlighted. Select On or Off. highlighted. Select On or Off or turn. highlighted. Select On or Off.
Press 4. Press 4. Press 4.
Power Door Locks Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out Lock, Unlock Settings
Select Power Door Locks and the When on, this feature will keep the Select Lock, Unlock Settings and
following may be displayed: driver door from locking when the the following may be displayed:
door is open. If Off is selected, the
. Auto Door Unlock . Passive Entry Unlock
Delayed Door Lock menu will be
. Auto Door Lock available and the door will lock as . Passive Entry Lock
. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out programmed through this menu. . Sliding Door Selection
. Delayed Door Lock Press Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out . Remote Unlock Light Feedback
when highlighted. Select On or Off.
Auto Door Unlock Press 4.
. Remote Lock Light & Horn
Feedback
This allows selection of which of the
Delayed Door Lock . Remote Door Unlock
doors will automatically unlock when
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). When on, this feature will delay the . Relock Remotely Unlocked
locking of the doors until Doors
Press Auto Door Unlock when
five seconds after the last door is
highlighted. Select All Doors, Driver . Relock Unlocked Doors
closed. Three chimes will signal that
Door, or Off. Press 4. delayed locking is in use. Pressing . Memory Remote Recall
Auto Door Lock either Q or K on the RKE . Remote Start
transmitter twice will override the
This allows selection of which of the . Remote Left in Vehicle Reminder
delayed locking feature and
doors will automatically lock when
immediately lock all of the doors.
the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
Passive Entry Lock Remote Lock Light & Horn Relock Remotely Unlocked Doors
This feature can be turned on or off Feedback When on, if the doors are unlocked
or to select feedback when using This allows selection of what type of from the RKE transmitter and a door
the button on the driver door to lock feedback is given when pressing Q is not opened after a period of time,
the vehicle. on the RKE transmitter. the doors will automatically relock.
Press Passive Entry Lock when Press Remote Lock Light & Horn Press Relock Remotely Unlocked
highlighted. Select Off, On, or On Feedback when highlighted. Select Doors when highlighted. Select On
with Active Chirp. Press 4. Lights only, Lights & Horn, horn or Off. Press 4.
Passive Entry Unlock Only, or Off. Press 4. Relock Unlocked Door
This specifies of which doors are Remote Door Unlock When on, the doors will
unlocked by pressing the button on This allows selection of which doors automatically lock after a period of
the outside door handle. time not entering or exiting the
will unlock when pressing K on the
Press Delayed Door Lock when vehicle.
RKE transmitter.
highlighted. Select All Doors or Press Relock Unlocked Door when
Press Remote Door Unlock when highlighted. Select On or Off.
Driver Door. Press 4. highlighted. Select All Doors or
Driver Door. When set to Driver Press 4.
Remote Unlock Light Feedback
Door Only, the driver door will Memory Remote Recall
When on, the exterior lamps will
unlock the first time K is pressed
flash when unlocking the vehicle This allows the Memory Remote
with the RKE transmitter. and all doors will unlock when the Recall feature to be turned on or off.
button is pressed a second time.
Press Remote Unlock Light When set to All Doors, all of the When on, this feature will recall the
Feedback when highlighted. Select doors will unlock at the first current driver's last seat, outside
Flash Lights or Lights Off. Press 4. press of K. Press 4. mirrors upon unlocking the driver
door with the RKE, and opening that
door. The current driver is identified Rear Camera Option

. Sport Steering
when the RKE transmitter is used to . All Wheel Drive Steering
Select Rear Camera Option and the
unlock the driver door.
following may be displayed: . Instrument Lighting
Memory Remote Recall is when the . Guidelines Sport Suspension
memorized settings will be recalled
when the vehicle is unlocked. Guidelines This feature will turn on the sport
Press Memory Remote Recall when This feature will turn on the suspension feature.
highlighted. Select On or Off. guidelines in the rear camera Press Sport Suspension when
Press 4. display. highlighted. Select On or Off.
Press Guidelines when highlighted. Press 4.
Remote Start
Select On or Off. Press 4. Powertrain Performance
This allows the remote start feature
to be turned on or off. Vehicle Factory Settings This feature will turn on the
Press Remote Start when Select Vehicle Factory Settings to powertrain performance feature.
highlighted. Select On or Off. return all of the vehicle Press Powertrain Performance
Press 4. personalization to the default when highlighted. Select On or Off.
settings. Press Vehicle Factory Press 4.
Remote Left in Vehicle Reminder Settings when highlighted. Select
This allows the Remote Left in Yes or No. Press 4. Sport Steering
Vehicle Reminder feature to be This feature will turn on the sport
turned on or off. If on, the horn will Sport Mode Settings steering feature on.
chirp if a remote is left in the Select Sport Mode Settings and the
vehicle. Press Sport Steering when
following may be displayed: highlighted. Select On or Off.
Press Remote Left in Vehicle . Sport Suspension Press 4.
Reminder when highlighted. Select
. Powertrain Performance
On or Off. Press 4.
All Wheel Drive Steering Text Scroll Max Startup Volume

This feature will turn on the all This allows the Text Scroll feature to This allows the startup volume of
wheel drive steering feature. be turned on or off. the infotainment system to be set.
Press All Wheel Drive Steering When on, if there is long text Press Max Startup Volume when
when highlighted. Select On or Off. displayed on the audio screen, the highlighted. Press S or T select the
Press 4. text is scrolled. When off, the text is desired volume between 9-21.
scrolled once and displayed in
Instrument Lighting Press 4.
truncated form.
This feature will turn on the Press Text Scroll when highlighted. About
instrument lighting feature.
Select On or Off. Press 4. Select the About menu and the
Press Instrument Lighting when following will be displayed:
highlighted. Select On or Off. Touch Beep Volume
. System Version
Press 4. This allows the Touch Beep Volume
feature to be turned on or off.
. Legal Information
Language
When on, a beep will be heard System Version
Select the Language menu and the when pressing the screen. When Press System Version when
following may be displayed: off, the beep is canceled. highlighted to view the version of
. English Press Touch Beep Volume when the infotainment system. Press 4.
. French highlighted. Select On or Off.
. Spanish Press 4.
Press Language when highlighted.

Select the language desired.
Press 4.
Legal Information
. DIVX VIDEO-ON DEMAND: This
DivX Certified device must be
Press Legal Information when registered in order to play
highlighted to view the Open source purchased DivX
information. Press 4. Video-on-Demand (VOD)
movies. To obtain a registration
DivX VOD code, locate the DivX VOD
Press DivX VOD when highlighted. section in the device setup
menu. See vod.divx.com for
. DIVX VIDEO: DivX is a digital
more information on how to
video format created by DivX,
complete the registration.
LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi
Corporation. This is an official Press 4.
DivX Certified® device that plays
DivX video. See divx.com for
more information and software
tools on how to convert files into
DivX videos.
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Exterior Lighting AUTO (Automatic): Turns the

headlamps on automatically at
normal brightness, together with the
Exterior Lamp Controls following:
Exterior Lighting
. Parking Lamps
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Headlamp High/Low-Beam . Taillamps
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 . License Plate Lamps
Daytime Running . Instrument Panel Lights
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Automatic Headlamp
. Sidemarker Lamps
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 ; (Parking Lamps): Turns the
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4 parking lamps on together with the
Turn and Lane-Change following:
The exterior lamp control is to the
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
left of the steering column on the . Taillamps
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
instrument panel. . License Plate Lamps
Interior Lighting There are four positions:
Instrument Panel Illumination
. Instrument Panel Lights
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 O (Off): Briefly turn to this position . Sidemarker Lamps
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 to turn the automatic lamp control
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 off or on again.
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Lighting Features
Battery Load Management . . . . 6-6
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7
6-2 Lighting
5 (Headlamps): Turns the Headlamp High/ Flash-to-Pass

headlamps on together with the Low-Beam Changer To flash the high beams, pull the
lamps listed below. A warning chime
3 (Headlamp High/Low-Beam turn signal lever all the way toward
sounds if the driver door is opened
Changer): Push the turn signal you. Then release it.
when the ignition switch is off and
the headlamps are on. lever away from you and release, to
.
turn the high beams on. Daytime Running
Parking Lamps
To return to low beams, push the Lamps (DRL)
. Taillamps lever again or pull it toward you and Daytime Running Lamps can make
. License Plate Lamps release. it easier for others to see the front of
. Instrument Panel Lights your vehicle during the day. Fully
functional daytime running lamps
. Sidemarker Lamps are required on all vehicles first sold
# (Front Fog Lamps): For in Canada.
vehicles with fog lamps, press to A light sensor on top of the
turn the lamps on or off. instrument panel makes the DRL
See Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑4. work, so be sure it is not covered.
This indicator light turns on in the
When the lights are on, ; will be instrument cluster when the
lit. See Lamps On Reminder on high-beam headlamps are on.
page 5‑23.
Lighting 6-3
The DRL system makes the To turn the DRL off or on again, turn The vehicle has a light sensor on
low-beam headlamps come on at a the exterior lamp control to the off top of the instrument panel. Make
reduced brightness when the position and then release. For sure it is not covered, or the
following conditions are met: vehicles first sold in Canada, the headlamps will be on when they are
. The ignition is in the ON/ DRL cannot be turned off. not needed.
RUN mode. The system may also turn on the
Automatic Headlamp headlamps when driving through a
. The exterior lamp control is
in AUTO. System parking garage or tunnel.
. The engine is running. When it is dark enough outside and Lights On with Wipers
the exterior lamp control is in the
When the DRL are on, only the automatic position, the headlamps If the windshield wipers are
low-beam headlamps, at a reduced come on automatically. See Exterior activated in daylight with the engine
level of brightness, will be on. The Lamp Controls on page 6‑1. on, and the exterior lamp control is
taillamps, sidemarker, instrument in AUTO, the headlamps, parking
panel, and other lamps will not lamps, and other exterior lamps
be on. come on. The transition time for the
lamps coming on varies based on
The headlamps automatically wiper speed. When the wipers are
change from DRL to the regular not operating, these lamps turn off.
headlamps depending on the
darkness of the surroundings. The Move the exterior lamp control to P
other lamps that come on with the or ; to disable this feature.
headlamps will also come on.
When it is bright enough outside,
the headlamps go off and the DRL
come on.
6-4 Lighting
Hazard Warning Flashers Turn and Lane-Change If after signaling a turn or lane
change the arrow flashes rapidly or
Signals does not come on, a signal bulb
may be burned out. Replace any
burned out bulbs. If a bulb is not
burned out, check the fuse. See
Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 10‑33.
Front Fog Lamps
Move the lever all the way up or

down to signal a turn.
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): An arrow on the instrument cluster

Press and momentarily hold this will flash in the direction of the turn
button to make the front and rear or lane change.
turn signal lamps flash on and off. Raise or lower the lever until the
This warns others that you are arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
having trouble. Press and change. The turn signal flashes For vehicles with front fog lamps,
momentarily hold again to turn the three times. the button is on the outboard side of
flashers off. the instrument panel.
The lever returns to its starting
position when it is released. The ignition must be on to turn on
the fog lamps.
Lighting 6-5
# (Front Fog Lamps): Press to Interior Lighting D (Instrument Panel

turn the fog lamps on or off. An Brightness): Move the
indicator light on the instrument Instrument Panel thumbwheel up or down and hold, to
cluster comes on when the fog brighten or dim the instrument panel
lamps are on. Illumination Control controls and infotainment display
The fog lamps come on together screen.
with the parking lamps.
Courtesy Lamps
If the high-beam headlamps are
turned on, the fog lamps will turn off. The courtesy lamps come on
If the high-beam headlamps are automatically when any door is
turned off, the fog lamps will turn opened and the dome lamp is in the
back on again. door position.
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be on
along with the fog lamps. This feature controls the brightness
of the instrument panel controls and
infotainment display screen. The
thumbwheel is to the left of the
steering column on the instrument
panel.
6-6 Lighting
Dome Lamps Reading Lamps Lighting Features

Battery Load
Management
The vehicle has Electric Power
Management (EPM) that estimates
the battery's temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage
for best performance and extended
life of the battery.
For vehicles with front reading When the battery's state of charge
lamps, they are in the overhead is low, the voltage is raised slightly
console. to quickly bring the charge back up.
The dome lamp controls are in the # or $ (Reading Lamps): Press When the state of charge is high,
headliner above the rear seats. to turn each lamp on or off. the voltage is lowered slightly to
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle
9 (Dome Lamp Override): Press has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage
to turn the lamps off, even when a
door is open. display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you may see the
H (Door): When the button is voltage move up or down. This is
returned to the middle position, the normal. If there is a problem, an
lamps turn on automatically when a alert will be displayed.
door is opened.
R (On): Press to turn on the dome
lamps.
Lighting 6-7
The battery can be discharged at EPM works to prevent excessive Battery Power Protection
idle if the electrical loads are very discharge of the battery. It does this
high. This is true for all vehicles. by balancing the generator's output The battery saver feature is
This is because the generator and the vehicle's electrical needs. designed to protect the vehicle's
(alternator) may not be spinning fast It can increase engine idle speed to battery.
enough at idle to produce all the generate more power, whenever If some interior lamps are left on
power needed for very high needed. It can temporarily reduce and the ignition is turned off, the
electrical loads. the power demands of some battery rundown protection system
A high electrical load occurs when accessories. automatically turns the lamp off after
several of the following are on, such Normally, these actions occur in some time.
as: headlamps, high beams, fog steps or levels, without being
lamps, rear window defogger, noticeable. In rare cases at the
climate control fan at high speed, highest levels of corrective action,
heated seats, engine cooling fans, this action may be noticeable to
trailer loads, and loads plugged into the driver.
accessory power outlets.
6-8 Lighting
2 NOTES
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 Downloadable Applications

Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Smartphone Link
System Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 (Overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Smartphone Link
Audio Players (Pandora) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Introduction CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Smartphone Link
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 (Stitcher) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2 Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Overview (AM-FM Radio) . . . . . 7-3 Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26 Bluetooth Phone/Devices
Overview (Radio with Pictures and Movies (Audio
CD/USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Navigation System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
®
Overview (Radio with OnStar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26 Pictures and Movies (Picture
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Phone System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Home Page (Radio with Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-28 Pictures and Movies (Movie
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Bluetooth (Infotainment System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30 Trademarks and License
Radio Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Agreements
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Trademarks and License
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Hands-Free Phone . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
7-2 Infotainment System

. Set up the tone, speaker
Introduction adjustments, and preset radio
Theft-Deterrent Feature
stations. The infotainment system has an
Infotainment See Defensive Driving on page 9‑3.
electronic security system installed
Determine which radio the vehicle to prevent theft.
Notice: Contact your dealer
has and read the following pages to The infotainment system only works
before adding any equipment.
become familiar with its features. in the vehicle in which it was first
Adding audio or communication installed, and cannot be used in
{ WARNING equipment could interfere with
the operation of the engine, radio,
another vehicle.
Taking your eyes off the road for or other systems, and could
extended periods could cause a damage them. Follow federal
crash resulting in injury or death rules covering mobile radio and
to you or others. Do not give telephone equipment.
extended attention to infotainment Customer Assistance
tasks while driving.
Assistance is available to help with
Bluetooth pairing, application
This system provides access to downloading and installation, other
many audio and non-audio listings. mobile device interface, and
To minimize taking your eyes off the operation support of the
road while driving, do the following infotainment system. Specialists are
while the vehicle is parked: available when calling this
Customer Assistance number:
. Become familiar with the U.S. (855) 4 SUPPORT (478-7767).
operation and controls of the
audio system.
Overview (AM-FM Radio) 3. MENU/TUNE

. Press to open menus and
select menu items.
. Turn to highlight menu
items or to set values while
in a menu.
. Turn to manually select
radio stations.
4. FAV 123 (Favorites)
. Press to go to a
favorite page.
5. INFO (Information)
. Press to view current radio
station and current song
information.
6. SEEK ¨ (Next)
2. PRESET Buttons 1−6
. Press to seek the next
1. O /VOL (Power/Volume) station.
. Press to turn the system on
. Press and hold to store a
station.
. Press and hold to fast
and off. forward through the
. Turn to adjust the volume.
. Press to go to a preset currently playing song on
favorite station. an external audio device.
7. © SEEK (Previous) 10. H (Clock) 14. 5 /> (Phone/Mute)

. Press to seek the previous . Press to enter the time . Press to open the phone
station. and date settings menu. main menu.
. Press and hold to reverse 11. TONE . Press to mute the audio
through the currently . Press to open the system.
playing song on an external tone menu.
audio device.
12. CONFIG (Configuration)
8. AUX (Auxiliary)
. Press to open the System
. Press to access the Configuration menu.
auxiliary input device.
9. RADIO/BAND 13. / BACK
. Press to select AM, FM,
. Press to go to the
or band. previous screen.
. Press to select the radio
. Press to cancel entered
when listening to a different content.
audio source.
Overview (Radio with CD/USB) 1. O /VOL (Power/Volume)

. Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
2. Z (Eject)
. Removes a disc from the
CD slot.
3. Buttons 1−6
. Radio: Saves and selects
favorite stations.
4. AUX Port
. 3.5 mm (1/8 in) connection
for external devices.
5. MENU/TUNE
. Radio: Manually selects
radio stations.
. CD: Selects tracks.
6. FAV 1-2-3 (Favorites)
. Radio: Opens the
favorites list.
7. INFO (Information) 11. CD/AUX 16. / BACK

. Radio: Shows available . Selects the CD player or . Menu: Moves one
information about the an external audio source. level back.
current station. 12. RADIO/BAND . Character Input: Deletes
. CD: Shows available . Changes the band while the last character.
information about the listening to the radio.
current track. 17. 5 / > (Phone/Mute)
. Selects the radio when
8. CD Slot listening to a different
. Opens the Phone menu.
9. SEEK ¨ audio source. . Mutes the audio system.
. Radio: Seeks the next 13. H (Clock Menu)
station. . Opens the Clock menu.
. CD: Selects the next track 14. TONE
or fast forwards within a
track. . Opens the Tone menu.
10. © SEEK 15. CONFIG (Configuration)
. Opens the
. Radio: Seeks the previous
Configuration menu.
station.
. CD: Selects the previous
track or rewinds within a
track.
Overview (Radio with Touchscreen) Home Page (Radio with

Touchscreen)
Touchscreen Buttons
Touchscreen buttons show on the
screen when available. When a
function is unavailable, the button
may gray out. When a function is
selected, the button may highlight.
Home Page Features
1. z VOL y (Volume) 3. D (Home Page)

. Press to decrease or . Press to go to the Home PressF to go to the Home Page.
increase the volume. Page. See Home Page e audio: Press to select AM, FM,
(Radio with Touchscreen) SiriusXM (if equipped), USB/iPod/
2. O (Power) on page 7‑7. Bluetooth Audio, or AUX.
. Press and hold to turn the G picture & movie: Press to view
power on or off. a picture, movie, or auxiliary video.
7 telephone: Press to activate Turning the System On or Off Press and hold 5 / > to mute the
the phone features (if equipped). O /VOL (Power/Volume): Press to infotainment system. Press 5 / >
See Bluetooth (Overview) on turn the radio on and off.
page 7‑28 or Bluetooth again or turn the O / VOL knob to
(Infotainment Controls) on Automatic Switch-Off cancel mute.
page 7‑30 or Bluetooth (Voice If the infotainment system has been Menu System
Recognition) on page 7‑39. turned on after the ignition is turned
Controls
^ smartphone link: Press to listen off, the system will turn off
to Pandora or Stitcher. See automatically after 10 minutes. The MENU/TUNE knob and
Smartphone Link (Overview) on / BACK button are used to
page 7‑47 or Smartphone Link Volume Control navigate the menu system.
(Pandora) on page 7‑49 or MENU/TUNE Knob:
Smartphone Link (Stitcher) on
page 7‑51. Turn to:
. Highlight a menu option.
8 settings: Press to access the
Personalization menu. See Vehicle . Select a value.
Personalization on page 5‑27.
Press to:
Operation O / VOL (Power/Volume): Turn to
. Enter the menu system.
. Select or activate the highlighted
Radio Controls Without adjust the volume.
menu option.
Touchscreen 5 / > (Phone/Mute): Press 5 / >
The infotainment system is to activate OnStar. See OnStar® . Confirm a set value.
operated by using the pushbuttons, System on page 7‑26. . Turn a system setting on or off.
multifunction knobs, and menus
shown on the display.

. Talk
/ BACK: 3. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to
select the desired tone. . Country
Press to:
.
4. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to Press the / BACK button to go
Exit a menu. adjust the desired tone.
back to the Tone Settings menu.
. Go back to the previous menu 5. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to
screen. save the setting. System Settings
. Delete the last character in a Configuring the Number of
sequence. Press the / BACK button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu. Favorite Pages
. Press and hold to delete the Up to six favorite pages can be
entire character sequence. Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer) saved, and each page can store up
Submenus 1. Press the TONE button. to six radio stations.
An arrow on the right-hand edge of 2. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob To configure the number of available
the menu indicates that it has a to EQ. favorite pages:
submenu with other options. 3. Press the MENU/TUNE knob. 1. Press the CONFIG button.
Audio Settings Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to 2. Select Radio Settings.
select one of the following, then 3. Select Radio Favorites.
The audio settings can be set for press the MENU/TUNE knob to
each radio band and each audio select it. 4. Select the number of available
player source. favorite pages to display.
. OFF
Adjusting the Bass, Midrange, 5. Press the / BACK button to go
Treble, Fader, and Balance
. Pop
back to the System
1. Press the TONE button.
. Rock Configuration menu.
. Classical
the desired tone.
Auto Volume Radio Controls With System Settings

This feature automatically adjusts Touchscreen Auto Volume
the radio volume to compensate for The infotainment system is operated
road and wind noise. This feature automatically adjusts
by using the pushbuttons, menus
the radio volume to compensate for
The level of volume compensation shown on the display, and steering
road and wind noise.
can be selected, or the feature can wheel controls.
be turned off. The level of volume compensation
Turning the System On or Off can be selected, or the feature can
1. Press the CONFIG button. O (Power): Press and hold to turn be turned off.
2. Select Radio Settings. the radio on and off.
1. Press D.
3. Select Auto Volume. Automatic Switch-Off
2. Select Settings.
4. Select the setting. If the infotainment system has been
3. Select Radio Settings.
turned on after the ignition is turned
5. Press the / BACK button to off, the system will turn off 4. Select Auto Volume.
go back to the System automatically after 10 minutes.
Configuration menu. 5. Select the setting by pressing S
Volume Control or T.
z VOL y (Volume): Press to
increase or decrease the volume or 6. Press the 4 screen button to
press the volume bar. go back to the System
Configuration menu.
> (Mute): Press z VOL y, then
press > to mute and unmute the
system.
Audio Settings Radio Radio Broadcast Data

The audio settings can be set for System (RBDS)
each radio band and each audio AM-FM Radio RBDS is a service by FM stations
player source. that makes it easier to find radio
Tone Settings: Press menu, then
Playing the Radio Without stations with fault-free reception.
tone settings from the AM or Touchscreen
RBDS stations are indicated by the
FM menu. Audio Source Menu program name instead of the
. EQ (Equalizer): Press S or T to O / VOL (Power/Volume): Press to broadcasting frequency.
select a sound style or turn off turn the system on and off. Turn to View RBDS Broadcast
the sound style. increase or decrease the volume. Information
. Bass, Mid (Midrange), or Treble: MENU/TUNE: Turn to change the
Press − or + to change the radio station.
desired sound style from −12 RADIO/BAND: Press to select AM
to +12. and FM.
. Fader or Balance: Adjust the INFO: Press to display additional
front/rear or left/right speakers. information that may be available for
. Reset: Restore the settings back the current song.
to default settings. Press the INFO button to view the
FAV 123: Press to open the RBDS broadcasting information that
Press OK to exit Tone Settings. favorites list and select a is being received.
favorite page.
Selecting a Band
Preset Buttons 1–6: Press to
select preset stations. Press the RADIO/BAND button to
choose AM or FM. The last station
that was playing starts playing
again.
Selecting an Auxiliary Device Favorites List Stations List
Press the AUX button to select a There are two ways to select a 1. From AM or FM, turn the MENU/
connected auxiliary device. station from the Favorites List. TUNE knob to select the
Stations List, then press to
Selecting a Station
. Continue pressing the FAV 123 select.
button to select the desired
Seek Tuning favorite preset page. 2. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to
move to the desired station from
If the radio station is not known: . From AM or FM, turn the MENU/ the Stations List , then press to
TUNE knob to select the receive the station.
Press © SEEK¨ to automatically Favorites List, then press to
search for available radio stations. select. The Favorites List Category List
Press and hold © SEEK ¨ to change information will be displayed.
the radio stations as desired, then Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to
release to stop at the current move to the desired station from
station. Press and hold to fast the Favorites List , then press to
forward or reverse through the receive the station.
currently playing song on an
external audio device.
Most stations that broadcast an
RDS program type code specify the
type of programming transmitted.
Some stations change the program From AM or FM, turn the MENU/ Playing the Radio With
type code depending on the TUNE knob to select the Update AM Touchscreen
content. The system stores the RDS or FM Stations List, then press the
stations sorted by program type in MENU/TUNE knob. Audio Source Menu
the FM category list. During the AM or FM broadcasting z VOL y (Volume): Press to
To search for a programming type list update, press the MENU/TUNE increase or decrease the volume.
determined by station: knob or / BACK button to stop the O (Power): Press and hold to turn
1. From FM, turn the MENU/TUNE updates. the system on and off.
knob to select FM Category List,
Storing a Station as a Favorite D (Home Page): Press to enter
then press the MENU/ the Home Page.
TUNE knob. Stations from all bands can be
stored in any order in the favorite RDS (Radio Data System)
pages. The radio may have RDS. The RDS
move to the desired station, then
press the MENU TUNE knob to Up to six stations can be stored in feature is available for use only on
receive the selected each favorite page. FM stations that broadcast RDS
broadcasting channel. information. This feature only works
Storing Stations when the information from the radio
Update Stations List Press the FAV 123 button to select station is available. In rare cases, a
the desired page of saved favorites. radio station could broadcast
incorrect information that causes the
To store the station to a position in
radio features to work improperly.
the list, press the corresponding
If this happens, contact the radio
preset button 1−6 until a beep is
station.
heard.
While the radio is tuned to an
FM-RDS station, the station name
or call letters display.
Selecting a Band Selecting a Station . Press Q or R to scroll through

the list. Press on the station to
Press D, audio, then Source R to Seek Tuning select it.
choose AM, FM, or SiriusXM®, If the radio station is not known:
if equipped. The last station that Station List
was playing starts playing again. Press g SEEK l to automatically
search for available radio stations.
Selecting an Auxiliary Device
Hold and drag to the left or right of
the radio station to automatically
search for available radio stations.
Manual Tuning
Continue pressing q TUNE r to
manually change the radio station.
. From the AM or FM menu, press
Favorite List
AM or FM station list on the
screen.
Connect the auxiliary device to the . Press Q or R to scroll through
AUX input terminal. Play will begin
when the system has finished the list. Press on the station to
reading the information on the select it.
device. Category List
If the storage device is already . From the FM menu, press FM
connected, press D, audio, Source category list on the screen.
R, select AUX from the drop . From the AM or FM menu, press . Press Q or R to scroll through
down menu.
favorite list on the screen. the list. Press on the station to
select it.
Update Station List Storing Stations Satellite Radio

To store the station to a position in Vehicles with a SiriusXM® Satellite
the list, press the corresponding Radio tuner and a valid SiriusXM
button 1−5 until a beep is heard. Satellite subscription can receive
1. Select the desired station. SiriusXM programming.
2. Press S or T to select the SiriusXM Satellite Radio
desired page of saved favorites. Service
SiriusXM is a satellite radio service
based in the 48 contiguous United
. From the AM or FM menu, press States and 10 Canadian provinces.
update AM or FM station list on SiriusXM Satellite Radio has a wide
the screen. The broadcasting list variety of programming and
updating will begin. commercial-free music, coast to
. During the AM or FM coast, and in digital-quality sound.
broadcasting list update, press A service fee is required to receive
Cancel to stop the updates. the SiriusXM service. For more
information, contact SiriusXM at
Storing a Station as a Favorite 3. Hold down any of the preset www.siriusxm.com or
buttons to save the current radio 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.),
Stations from all bands can be station to that button of the and www.xmradio.ca or
stored in any order in the favorite selected favorites page. 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
pages.
To change a preset button, tune to
Up to five stations can be stored in the new desired radio station and
each of the seven favorites pages. hold the button.
Listening to SiriusXM Radio Press and hold q Channel r to 2. Press the preset button to listen
jump four channels backward or to the channel saved to that
1. Press D. forward in the same category, then button.
2. Press audio. release the button at the desired Using the SiriusXM Menu
channel.
3. Press Source R. Operation
4. From the drop-down menu,
Using the Preset Buttons
1. Press MENU on the XM radio
press XM and the most recent screen.
listened to SiriusXM channel will
display.
Press 4 to return to the
HOME menu.
Selecting a Category
Continue pressing q Category r
and the previous or next category
will be selected. Up to seven favorites pages can be
saved, and each page can store up
Selecting a Channel to five channels. 2. Press the menu to select the
desired item or to display the
Press q Channel r and the To change a preset button, tune to detail menu item.
previous or next channel will be the new desired channel and hold
selected within the same category. the button. 3. Press 4 to return to the
previous menu.
Listening to Preset Channels
1. Continue pressing S or T to
select the desired
favorites page.
Favorite List Direct Access Radio Reception

1. Press favorite list from the XM 1. Press direct access from the XM Frequency interference and static
menu. The favorite list menu. The direct access screen can occur during normal radio
information is displayed. is displayed. reception if items such as mobile
2. Press Q or R to find the desired 2. Press the channel number to phone chargers, vehicle
station. Tune to the station by tune to the desired channel. convenience accessories, and
selecting it. external electronic devices are
3. Press OK. plugged into the accessory power
Channel List Tone Settings outlet. If there is interference or
1. Press XM channel list from the static, unplug the item from the
From the tone settings menu, the
XM menu. The channel list is accessory power outlet.
sound features can be set up for
displayed. SiriusXM audio and each audio FM
player’s functions.
2. Press Q or R to find the desired FM signals only reach about 16 to
channel. Tune to the channel by 1. Press the tone settings from the 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the
selecting it. XM menu. The tone settings radio has a built-in electronic circuit
screen is displayed. See “Tone that automatically works to reduce
Category List Settings” under Operation on interference, some static can occur,
1. Press XM category list from the page 7‑8. especially around tall buildings or
XM menu. The category list is 2. Press OK. hills, causing the sound to fade in
displayed. and out.
2. Press Q or R to find the desired
category. Tune to the category
by selecting it.
AM Cellular Phone Usage Audio Players

The range for most AM stations is Cellular phone usage can cause
greater than for FM, especially at interference with the vehicle's radio. CD Player
night. The longer range can cause
The vehicle may have a CD player.
station frequencies to interfere with Fixed Mast Antenna
each other. Static can occur when The CD player can play audio CDs
things like storms and power lines The AM-FM antenna is located on and MP3 CDs.
interfere with radio reception. When the roof of the vehicle.
The CD player will not play
this happens, try reducing the treble Driving through an automatic car 8 cm (3 in) CDs.
on the radio. wash without removing the antenna
could damage it. Care of CDs
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
Service To remove the antenna, turn it Sound quality can be reduced due
counterclockwise. To replace the to disc quality, recording method,
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service antenna, turn it clockwise until hand quality of the music recorded, and
gives digital radio reception from tightened. how the disc has been handled.
coast to coast in the 48 contiguous Handle discs carefully and store
United States, and in Canada. Just Multi-Band Antenna them in their original cases or other
as with FM, tall buildings or hills can protective cases away from direct
interfere with satellite radio signals, The multi-band antenna is on the sunlight and dust. If the bottom
causing the sound to fade in and roof of the vehicle. The antenna is surface of a disc is damaged, the
out. In addition, traveling or standing used for the AM-FM radio, OnStar, disc may not play properly or at all.
under heavy foliage, bridges, the SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service Do not touch the bottom surface of
garages, or tunnels may cause System, and GPS (Global a disc while handling it; this could
loss of the SiriusXM signal for a Positioning System), if the vehicle damage the surface. Pick up discs
period of time. has these features. Keep the by grasping the outer edges or the
antenna clear of obstructions for edge of the hole and the outer edge.
clear reception.
If the bottom surface of a disc is good condition without any label, Inserting a CD
dirty, take a soft, lint-free cloth, load one CD at a time, and keep
With the printed side facing up,
or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a the CD player and the loading slot
insert a disc into the CD slot until it
mild neutral detergent solution free of foreign materials, liquids,
is drawn in.
mixed with water, and clean it. and debris.
Wipe the disc from the center to the Removing a CD
outer edge. Control Buttons
The buttons used to control the CD Press Z.
Care of the CD Player
player are: The disc is pushed out of the
Do not add a label to a disc, as it CD slot.
AUX or CD/AUX: Press to use the
could get caught in the CD player.
CD player. If the disc is not removed after it is
If a label is needed, label the top of
the recorded disc with a SEEK ¨ or © SEEK: Press to ejected, it is pulled back in after a
marking pen. few seconds.
select tracks or to fast forward or
Do not use disc lens cleaners rewind within a track. Playing a CD or MP3 CD
because they could contaminate the INFO: Press to display additional Press the AUX or CD/AUX button.
lens of the disc optics and damage information about the current track If there is a disc in the player, it
the CD player. that may be available. begins playing.
Notice: If a label is added to a MENU/TUNE: Turn to select tracks. Information about the disc and
CD, more than one CD is inserted Turn to enter the menu. Press to current track is shown on the
into the slot at a time, or an select the menu. display depending on the data
attempt is made to play scratched
Z (Eject): Press to eject the disc. stored.
or damaged CDs, the CD player
could be damaged. While using
the CD player, use only CDs in
Selecting a CD Track Selecting an MP3 Track

. Song Titles
Using the control buttons: Using the control buttons:
. Genres
. Folder View
. Press SEEK ¨ or © SEEK to . Press SEEK ¨ or © SEEK to
select the next or previous track. select the next or previous track. To search for tracks:
. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob. . Turn the MENU/TUNE knob. 1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob.
Using the CD Menu: Using the CD Menu: 2. Select Search.
1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob. 1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob. 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Genres,
2. Select Tracks List. 2. Select Playlists/Folders.
or Folder View.
3. Select the track. 3. Select the playlist or folder.
4. Select the track.
Playing Tracks in Random Order 4. Select the track.
Turn the MENU/TUNE knob and set Searching for MP3 Tracks USB Port
Shuffle Songs to On. The search feature may take some The USB Port, if equipped, is in the
Fast Forward and Rewind time to display the information after storage area to the right of the
reading the disc due to the amount infotainment system. See Overview
Press and hold SEEK ¨ or © SEEK of information stored on the disc. (Radio with Touchscreen) on
to fast forward or rewind within the FM automatically plays while the page 7‑7 or Overview (AM-FM
current track. disc is being read. Radio) on page 7‑3 or Overview
(Radio with CD/USB) on page 7‑5.
Tracks can be searched by:
Portable devices are controlled by
. Playlists using the menu system described in
. Artists Operation on page 7‑8.
. Albums
Not all iPods, PFDs, USB Drives, 2. Select Search.

and Zunes are compatible with the 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
infotainment system. Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres,
Connecting and Controlling Audiobooks, or Composers.
an iPod® 4. Select the track.
Not all iPods can be controlled by Shuffle
the infotainment system.
Turn the MENU/TUNE knob and set
Connecting an iPod Shuffle Songs (Random) to On or
Connect the iPod to the USB port. Off, then press the / BACK button
to return to the main screen.
Searching for a Track
1. 3.5 mm (1/8 in) Auxiliary Input On: Plays tracks in the current
Jack. See Auxiliary Devices on Tracks can be searched for by: folder in random order.
page 7‑24. . Playlists Off: Plays tracks in the current
2. USB Port. . Artists folder in sequential order.
Radio Without Touchscreen . Albums Repeat
For vehicles with a USB port, the . Song Titles Turn the MENU/TUNE knob and set
following devices may be connected Repeat to On or Off, then press the
. Podcasts
and controlled by the infotainment / BACK button to return to the main
system: . Genres screen.
. iPods . Audiobooks On: Repeats the current track.
. PlaysForSure Devices (PFDs) . Composers Off: Playback starts from the
. USB Drives To search for tracks: beginning of the current track after
the last track finishes.
. Zunes™ 1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob.
Connecting and Controlling a Shuffle Functionality When a device is not supported, the
PlaysForSure Device (PFD) Turn the MENU/TUNE knob and set message “No supported data found.
or Zune™ Shuffle Songs (Random) to On You can safely disconnect the
or Off. device” appears.
Connecting a PFD or Zune
On: Plays current tracks in random Connecting a USB Drive
Connect the PFD or Zune to the
USB port. order. Connect the USB drive to the
Off: Plays current tracks in USB port.
Searching for a Track sequential order. Searching for a Track
Tracks can be searched for by:
Repeat Functionality It is normal for the search feature to
. Playlists take some time to display the
. Artists Repeat to On or Off. information after reading the device
due to the amount of information
. Albums Repeat On: Repeats the current stored.
. Song Titles track.
Files that do not have any meta
. Podcasts Repeat Off: Playback starts from data stored in the ID3 tag display as
the beginning of the current track Unknown.
. Genres after the last track finishes.
To search for tracks: Tracks can be searched for by:
Connecting and Controlling a . Playlists*
1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob. USB Drive
2. Select Search.
. Artists
The infotainment system can only
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, play back .mp3 and .wma files from . Albums
Song Titles, Podcasts, a USB drive. . Song Titles
or Genres. Only the first 2,500 songs are
4. Select the track. recognized on the device.

. Genres Repeat On: Repeats the current updated using the latest iTunes®
. Folder View track. application. See www.apple.com/
Repeat Off: Playback starts from itunes.
*This only displays if a playlist is
found on the device. the beginning of the current track For help with identifying your iPod,
after the last track finishes. go to www.apple.com/support.
To search for tracks:
Radio With Touchscreen The USB port can play both lower
1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob. and upper case .mp3, .wma, .ogg,
2. Select Search. The infotainment system can play and .wav files stored on a USB
music or movies by connecting an storage device.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, auxiliary device to the USB port,
Song Titles, Genres, if equipped. USB Supported File and Folder
or Folder View. Structure
USB Support
4. Select the track. The Infotainment system supports:
USB Supported Devices
Shuffle Functionality . Up to 2,500 folders.
. USB Flash Drives .
Turn the MENU/TUNE knob and set Up to 10 folders in depth.
Shuffle Songs (Random) to On
. Portable USB Hard Drives . Up to 2,500 music files.
or Off. . 2G-5G iPod nano® . Up to 2,500 photo files.
On: Plays current tracks in random . 1G-3G iPod touch®
order. . Up to 250 movie files.
. 120GB/160GB iPod classic® .
Off: Plays current tracks in ID3 Tag (versions 1.0/1.1/2.2/
sequential order.
. 3G/3GS/4/4S iPhone® 2.3/2.4).
Not all iPods and USB drives are . FAT16.
Repeat Functionality
compatible with the USB port.
. FAT32.
Make sure the iPod has the latest
Repeat to On or Off. . exFAT.
firmware from Apple® for proper
operation. iPod firmware can be
Connecting a USB Storage Auxiliary Devices

Device or iPod/iPhone
The optional AUX input allows
To connect a USB storage device, portable devices to connect to the
connect the device to the USB port. vehicle using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
To connect an iPod/iPhone, connect input jack. The AUX input jack,
one end of the device’s cable to the if equipped, is in the storage area to
iPod/iPhone and the other end to the right of the infotainment system.
the USB port. A second AUX input is on the front
of the infotainment system,
The iPod/iPhone charges while it is if equipped. See Overview (Radio
connected to the vehicle if the with Touchscreen) on page 7‑7 or
vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY Overview (AM-FM Radio) on
or ON/RUN position. When the page 7‑3 or Overview (Radio with 1. 3.5 mm (1/8 in) Auxiliary
vehicle is turned off, the iPod/ CD/USB) on page 7‑5. Input Jack
iPhone automatically powers off and 2. USB Port. See USB Port on
will not charge or draw power from Portable devices are controlled by
using the menu system described in page 7‑20.
the vehicle's battery.
Operation on page 7‑8. Radio Without Touchscreen
For more information on USB
usage, see “Audio System” in Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
Pictures and Movies (Audio System) the auxiliary input jack to use a
on page 7‑52 or Pictures and portable audio player.
Movies (Picture System) on Playback of an audio device that is
page 7‑57 or Pictures and Movies connected to the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
(Movie System) on page 7‑59. jack can only be controlled using
the controls on the device.
Adjusting the Volume To play the music from the device, For iPod/iPhone, connect the iPod/
if the device is already connected: iPhone to the AUX input terminal by
Turn the O /VOL knob to adjust the using the AUX cable for iPod/
volume of the infotainment system 1. Press D. iPhone to play movie files.
after the volume level has been set 2. Press audio.
on the portable audio device. Using the AUX Movie Menu
Radio With Touchscreen

3. Press Source R.
4. Press AUX/USB.
The infotainment system can play
music or movies connected by the To adjust the tone settings, see
auxiliary device. “Tone Settings” under “Radio
Controls with Touchscreen” in
Play will begin when the system has
finished reading the information on
the device. Playing Movies
Playing Music Movies are not available while
driving. 1. Press MENU from the AUX
movie screen. The AUX menu is
If the USB storage device is already
displayed.
connected:
2. Press the desired menu.
1. Press D. . tone settings: Adjust the
2. Press picture and movie. sound setup. See “Tone
Settings” under “Radio
3. Press Source R. Controls with Touchscreen”
4. Press USB (Movie). in Operation on page 7‑8.

. clock/temp display: To 2. Once paired, press CD/AUX to
display the clock and select Bluetooth Audio.
Navigation
temperature on the full
screen, select On or Off. 3. Press the play button on the OnStar® System
device to begin playback.
. display settings: Adjust the If equipped, this vehicle has a
brightness and contrast of When selecting Bluetooth audio, the comprehensive, in-vehicle system
the screen. radio may not be able to launch the that can connect to a live Advisor
audio player on the connected for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
3. Press 4. device to start playing. When the Connection, and Diagnostic
vehicle is not moving, choose the Services.
Bluetooth Audio phone to begin playback.
For safety, some features are
All devices launch audio differently. disabled while the vehicle is in
Streaming Audio
When selecting Bluetooth audio as motion.
If equipped, music may be played a source, the radio may show as
from a paired Bluetooth. See paused on the screen. Press play Control Panel Overview
Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑28 on the device to begin playback. OnStar Light
or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)
Some phones support sending The OnStar system status light is
on page 7‑30 or Bluetooth (Voice
Bluetooth music information to next to the OnStar buttons. If the
Recognition) on page 7‑39 for help
display on the radio. When the radio status light is:
pairing a device.
receives this information, it will
The music can be controlled by check to see if any album art is
. Solid Green: System is ready.
controls on the device. available and display it. For more . Flashing Green: On a call.
To play music via Bluetooth: information about your phone and
supported Bluetooth features, see
. Red: Indicates a problem.
1. Power on the device, pair, and www.gm.com/bluetooth.
connect the device. The device
will displayed “GM Audio
Source.”
OnStar Buttons Hands-Free Calling ‐ Press update route to update

X: the route, then press Yes.
Press to speak to an Advisor. Press X to make a call, end a call, Press Cancel route to cancel it
. Make a call, end a call, and answer an incoming call. or No to not update the route.
or answer an incoming call.
Press X to give OnStar Hands-Free ‐ Press cancel route to cancel
. Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling Calling voice commands. the route, then press Yes.
voice commands. The navigation settings menu
Press X to give OnStar disappears and the
. Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn
Turn-by-Turn Navigation voice Turn-by-Turn Navigation voice
Navigation voice commands.
commands for automated directions. guidance is shut down.
Requires the available Directions
and Connections service plan. . Press 1 to hide the ‐ Press my destination to
Q : Press to connect to an Turn-by-Turn Navigation screen. check the destination.
Advisor. When the route is changed, the The destination name and
Turn-by-Turn Navigation screen remaining distance to
. Verify account information or is displayed. The Turn-by-Turn destination are displayed on
update contact information. Navigation screen is only the screen for about
. Get driving directions. Requires displayed on the AM/FM/XM five seconds. Then the current
the available Directions and radio mode and AUX/USB/ Turn-by-Turn Navigation
Connections service plan. iPod mode. information is displayed.
. Receive On-Demand . Press $ to mute the
Diagnostics for a check on the Turn-by-Turn Navigation voice
vehicle’s key operating systems. guidance.
. Receive Roadside Assistance. . Press q to move to the
]: Press to connect to an navigation settings menu.
Emergency Advisor.
‐ Press route preview to preview Emergency Phone

the route. The distance With Automatic Crash Response,
information among turns from
current position to destination
the built-in system can automatically Bluetooth (Overview)
connect to help in a crash even if
can be checked. Check the you cannot ask for it. For vehicles equipped with
distance information by Bluetooth capability, the system can
pressing Q or R. If there is no Press ] to connect to an interact with many cell phones,
operation for about Emergency Advisor. GPS allowing:
five seconds, the current technology is used to identify the . Placement and receipt of calls in
Turn-by-Turn Navigation vehicle location and can provide a hands-free mode.
information is displayed. critical information to emergency
personnel. The Advisor is also . Sharing of the cell phone’s
‐ Press repeat to repeat the trained to offer critical assistance in address book or contact list with
Turn-by-Turn Navigation voice emergency situations. the vehicle.
guidance.
OnStar SMS To minimize driver distraction,
‐ While the route is calculating, before driving, and with the vehicle
the Cancel route menu is only When the Short Message Service parked:
activated. (SMS) is received by the vehicle, a
pop-up screen with the message is
. Become familiar with the
Blue OnStar displayed. features of the cell phone.
Organize the phone book and
Press Q to be connected to a OnStar Welcome contact lists clearly and delete
specially trained OnStar Advisor duplicate or rarely used entries.
who can verify account information When the user joins and operates
the OnStar service for the first time, If possible, program speed dial
and answer questions about the or other shortcuts.
system. the pop-up screen “Get OnStar
started now please push the blue . Review the controls and
button” is displayed. operation of the infotainment
system.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
The system may not work with
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system $ / i (Mute/End Call): Press to
can use a Bluetooth-capable cell end a call, reject a call, or cancel an
all cell phones. See “Pairing” in phone with a Hands-Free Profile to operation.
this section. make and receive phone calls.
. If the cell phone has voice The infotainment system and voice Infotainment System Controls
dialing capability, learn to use recognition are used to control the If equipped, the infotainment system
that feature to access the system. The system can be used allows certain controls to be
address book or contact list. while in ON/RUN or ACC/ selected on the infotainment display.
See “Voice Pass-Thru” in this ACCESSORY. The range of the
Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m For information about how to
section. navigate the menu system using the
(30 ft). Not all phones support all
. See “Storing and Deleting Phone functions and not all phones work infotainment controls, see Operation
Numbers” in this section. with the Bluetooth system. See on page 7‑8.
www.gm.com/bluetooth for more 5 / > (Phone): Press to enter the
{ WARNING information about compatible Phone main menu.
phones.
When using a cell phone, it can Voice Recognition
be distracting to look too long or Bluetooth Controls
The voice recognition system uses
too often at the screen of the Use the buttons located on the commands to control the system
phone or the infotainment infotainment system and the and dial phone numbers.
(navigation) system. Taking your steering wheel to operate the
eyes off the road too long or too Noise: The system may not
Bluetooth system.
often could cause a crash recognize voice commands if there
Steering Wheel Controls is too much background noise. Do
resulting in injury or death. Focus
not point the center air vents directly
your attention on driving. b / g (Push to Talk): Press to upward.
answer incoming calls, confirm
system information, and start voice
recognition.
When to Speak: A tone sounds to See Radio Frequency Statement Pairing Information
indicate that the system is ready for (Canada) on page 13‑18 for . A Bluetooth phone with MP3
a voice command. Wait for the tone information regarding Part 15 of the capability can be paired
and then speak. Federal Communications separately to the vehicle as a
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a Commission (FCC) rules and phone and an MP3 player at the
calm and natural voice. Industry Canada Standards same time. This requires the
RSS-GEN/210/220/310. device to be paired two times;
Audio System once as a “hands-free” device
When using the Bluetooth system, Bluetooth (Infotainment and once as an MP3 device.
sound comes through the vehicle's Controls) . Up to five cell phones can be
front audio system speakers and For information about how to paired to the Bluetooth system.
overrides the audio system. Use the navigate the menu system using the
O /VOL knob during a call to . The pairing process is disabled
infotainment controls, see Operation when the vehicle is moving.
change the volume level. The on page 7‑8.
adjusted volume level remains in . Pairing only needs to be
memory for later calls. The system Pairing Without Touchscreen completed once, unless the
maintains a minimum volume level. pairing information on the cell
A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
must be paired to the Bluetooth phone changes or the cell phone
Other Information
system and then connected to the is deleted from the system.
The Bluetooth® word mark and vehicle before it can be used. See . Only one paired cell phone can
logos are owned by the Bluetooth® your cell phone manufacturer's user be connected to the Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks guide for Bluetooth functions before system at a time.
by General Motors is under license. pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth
Other trademarks and trade names phone is not connected, calls will be
are those of their respective owners. made using OnStar Hands-Free
Calling, if available. See OnStar
Overview on page 14‑1.

. If multiple paired cell phones are 6. Locate the device named “Your Deleting a Paired Phone
within range of the system, the Vehicle” in the list on the cell
system connects to the first 1. Press the CONFIG button.
phone. Follow the instructions
available paired cell phone in the on the cell phone to enter the 2. Select Phone Settings or
order that they were first paired PIN provided in Step 4. After the Bluetooth Settings.
to the system. To link to a PIN is successfully entered, the 3. Select Bluetooth.
different paired phone, see system prompts you to provide a
“Linking to a Different Phone” name for the paired cell phone. 4. Select Device List.
later in this section. This name will be used to 5. Select the phone to delete and
Pairing a Phone as a Hands-Free indicate which phones are follow the on-screen prompts.
Device paired and connected to the
vehicle. The system responds Linking to a Different Phone
1. Press the CONFIG button. with “<Phone name> has been To link to a different phone, the new
2. Select Phone Settings or successfully paired” after the phone must be in the vehicle and
Bluetooth Settings. pairing process is complete. available to be connected to the
7. Repeat Steps 1−6 to pair Bluetooth system before the
3. Select Bluetooth.
additional phones. process is started.
4. Select Pair Device
Listing All Paired and Connected 1. Press the CONFIG button.
(Hands-Free). A four-digit
Personal Identification Number Phones 2. Select Phone Settings or
(PIN) appears on the display. 1. Press the CONFIG button. Bluetooth Settings.
The PIN is used is Step 6. 3. Select Bluetooth.
2. Select Phone Settings or
5. Start the pairing process on the Bluetooth Settings. 4. Select Device List.
cell phone to be paired to the
vehicle. See the cell phone 3. Select Bluetooth.
manufacturer's user guide for 4. Select Device List.
information on this process.
5. Select the new phone to link to The Call Lists menu allows you to 3. Select the Incoming Calls,
and follow the on-screen access the phone numbers from the Outgoing Calls, or Missed
prompts. Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, and Calls list.
If delete is selected, the Missed Calls menus on your cell 4. Select the name or number you
highlighted phone will be phone to make a call. want to call.
deleted. To make a call using the Phone
Book menu: Making a Call
Making a Call Using To make a call:
Phone Book 1. Press 5 / > once or twice
For cell phones that support the
(depending on the radio). 1. Press 5 / > once or twice
phone book feature, the Bluetooth 2. Select Phone Book. (depending on the radio).
system can use the contacts stored 3. Search through the list by 2. Enter the character sequence.
on your cell phone to make calls. selecting the letter group the See “Entering a Character
See your cell phone's owner's guide phone book entry begins with, Sequence” in Operation on
or contact your wireless provider to or press the MENU/TUNE button page 7‑8.
find out if this feature is supported to scroll through the entire list of 3. Select Call to start dialing the
by your phone. names/numbers in the number.
When a cell phone supports the phone book.
phone book feature, the Phone Accepting or Declining a Call
4. Select the name or number you
Book and Call Lists menus are want to call. When an incoming call is received,
automatically available. the infotainment system mutes and
To make a call using the Call a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
The Phone Book menu allows you Lists menu:
to access the phone book stored in Accepting a Call
the cell phone to make a call. 1. Press 5 / > once or twice
(depending on the radio). Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to
“Answer” and press the MENU/
2. Select Call Lists. TUNE knob to accept the call.
Declining a Call Conference Calling Ending a Call

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to Conference calling and three-way Turn or press the MENU/TUNE
“Decline” and press the MENU/ calling must be supported on the knob and select Hang Up.
TUNE knob to decline the call. Bluetooth phone and enabled by the
wireless service carrier to work. Muting a Call
Call Waiting
To start a conference while in a To Mute a Call
Call waiting must be supported on current call:
the Bluetooth phone and enabled by Turn or press the MENU/TUNE
the wireless service carrier to work. 1. Turn or press the MENU/ knob and select Mute Call.
TUNE knob. To Cancel Mute
Accepting a Call
2. Select Enter Number. Turn or press the MENU/TUNE
Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to
“Answer” and press the MENU/ 3. Enter the character sequence knob and select Mute Call.
TUNE knob to accept the call. then select Call. See “Entering a
Character Sequence” in Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
Declining a Call Operation on page 7‑8. (DTMF) Tones
Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to 4. After the call has been placed, The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can
“Decline” and press the MENU/ turn or press the MENU/TUNE send numbers during a call. This is
TUNE knob to decline the call. knob and choose Merge Calls. used when calling a menu-driven
phone system.
Switching Between Calls 5. To add more callers to the
(Call Waiting Calls Only) conference call, repeat Steps 1 1. Turn or press the MENU/TUNE
−4. The number of callers that knob and select Enter Number.
To switch between calls:
can be added is limited by your 2. Enter the character sequence.
1. Turn or press the MENU/ wireless service carrier. See “Entering a Character
TUNE knob. Sequence” in Operation on
2. Select Switch Call from page 7‑8.
the menu.
Pairing With Touchscreen

. Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the Bluetooth
A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone system at a time.
must be paired to the Bluetooth
system and then connected to the
. If multiple paired cell phones are
vehicle before it can be used. See within range of the system, the
your cell phone manufacturer's user system connects to the first
guide for Bluetooth functions before available paired cell phone in the
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth order that they were first paired
phone is not connected, calls will be to the system. To link to a
made using OnStar Hands-Free different paired phone, see 2. Press telephone, then
Calling, if available. See OnStar® “Linking to a Different Phone” press Yes.
System on page 7‑26. later in this section. 3. Press Search Bluetooth Device.
When the Bluetooth device and 4. Press the desired device to pair
Pairing Information
infotainment system are on the searched list screen.
. A Bluetooth phone with MP3 successfully paired, the phone book
capability cannot be paired to is downloaded automatically. 5. Press Yes on the pop-up screen
the vehicle as a phone and an However, the phone book may not of the Bluetooth device and
MP3 player at the same time. be downloaded automatically infotainment system.
. Up to five cell phones can be according to the type of the phone. 6. When the Bluetooth device and
paired to the Bluetooth system. In this case, proceed with the infotainment system are
phonebook download on phone. successfully paired, the
. The pairing process is disabled
Pairing a Phone telephone screen is displayed on
when the vehicle is moving.
When there is no paired device on the infotainment system.
. Pairing only needs to be
the infotainment system and the
completed once, unless the
Simple Secure Pairing (SSP) is
pairing information on the cell
supported:
phone changes or the cell phone
is deleted from the system. 1. Press D.
Pairing a Phone 9. When the Bluetooth device and

When a paired device is on the infotainment system are
infotainment system and the SSP is successfully paired, the 5 7
supported: is displayed on the "pair device"
screen.
1. Press D. . The connected phone is
highlighted by 5.
. The 5 7 indicates the
2. Press telephone, then
hands-free and phone music press Yes.
function are enabled.
3. Press Search Bluetooth Device.
. The 7 indicates only
hands-free function is enabled. 4. Press the desired device to pair
on the searched list screen.
. The 5 indicates only Bluetooth 5. Input the PIN code (default:
2. Press settings. music is enabled. 1234) to the Bluetooth device.
3. Press connection settings. Pairing a Phone When the Bluetooth device and
infotainment system are
4. Press bluetooth settings. When there is no paired device on successfully paired, the
5. Press pair device. the infotainment system and the telephone screen is displayed on
SSP is not supported: the infotainment system.
6. Press Search Bluetooth Device.
1. Press D. When the connection fails, a failure
7. Press the desired device to pair message is displayed on the
on the searched list screen. infotainment system.
8. Press Yes on the pop-up screen
of the Bluetooth device and
infotainment system.
If a Bluetooth device was previously 4. Press bluetooth settings. Connecting a Bluetooth Device
connected, the infotainment system
executes the auto connection.
5. Press pair device. 1. Press D.
However, if the Bluetooth setting on 6. Press Search Bluetooth Device. 2. Select settings.
the Bluetooth device is turned off, a 7. Press the desired device to pair
failure message is displayed on the 3. Press connection settings.
on the searched list screen.
infotainment system. 4. Press bluetooth settings.
8. Input the PIN code (default:
Pairing a Phone 1234) to the Bluetooth device. 5. Press pair device.
When a paired device is on the When the Bluetooth device and 6. Press the device to be paired.
infotainment system and the SSP is infotainment system are
7. Press OK.
not supported: successfully paired, 5 7 is
displayed on the pair device Checking the Bluetooth
1. Press D. screen. Connection
. The connected phone is 1. Press D.
highlighted by 5. 2. Select settings.
. The 5 7 indicates the 3. Press connection settings.
hands-free and phone music 4. Press bluetooth settings.
function are enabled.
5. Press pair device.
. The 7 indicates only
6. The paired device will show
hands-free function is enabled.
with 5 7 when connected.
2. Press settings. . The 5 indicates only Bluetooth
3. Press connection settings. music is enabled.
Disconnecting the Bluetooth Bluetooth Music

. If the Bluetooth device is
Device disconnected while playing
Before playing Bluetooth music, phone music, the music is
1. Press D. read the follow information. discontinued. The audio
2. Select settings.
. A cell phone or Bluetooth device streaming function may not be
that supports Advanced Audio supported in some Bluetooth
3. Press connection settings. Distribution Profile (A2DP) phones. Only one function can
4. Press bluetooth settings. versions over 1.2 must be be used at a time between the
registered and connected to the Bluetooth hands-free or Phone
5. Press pair device. product. music function. For example,
6. Press the name of the device to if you convert to the Bluetooth
. From the cell phone or Bluetooth
be disconnected. hands-free while playing Phone
device, find the Bluetooth device
music, the music is
7. Press OK. type to set/connect the item as a
discontinued. Playing music from
stereo headset.
Deleting a Paired Phone the car is not possible when
1. Press D.
. 5 will appear on the screen if there are no music files stored in
the stereo headset is the cell phone.
2. Select settings. successfully connected. . For Bluetooth music to play, the
3. Press connection settings. . The sound played by the music must be played at least
Bluetooth device is delivered once from the music player
4. Press bluetooth settings. mode of the cell phone or
through the infotainment system.
5. Press pair device. Bluetooth device after
. Bluetooth music can be played connecting as a stereo headset.
6. Press Delete. only when a Bluetooth device After being played at least once,
7. Press Yes. has been connected. To play the music player will
Bluetooth music, connect the automatically play upon entering
Bluetooth phone to the play mode, and it will
infotainment system. automatically stop when the
music player mode ends. If the Pause Playing a File Randomly

cell phone or Bluetooth device is
not in the waiting screen mode, Press r j to pause. Press u during playback.
some devices may not Press r j again to resume.
. NO: Plays all files repeatedly.
automatically play in Bluetooth
music play mode. Skipping the Previous or Next File
. OFF: Returns to normal
playback.
Playing Bluetooth Music Press g or l to select the This function may not be supported
previous or next file.
1. Press D. depending on the cell phone.
Search Do not change the track too quickly
when playing Bluetooth music.
Press and hold g or l to fast
forward or rewind. Conditions that may occur when
playing Bluetooth music:
Playing a File Repeatedly
. It takes some time to transmit
Press v during playback. data from the cell phone to the
. infotainment system.
1: Plays the current file
repeatedly. . If the cell phone or Bluetooth
. ALL: Plays all files repeatedly. device is not in the waiting
2. Press audio. screen mode, it may not
. OFF: Returns to normal automatically play despite being
3. Press source R. playback. carried out from the Bluetooth
4. Press Bluetooth, then select the This function may not be supported music play mode.
connected Bluetooth music depending on the cell phone. . The infotainment system
play mode.
transmits the order to play from
the cell phone in the Bluetooth
music play mode. If this is done
in a different mode, then the For additional information, say

. Pairing only needs to be
device transmits the order to "Help" while you are in a voice completed once, unless the
stop. Depending on the cell recognition menu. pairing information on the cell
phone’s options, this order to phone changes or the cell phone
play/stop may take time to Pairing is deleted from the system.
activate. A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone . Only one paired cell phone can
. If the Bluetooth music playback must be paired to the Bluetooth be connected to the Bluetooth
is not functioning, then check to system and then connected to the system at a time.
see if the cell phone is in the vehicle before it can be used. See . If multiple paired cell phones are
waiting screen mode. your cell phone manufacturer's user
within range of the system, the
guide for Bluetooth functions before
. Sounds may be cut off during system connects to the first
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth
the Bluetooth music playback. available paired cell phone in the
phone is not connected, calls will be
order that they were first paired
. The infotainment system outputs made using OnStar Hands-Free
to the system. To link to a
the audio from the cell phone or Calling, if available. See OnStar
different paired phone, see
Bluetooth device as it is Overview on page 14‑1.
“Connecting to a Different
transmitted. Pairing Information Phone” later in this section.
Bluetooth (Voice . A Bluetooth phone with MP3 Pairing a Phone
capability can be paired to the
Recognition) vehicle as a phone and an MP3 1. Press b / g. The system
player at the same time. responds “Ready,” followed by
Using Voice Recognition a tone.
To use voice recognition, press the
. Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the Bluetooth system. 2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command
b / g button located on the steering can be skipped.
wheel. Use the commands below for . The pairing process is disabled
the various voice features. when the vehicle is moving.
3. Say “Pair.” The system responds Listing All Paired and Connected Connecting to a Different Phone
with instructions and a four-digit Phones To connect to a different cell phone,
Personal Identification Number The system can list all cell phones the Bluetooth system looks for the
(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5. paired to it. If a paired cell phone is next available cell phone in the
4. Start the pairing process on the also connected to the vehicle, the order in which all available cell
cell phone that you want to pair. system responds with “is connected” phones were paired. Depending on
For help with this process, see after that phone name. which cell phone you want to
your cell phone manufacturer's connect to, you may have to use
user guide. 1. Press b / g. The system this command several times.
responds “Ready,” followed by
5. Locate the device named “Your a tone. 1. Press b / g. The system
Vehicle” in the list on the cell responds “Ready,” followed by
phone. Follow the instructions 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
a tone.
on the cell phone to enter the 3. Say “List.”
PIN provided in Step 3. After the 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
PIN is successfully entered, the Deleting a Paired Phone 3. Say “Change phone.”
system prompts you to provide a If the phone name you want to
name for the paired cell phone.
. If another cell phone is
delete is unknown, see “Listing All found, the response will be
This name will be used to Paired and Connected Phones.”
indicate which phones are “<Phone name> is now
paired and connected to the 1. Press b / g. The system connected.”
vehicle. The system responds responds “Ready,” followed by . If another cell phone is not
with “<Phone name> has been a tone. found, the original phone
successfully paired” after the 2. Say “Bluetooth.” remains connected.
pairing process is complete.
3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
6. Repeat Steps 1−5 to pair for which phone to delete.
additional phones.
4. Say the name of the phone you
want to delete.
Storing and Deleting Phone Using the “Store” Command 3. Say each digit, one at a time,
Numbers that you want to store. After
1. Press b / g. The system each digit is entered, the system
The system can store up to responds “Ready,” followed by repeats back the digit it heard
30 phone numbers as name tags in a tone. followed by a tone. After the last
the Hands-Free Directory that is digit has been entered, say
2. Say “Store.”
shared between the Bluetooth and “Store,” and then follow the
OnStar systems. 3. Say the phone number or group directions given by the system to
of numbers you want to store all save a name tag for this number.
The following commands are used
at once with no pauses, then
to delete and store phone numbers.
follow the directions given by the Using the “Delete” Command
Store: This command will store a system to save a name tag for
phone number, or a group of this number. 1. Press b / g. The system
numbers as a name tag. responds “Ready,” followed by
Using the “Digit Store” Command a tone.
Digit Store: This command allows
a phone number to be stored as a If an unwanted number is 2. Say “Delete.”
name tag by entering the digits one recognized by the system, say
“Clear” at any time to clear the last 3. Say the name tag you want to
at a time. delete.
number.
Delete: This command is used to Using the “Delete All Name Tags”
delete individual name tags. To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system, say Command
Delete All Name Tags: This “Verify” at any time. This command deletes all stored
command deletes all stored name name tags in the Hands-Free
tags in the Hands-Free Calling 1. Press b / g. The system
Calling Directory and the
Directory and the Destinations responds “Ready,” followed by Destinations Directory.
Directory. a tone.
2. Say “Digit Store.”
To delete all name tags: Digit Dial: This command allows a 4. Say “Dial” or “Call”.”
phone number to be dialed by
1. Press b / g. The system entering the digits one at a time. Using the “Digit Dial” Command
responds “Ready,” followed by The digit dial command allows a
a tone. Re-dial: This command is used to
dial the last number used on the cell phone number to be dialed by
2. Say “Delete all name tags.” phone. entering the digits one at a time.
After each digit is entered, the
Listing Stored Numbers Using the “Dial” or “Call” system repeats back the digit it
The list command will list all stored Command heard followed by a tone.
numbers and name tags. 1. Press b / g. The system If an unwanted number is
Using the “List” Command responds “Ready,” followed by recognized by the system, say
a tone. “Clear” at any time to clear the last
1. Press b / g. The system number.
responds “Ready,” followed by 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
To hear all of the numbers
a tone. 3. Say the entire number without recognized by the system, say
2. Say “Directory.” pausing or say the name tag. “Verify” at any time.
Once connected, the person called
3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.” 1. Press b / g. The system
will be heard through the audio
4. Say “List.” speakers. responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone.
Making a Call Calling 911 Emergency Number
2. Say “Digit Dial.”
Calls can be made using the 1. Press b / g. The system 3. Say each digit, one at a time,
following commands. responds “Ready,” followed by that you want to dial. After each
Dial or Call: The dial or call a tone. digit is entered, the system
command can be used 2. Say “Dial” or “Call”.” repeats back the digit it heard
interchangeably to dial a phone
number or a stored name tag. 3. Say “911.”
followed by a tone. After the last Call Waiting 3. Use the dial or call command to
digit has been entered, dial the number of the third party
Call waiting must be supported on
say “Dial.” to be called.
the cell phone and enabled by the
Once connected, the person called wireless service carrier. 4. Once the call is connected,
will be heard through the audio press b / g to link all callers
speakers.
. Press b / g to answer an
together.
incoming call when another call
Using the “Re-dial” Command is active. The original call is Ending a Call
1. Press b / g. The system placed on hold.
Press $ / i to end a call.
responds “Ready,” followed by . Press b / g again to return to
a tone. the original call. Muting a Call
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.” The . To ignore the incoming call, no During a call, all sounds from inside
system dials the last number action is required. the vehicle can be muted so that the
called from the connected cell person on the other end of the call
phone. . Press $ / i to disconnect the cannot hear them.
Once connected, the person called current call and switch to the call
on hold. To mute a call, press b / g , and
will be heard through the audio then say “Mute Call.”
speakers. Three-Way Calling
To cancel mute, press b / g , and
Receiving a Call Three-way calling must be then say “Un-mute Call.”
When an incoming call is received, supported on the cell phone and
the audio system mutes and a ring enabled by the wireless service
tone is heard in the vehicle. carrier.
. Press b / g to answer the call. 1. While on a call, press b / g.

2. Say “Three-way call.”
. Press $ / i to ignore a call.
Transferring a Call the audio transfer feature on the cell Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
phone. See the cell phone (DTMF) Tones
Audio can be transferred between
manufacturer's user guide.
the Bluetooth system and the cell The Bluetooth system can send
phone. Voice Pass-Thru numbers and the numbers stored as
The cell phone must be paired and name tags during a call. You can
Voice pass-thru allows access to the
connected with the Bluetooth use this feature when calling a
voice recognition commands on the
system before a call can be menu-driven phone system.
cell phone. See the cell phone
transferred. The connection process Account numbers can also be
manufacturer's user guide to see if
can take up to two minutes after the stored for use.
the cell phone supports this feature.
ignition is turned to ON/RUN. Sending a Number or Name Tag
To access contacts stored in the cell
To Transfer Audio from the phone: During a Call
Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone 1. Press b / g. The system
1. Press b / g. The system
During a call with the audio in the responds “Ready,” followed by responds “Ready,” followed by
vehicle: a tone. a tone.
1. Press b / g. 2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command 2. Say “Dial.”
2. Say “Transfer Call.” can be skipped. 3. Say the number or name tag
3. Say “Voice.” The system to send.
To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth
responds “OK, accessing Clearing the System
System from a Cell Phone
<phone name>.”
During a call with the audio on the Unless information is deleted out of
The cell phone's normal prompt the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it
cell phone, press b / g. The audio messages will go through their cycle will be retained indefinitely. This
transfers to the vehicle. If the audio according to the phone's operating includes all saved name tags in the
does not transfer to the vehicle, use instructions. phone book and phone pairing
information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the
previous sections on deleting a system. Not all phones support all $ / i (Mute/End Call): Press to
paired phone and deleting functions and not all phones work end a call, decline a call, or cancel
name tags. with the Hands-Free Phone system. an operation.
Hands-Free Phone Hands-Free Phone Controls Making a Call by Entering a Phone

Use the buttons on the infotainment Number
General Information With system and the steering wheel to
Touchscreen operate the Hands-Free Phone
system.
Steering Wheel Controls
Steering wheel controls can be
used to:
. Answer incoming calls.
. Confirm system information.
. End a call. 1. Enter the phone number using
the keypad on the telephone
. Decline a call. screen.
. Cancel an operation. 2. Press 5 on the screen or b / g
. Make outgoing calls using the on the steering wheel controls.
Vehicles with a Hands-Free Phone call list.
If a wrong number is entered, press
system can use a Bluetooth-capable
cell phone with a hands-free profile
b / g (Push to Talk): Press to } to delete the number one digit at
answer incoming calls and to a time, or press and hold } to
to make and receive phone calls.
confirm system information. Press delete all digits of the number.
The infotainment system and voice
and hold for two to three seconds to
control are used to operate the
access the call list.
Switching a Call to the Cell Phone Taking calls 2. Press 9 on the phone book
(Private Mode) When a phone call comes through screen.
To switch the call from the cell the connected Bluetooth cell phone, 3. Use the keypad to input the
phone to hands-free: the playing track will be cut off and name to search. For details,
the phone will ring with the relevant refer to the “Searching for a
1. Press 0. information displayed. Name” later in this section.
2. Press 0 again to switch back to Press b / g on the steering wheel 4. Select the phone book entry
hands-free. controls or press Accept on the to call.
Turning the Microphone On screen. 5. Press the number to dial.
and Off To decline the call, press $ / i on When the Bluetooth device and
Press 3 to turn the microphone on the steering wheel controls or press infotainment system are
or off. Reject on the screen. successfully paired, the phone book
Using the Phone Book Menu will download. Some phones may
Calling by Redial not download automatically. If this
To call by using redial: 1. Press Phone Book on the happens, connect it again or
telephone screen. proceed with the phone book
. Press b / g on the steering download on the phone.
wheel controls to display the 2. Press Q or R to scroll through
redial guidance screen. the list. Searching for a Name
3. Select the phone book entry Select characters by using the
. Press and hold 5 on the
to call. keypad on the phone book screen.
telephone screen. As characters are selected, the
4. Press the number to dial.
Redialing is not possible when there names that include those characters
is no call history. Searching for Phone Book Entries will display on the phone book
1. Press Phone Book on the screen. As more characters of the
telephone screen. name are entered, the list of
possible names is shortened.
To search for the name Alex: Making a Call with Speed Dial Downloadable
1. Press (abc) to select the first Numbers
character. Press and hold the speed dial
Applications
2. Press (jkl) to select the second number using the keypad on the
telephone screen. Smartphone Link
character.
Only speed dial numbers already (Overview)
3. Press (def) to select the third
character. stored on the cell phone can be Before Using Smartphone link
used for speed dial calls. Up to
4. Press (wxy) to select the fourth two-digit speed dial numbers are If equipped, the vehicle can
character. supported. connect to Pandora® and Stitcher
SmartRadio™ through the
Making a Call from Call History For two-digit speed dial numbers, infotainment system. The
1. Press Call History on the press and hold the second digit to applications most be downloaded to
telephone screen. make a call to the speed dial the device first.
number.
2. Press one of the following for: Pandora® is a free Internet radio
service that streams personalized
. 2 Dialed calls. radio stations based on artists,
songs, genres, and comedians.
. 4 Missed calls. Create stations using the Pandora
. 9 Received calls. website or smartphone application,
then use - (thumbs up) or ,
3. Select the phone book entry
to call. (thumbs down) to personalize
stations. To set up an account, or
for more information, go to
www.pandora.com. Pandora may
not be available in Canada or
Mexico.
Stitcher SmartRadio is an Internet

. On a BlackBerry® phone, iOS Version Error
radio service that streams news, through Bluetooth wireless.
If the iOS version of the iPhone is
sports, and entertainment shows Stitcher less than 4.0, the error message is
through the audio system. Create displayed as, “Your iPhone does
. iPod/iPhone, through the USB
personalized, on-demand stations or not allow this application to be
discover new shows through connection.
opened on a USB connection.
Stitcher's preset stations. To set up . Android phone, through Please refer to owner’s manual.”
an account, download the Bluetooth wireless.
application from the Android Market . Activate the application on your
or iTunes Store, or go to iPod/iPhone Error Messages and iPhone, then press the desired
www.stitcher.com. Solution application menu on the
If the infotainment system fails to infotainment system.
A phone or tablet with Internet
connection and the Pandora and/or activate the application on your Connecting Application Error
Stitcher application installed is iPod/iPhone connected through the
USB port, the error message is If the infotainment system fails to
required. Personal cell phone data activate the application on the
plans are used. Make sure the latest displayed as, “Unable to start
application, possible reasons.” smartphone connected through
version is installed on the device Bluetooth wireless technology, the
and the volume is turned up. . Your iPhone is locked. To error message is displayed as,
Supported Smartphone resolve, unlock the iPhone. “Connecting application error.”
Applications . You have another active . Reset all settings related to the
application open. To resolve, phone, then press the desired
Pandora
close the other active application menu on the
. iPod®/iPhone®, through the USB application. infotainment system.
connection. . You have not installed the . Reconnect the smartphone and
. Android™ phone, through application on your iPhone. To Infotainment system through
Bluetooth® wireless. resolve, install the application on Bluetooth wireless technology,
the iPhone.
then press the desired

. Press iPhone or bluetooth phone If the activated application is on the
application menu on the on the smartphone list menu to
smartphone link menu, the ^ is
infotainment system. switch to the desired device.
activated in the upper position of the
. When the application is stopped Displaying or Hiding Application HOME menu or playing screen.
on the smartphone, it usually Icons
takes time to return to normal To display or hide application icons Smartphone Link
operation. Try to activate the on the smartphone link menu: (Pandora)
application after 10–20 seconds.
To switch between Stitcher or
1. Press D. Some images and explanations may
vary by phone operating systems,
Pandora while playing the other on 2. Press smartphone link.
versions, and/or application (App)
the iPod/iPhone connected through versions.
the USB port, press the D button of
the iPod/iPhone, then press Stitcher Using Pandora®
or Pandora on the smartphone link 1. Install the Pandora application
menu of the infotainment system. on the smartphone.
Switching Between a USB 2. Connect the smartphone to the
Connected Device and a infotainment system through the
Bluetooth Device USB port or Bluetooth wireless
When the iPhone is connected to technology.
the infotainment system through the 3. Press SETTINGS. . iPhone: USB connection
USB port, and the infotainment 4. Press the desired application . Android phone/BlackBerry
system is connected to another icon to hide or display it on the phone: Bluetooth wireless
phone through Bluetooth wireless smartphone link screen. technology
technology, it is possible to switch
between the two applications, using 5. Press OK. 3. Activate the Pandora application.
the smartphone list menu.
4. Press D.
5. Press smartphone link. Changing Tracks Creating Stations by Searching

by Artist or Track
6. Press Pandora. Press l to change to the next
track. 1. Press MENU. The Pandora
menu is displayed.
Bookmark
2. Press create station.
To bookmark a favorite artist or
track. 3. Press enter artist/track.
The keypad is displayed.
1. Press S on the screen. 4. Enter the artist or track name
2. Press Artist or Track. using the keypad, and then
press Create.
Pandora Menus
5. Press the desired station.
7. Press Pandora. Creating Stations from Currently The station is added into the
If the smartphone is not connected Playing Music Pandora menu automatically.
to the infotainment system or the 1. Press MENU. The Pandora Listening to Stations
application is not installed on the menu is displayed.
smartphone, the Pandora menu is 1. Press MENU. The Pandora
not activated. 2. Press create station. menu is displayed.
3. Press from currently playing.
Thumbs Up and Thumbs Down 2. Press Q or R to scroll through
4. Press Artist or Track. the list. Select the desired
Rate tracks by using - (thumbs up) station.
5. Press the desired station.
or , (thumbs down). The station is added into the
Pause Pandora menu automatically.
. Press j to pause.
. Press r to resume.
QuickMix 2. Connect the smartphone to the If the smartphone is not connected

1. Press MENU. The Pandora infotainment system through the to the infotainment system or the
menu is displayed. USB port or Bluetooth wireless application is not installed on the
technology. smartphone. The Stitcher menu is
2. Press QuickMix Z to listen to a . iPhone: USB connection not activated.
selection of tracks from your Thumbs Up and Thumbs Down
stations.
. Android phone/BlackBerry
phone: Bluetooth wireless Rate tracks by using - (thumbs up)
Tone Settings technology
or , (thumbs down).
1. Press MENU. The Pandora 3. Activate the Stitcher application.
menu is displayed. Pause
2. Press tone settings. The tone
4. Press D.
. Press j to pause.
settings menu is displayed. See 5. Press smartphone link.
“Tone Settings” under “Radio 6. Press Stitcher.
. Press r to resume.
Controls With Touchscreen” in
Operation on page 7‑8. Changing Stations
Press l to change to the next
Smartphone Link station.
(Stitcher) Saving Favorites
Some images and explanations may
To save a station as a favorite,
vary by phone operating systems,
versions, and/or application (App) press q on the stitcher screen.
versions.
Using Stitcher™ 7. Press Stitcher.
1. Install the Stitcher application on
the smartphone.
Stitcher Menus
. ID3 Tag information for MP3
Bluetooth Phone/ files, such as the album name
The Stitcher Station menu displays
available station data from the
Devices and the artist, can be played.
Stitcher server.
. To display album title, track title,
Pictures and Movies and artist information, the file
1. Press MENU. The Stitcher should be compatible with the
Station menu is displayed. (Audio System)
ID3 Tag V1 and V2 formats.
The infotainment system can play
2. Press Q or R to scroll through Using USB Storage Devices and
the music files contained in the USB
the list. Select the desired storage device or iPod/iPhone iPod/iPhone
station. products. . Use a USB or flash memory type
Tone Settings storage device. Do not connect
Audio System Information
1. Press MENU. The Stitcher menu using a USB adaptor.
is displayed. Using MP3/WMA/OGG/WAV Files . Do not connect and reconnect
2. Press tone settings. The tone
. Music files with .mp3, .wma, the USB device repeatedly in a
settings menu is displayed. See .ogg, and .wav file name short time, as this may cause
“Tone Settings” under “Radio extensions can be played. static electricity and problems
Controls With Touchscreen” in . MP3 files that can be played are: using the device.
Operation on page 7‑8. Bit rate: 8 kbps ~ 320 kbps - . Use a USB device with a metal
Sampling frequency: 48 kHz, connecting terminal.
44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, 24 kHz, . Connection with i-Stick Type
22.05 kHz, and 16 kHz.
USB storage devices may be
. Files with a bit rate above faulty due to vehicle vibration.
128 kbps will result in higher . Do not to touch the USB
quality sound.
connecting terminal.

. Only USB storage devices on while the USB device is
. USB storage device capacity
formatted in FAT16/32, exFAT connected, the USB device may limit is 2,500 music files,
file system are recognized. be damaged or may not operate 2500 photo files, 250 movie files,
NTFS and other file systems are normally. 2,500 folders, and 10 stages of
not recognized. .
folder structure. The iPod/iPhone
USB storage devices can only can play all music files
. The time it takes to process files be connected for playing music/
will depend on the USB storage supported, but will only display
movies, viewing photo files, up to 2,500 files on the screen in
device type and capacity, and or upgrading.
the type of files stored. alphabetical order.
. Do not use the USB terminal to . The following iPod/iPhone
. Some USB storage device files charge USB accessory
may not be compatible. product models are supported:
equipment. The heat generated
. Up to two USB devices and one may cause performance issues ‐ iPod 2G nano®/iPod 3G nano/
iPod can be played through a or damage. iPod 4G and 5G nano
USB hub. All devices may not be . Store files in the top-level drive ‐ iPod 120GB and 160GB
supported, depending on the of the USB storage device. classic®
performance of the USB hub. When the logical drive is ‐ iPod 1G, 2G, and 3G touch®
If there is not enough power separated from the device, only
supply, it may not operate the USB music files from the ‐ iPhone 3G and 3GS
normally. top-level logical drive can be ‐ iPhone 4/4S
. Do not disconnect the USB played. Music files stored on . Only connect the iPod/iPhone
storage device while it is playing. USB storage devices may not
with connection cables
This may cause damage to the play normally if an application is
supported by iPod/iPhone
product or affect the loaded by partitioning a separate
products. Other connection
performance of the USB device. drive.
cables cannot be used.
. Disconnect the USB storage . Music files to which Digital Right
device when the ignition is Management (DRM) is applied
turned off. If the ignition is turned cannot be played.

. The iPod/iPhone may be
damaged if the ignition is turned
off when it is connected to the
vehicle. When not in use,
disconnect the iPod/iPhone.
. When the iPod/iPhone is
connected to the USB port by
using the iPod/iPhone cable, the
Bluetooth music is not
supported.
. Refer to the table for the If the USB device is already
classification items related to the connected:
. Connect the iPod/iPhone to the search function provided by the
USB port by using the iPod/ iPod/iPhone. . Press D.
iPhone cable to play the music
files. When the iPod/iPhone is USB Player . Press audio.
connected to the AUX input Playing Music from a USB Device . Press SourceR.
terminal, the music file will
not play.
. Connect the USB device to the . Press USB.
USB port.
. The iPod/iPhone playback To stop the USB device and select
functions and the information
. Play will start automatically after another media source, press
displayed may be different when the system has finished reading SourceR, then select the other
played on the infotainment the USB device.
source.
system. . If a non-readable USB device is
To remove the USB device, select
connected, an error message
another function, then remove the
displays and the system will
USB device.
switch to the previous audio
function.
Pause Playing a File Repeatedly

. Incorrect information cannot be
modified or corrected on the
. Press j to pause. Press v during playback. infotainment system.
Press r to resume. 1: Plays the current file
. . . The information for songs
repeatedly. expressed in special symbols or
Changing to Next/Previous Files in unavailable languages may be
. ALL: Plays all files repeatedly.
. Press l to change to the displayed as “u.”
. OFF: Returns to normal
next file. playback. Using the USB Music Menu
. Press g within five seconds of Playing a File Randomly . Press MENU during playback.
the playback time to play the
previous file. Press u during playback.
Returning to the Beginning of the . NO: Plays all files randomly.
Current File . OFF: Returns to normal
Press g after five seconds of the playback.
playback time. Viewing Information on the
Currently Playing File
Scanning Forward or Backward
Press the title during playback to
Press and hold g or l during display information about the current
playback to rewind or fast forward. file playing.
. Press the play mode.
Release the button to resume
playback at normal speed.
. The information displayed
includes the title, file name,
folder name, and artist/album
saved with the song.
Tone Settings If the iPod/iPhone is already . Press g within two seconds of

connected: the playback time to play the
1. Press R. previous file.
2. Press tone settings. The Tone
. Press D.
.
Returning to the Beginning of the
Settings menu is displayed. See Press audio. Current File
“Tone Settings” under “Radio
Controls with Touchscreen” in
. Press SourceR. Press g after two seconds of the
Operation on page 7‑8. . Press iPod. playback time.
iPod/iPhone player To stop the device and select Scanning Forward or Backward
another media source, press
This feature is limited to models Press and hold g or l during
supporting the iPod/iPhone SourceR, then select the other playback to rewind or fast-forward.
connection. source. Release the button to resume
Playing Music Files To remove the device, select playback at normal speed.
another function, then remove the Playing a File Repeatedly
. Connect the iPod/iPhone to the
device.
USB port.
Pause Press v during playback.
. Play will start from the previously . 1: Plays the current file
played point after the system . Press j to pause. repeatedly.
has finished reading the USB
device. . Press r to resume. . ALL: Plays all files repeatedly.
. If a non-readable USB device is Changing to Next/Previous Song . OFF: Returns to normal
connected, an error message playback.
displays and the system will
. Press l to change to the
switch to the previous audio next song.
function.
Playing a File Randomly Pictures and Movies

Press u during playback. (Picture System)
. NO: Plays all files randomly. The Infotainment system can view
. picture files that are stored on a
OFF: Returns to normal
USB device.
playback.
Viewing Information on the Picture System Information
Currently Playing Song Caution For Using Picture Files
Press the title during playback to Using the iPod Menu . File size:
display information about the current . Press MENU during playback. ‐ JPG: Within 64 to
song playing. . Press the appropriate 5,000 pixels (Width) and
. The information displayed play mode. 64 to 5,000 pixels (Height).
includes the title, file name,
Tone Settings ‐ BMP, PNG, GIF: Within 64 to
folder name, and artist/album
1,024 pixels (Width) and 64 to
saved with the song. 1. Press R on the iPod menu. 1,024 pixels (Height).
. Incorrect information cannot be 2. Press tone settings. The tone . File extensions: .jpg, .bmp, .png,
modified or corrected on the settings menu is displayed. See .gif. Animated .gif files are not
infotainment system. “Tone Settings” under “Radio supported.
. The information for songs Controls with Touchscreen” in
. Some files may not operate due
expressed in special symbols or
to a different recording format or
in unavailable languages may be
the condition of file.
displayed as “u.”
Viewing Pictures Viewing Slide Show

1. Connect the USB device to the From the picture screen, press z.
USB port.
. The slide show will start to play.
. Press the screen to cancel the
slide show during the slide show
playback.
Viewing a Previous or Next
Picture 2. Press the appropriate menu:
Press t or u from the picture . picture file list: lists all
screen. picture files.
Rotating a Picture
. sort by title: shows pictures
2. Press the screen to open to full in title order.
screen. Press the screen again Press y or w from the picture
to return to the previous screen. . sort by date: shows pictures
screen. in date order.
If the USB device is already
connected: Enlarging a Picture . slide show time: allows
selection of the slide show
1. Press D. Press x from the picture screen. interval.
2. Press picture & movie. Using the USB Picture Menu . clock/temp display: allows
1. Press MENU from the picture selection of On or Off to
3. Press SourceR.
screen. show the clock and
4. Press USB picture. temperature on the full
screen.
Some features are disabled while
the vehicle is in motion. . display setting: adjusts for
Brightness and Contrast.

. Max Video Bitrate:
3. Press 4 to exit. If the USB device is already
‐ mpeg-1: 8Mbps connected:
Pictures and Movies ‐ mpeg-4 (mpg4, mp42, mp43): 1. Press D.
(Movie System) 4Mbps
2. Press picture & movie.
The infotainment system can play ‐ wmv9: 3 Mbps
3. Press SourceR.
movie files that are stored on a ‐ divx 3: 3 Mbps
USB device. 4. Press USB movie.
‐ divx 4/5/6: 4.8 Mbps
Movie System Information Movie is not available while driving.
‐ xvid: 4.5 Mbps
Caution For Using Movie Files Viewing Slide Show
. Max Audio Bitrate:
. Available resolution: From the picture screen, press z.
‐ mp3: 320 Kbps
Within 720 x 576 (W x H) pixels.
. The slide show will start to play.
‐ wma: 320 Kbps
. Frame rate: Less than 30 fps.
. ‐ ac-3: 640 Kbps . Press the screen to cancel the
Playable movie file: .avi, .mpg, slide show during the slide show
.mp4, .divx, .xvid, .wmv. The ‐ aac: 449 Kbps playback.
playable movie file may not be . Movie files to which Digital Right . The last played audio source will
played according to the codec Management (DRM) is applied
format. play as background music
may not be played. during the slide show playback.
. Playable Codec format:
Playing a Movie File Pause
divx, xvid, mpeg-1,
mpeg-4 (mpg4, mp42, mp43), 1. Connect the USB device to the
wmv9 (wmv3). USB port.
. Press j to pause.
. Playable Audio format: MP3, 2. Press the screen to open to full . Press r to resume.
AC3, AAC, WMA. screen. Press the screen again
to return to the previous screen.
Changing to Next/Previous Movie Subtitle Language

. Press u to change to the If the movie file has a subtitle
next file. language, it can be viewed.
. Press t within five seconds of
. Press q from the movie screen.
the playback time to play the . Press S or T on the pop-up
previous file. screen.
Returning to the Beginning of the . Press r to close the pop-up
Current Movie 2. Press the appropriate menu: screen.
Press t after five seconds of the . movie file list: lists all movie If there is only one subtitle
playback time. files. language, it can be set to On/Off.
Scanning Forward or Backward
. clock/temp display: allows
selection of On or Off to Audio Language
Press and hold t or u during show the clock and If the movie file has an audio
playback to rewind or fast-forward. temperature on the full language, it can be used.
Release the button to resume screen.
playback at normal speed.
. Press q from the movie screen.
. display settings: adjusts for
Viewing Full Screen Brightness and Contrast. . Press Z S or T on the pop-up
. tone settings: shows the screen.
Press t from the movie screen.
sound setup. See “Tone . Press r to close the pop-up
Press t again to return to the Settings” under “Radio
previous screen. screen.
Controls with Touchscreen”
in Operation on page 7‑8. If there is only one audio language,
Using the USB Movie Menu
it cannot be set. Audio language
1. Press MENU from the movie 3. Press 4 to exit. can be set only when the movie file
screen. is the Divx File.
Trademarks and Covered by one or more of the

following U.S. patents: 7,295,673;
License Agreements 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274.
FCC Information DivX®, DivX Certified® and
associated logos are trademarks of
See Radio Frequency Statement Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries
(Canada) on page 13‑18 regarding and are used under license. Fees and Taxes: Subscription fee,
Part 15 of the Federal taxes, one time activation fee, and
Communications Commission (FCC) other fees may apply. Subscription
rules and with Industry Canada fee is consumer only. All fees and
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. programming subject to change.
Bluetooth® Subscriptions subject to Customer
Agreement available at
The Bluetooth word mark and logos www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM®
are owned by the Bluetooth® SIG, service only available in the
Inc. and any use of such marks by “Made for iPod” and “Made for 48 contiguous United States and
General Motors is under license. iPhone” mean that an electronic Canada.
Other trademarks and trade names accessory has been designed to
are those of their respective owners. connect specifically to iPod or In Canada: Some deterioration of
iPhone and has been certified by service may occur in extreme
the developer to meet Apple northern latitudes. This is beyond
performance standards. the control of SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio.
iPod and iPhone are trademarks of
Apple Computer, Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video,

including premium content.
Explicit Language Notice: Channels Furthermore, the AMBER voice FreeType 2

with frequent explicit language are compression software included in Portions of this software are
indicated with an “XL” preceding the this product is protected by ®
channel name. Channel blocking is intellectual property rights including copyright 2007-2012 The
available for SiriusXM Satellite patent rights, copyrights, and trade FreeType Project
Radio receivers by notifying secrets of Digital Voice (www.freetype.org).
SiriusXM: Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
. USA: 866-635-2349 or see General Requirements: Libjpeg
www.siriusxm.com. 1. A License Agreement from The navigation software is based in
. Canada: 877-209-0079 or SiriusXM is required for any part on the work of the independent
see www.xmradio.ca. product that incorporates JPEG Group.
It is prohibited to copy, decompile, SiriusXM Technology and/or for
disassemble, reverse engineer, use of any of the SiriusXM
hack, manipulate, or otherwise marks to be manufactured,
make available any technology or distributed, or marketed in the
software incorporated in receivers SiriusXM Service Area.
compatible with the SiriusXM 2. For products to be distributed,
Satellite Radio System or that marketed, and/or sold in
support the SiriusXM website, the Canada, a separate agreement
Online Service or any of its content. is required with Canadian
Satellite Radio Inc. (operating as
XM Canada).
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control 4. Driver and Passenger Heated

Seats
Systems 5. Air Conditioning
Climate Control Systems For vehicles with these climate 6. Rear Window Defogger
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1 control systems, the heating,
cooling, and ventilation can be 7. Recirculation
Air Vents controlled for the vehicle.
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Maintenance
Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Climate Control System with

Climate Control System with Heater Only
Heater and Air Conditioning 1. Temperature Control
1. Temperature Control 2. Fan Control
2. Fan Control 3. Air Delivery Mode Control
3. Air Delivery Mode Control 4. Rear Window Defogger
8-2 Climate Controls
Temperature Control: Turn W (Defog): This mode clears the For quick cool down on hot days, do
clockwise or counterclockwise to windows of fog or moisture. Air is the following:
increase or decrease the directed to the floor, windshield, and 1. Open the windows to let hot air
temperature. side window outlets. escape.
A (Fan Control): Turn clockwise 1 (Defrost): This mode clears the
or counterclockwise to increase or windshield of fog or frost more
2. Press M.
decrease the fan speed. Turning the quickly. Air is directed to the 3. Press #.
fan control to 0 turns the fan off. The windshield and side window outlets.
fan must be turned on to run the air 4. Select the coolest temperature.
conditioning compressor. Do not drive the vehicle until all
windows are clear. 5. Select the highest A speed.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to In defrost or defog mode, excessive Using these settings together for
change the current airflow mode. air conditioning use can cause the long periods of time may cause the
windows to fog. If this happens, air inside the vehicle to become too
Select from the following air delivery dry. To prevent this from happening,
change the air delivery mode to Y
modes: after the air in the vehicle has
and reduce the fan speed.
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the cooled, turn the recirculation
instrument panel outlets.
# (Air Conditioning): For mode off.
vehicles with air conditioning, follow
\ (Bi-Level): Air is divided these steps to use the system. Turn M (Recirculation): This mode
between the instrument panel and A to the desired speed. The air recirculates and helps to quickly
floor outlets. conditioning does not operate when cool the air inside the vehicle. It can
the fan control knob is in the off be used to prevent outside air and
[ (Floor): Air is directed to the odors from entering the vehicle.
floor outlets, with some air directed position. Press # to turn the air
to the rear outlets. conditioning on and off. When # is
pressed, an indicator light comes on
to show that the air conditioning
is on.
Press the button to turn the Rear Window and Outside For vehicles with heated outside
recirculation mode on. An indicator Mirror Defogger rearview mirrors, they turn on with
light comes on to show that the the rear window defogger and help
recirculation is on. Press the button 1 (Rear Window Defogger): to clear fog or frost from the surface
again to return to outside air mode. Press to turn the rear window and of the mirror. See Heated Mirrors on
outside mirror defogger on or off. page 2‑12.
Using the recirculation mode for An indicator light comes on to show
extended periods may cause the that the feature is on. Notice: Do not use anything
windows to fog. If this happens, sharp on the inside of the rear
select the defrost mode. The rear window defogger turns off window. If you do, you could cut
after about 10 minutes. It can also or damage the warming grid, and
M / L (Heated Seats, If be turned off by pressing 1 again the repairs would not be covered
Equipped): Press to heat the driver
or by turning the ignition to ACC/ by the vehicle warranty. Do not
or passenger seat. See Heated
ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF. attach a temporary vehicle
Front Seats on page 3‑7.
If turned on again it runs for about license, tape, a decal, or anything
five minutes before turning off. similar to the defogger grid.
Air Vents Operation Tips

. Clear away any ice, snow,
or leaves from the air inlets at
the base of the windshield that
may block the flow of air into the
vehicle.
. Use of non-GM approved hood
deflectors may adversely affect
the performance of the system.
. Keep the path under the front
seats clear of objects to help
Turn the knobs on the side air vents circulate the air inside the
counterclockwise or clockwise to vehicle more effectively.
open or close off the airflow.
Use the air vents in the center and
on the side of the instrument panel
to direct the airflow. Move the slats
on the center air vents to direct
airflow.
Maintenance
Air Intake
Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves
from the air intake at the base of the
windshield that can block the flow of
air into the vehicle.
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
The filter removes dust, pollen, and 1. Open the glove box completely 3. Install the new air filter.
other airborne irritants from outside and pull it to remove.
air that is pulled into the vehicle. 4. Reinstall the air filter cover and
2. Remove the filter cover by glove box in reverse order.
The filter should be replaced as part unscrewing both sides of the
of routine scheduled maintenance. See your dealer if additional
cover. assistance is needed.
See Maintenance Schedule on
page 11‑3. To find out what type of
filter to use, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 11‑15.
2 NOTES
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Starting and Operating

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-14
Manual Transmission
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-26
Operating Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . .
9-14
9-16 Drive Systems
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Driving Information Retained Accessory Brakes
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Antilock Brake
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Parking over Things Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-29
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Ride Control Systems
Engine Exhaust Traction Control
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Running the Vehicle While StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 Descent Control
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Automatic Transmission System (DCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-23 Cruise Control
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
9-2 Driving and Operating
Object Detection Systems

. Designate a front seat
Driving Information passenger to handle potential
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-36
Rear Vision distractions.
Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37 Distracted Driving . Become familiar with vehicle
Distraction comes in many forms features before driving, such as
Fuel and can take your focus from the programming favorite radio
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40 task of driving. Exercise good stations and adjusting climate
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-40 judgment and do not let other control and seat settings.
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-40 activities divert your attention away Program all trip information into
California Fuel
from the road. Many local any navigation device prior to
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
governments have enacted laws driving.
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-41
regarding driver distraction. Become
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41 . Wait until the vehicle is parked
familiar with the local laws in
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42 to retrieve items that have fallen
your area.
Filling a Portable Fuel to the floor.
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43 To avoid distracted driving, always . Stop or park the vehicle to tend
keep your eyes on the road, hands
Towing to children.
on the wheel, and mind on the drive.
General Towing . Keep pets in an appropriate
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
. Do not use a phone in
carrier or restraint.
demanding driving situations.
Conversions and Add-Ons Use a hands-free method to . Avoid stressful conversations
Add-On Electrical place or receive necessary while driving, whether with a
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44 phone calls. passenger or on a cell phone.
. Watch the road. Do not read,
take notes, or look up
information on phones or other
electronic devices.
careless and make mistakes.

{ WARNING Anticipate what they might do WARNING (Continued)
and be ready.
Taking your eyes off the road too Do not drink and drive or ride with
long or too often could cause a
. Allow enough following distance a driver who has been drinking.
crash resulting in injury or death. between you and the driver in Ride home in a cab; or if you are
Focus your attention on driving. front of you. with a group, designate a driver
. Focus on the task of driving. who will not drink.
Refer to the infotainment section for
more information on using that Drunk Driving Control of a Vehicle
system, including pairing and using Death and injury associated with
a cell phone. drinking and driving is a global Braking, steering, and accelerating
are important factors in helping to
If equipped, refer to the navigation tragedy.
control a vehicle while driving.
manual for information on that
system, including pairing and using { WARNING Braking
a cell phone.
Drinking and then driving is very Braking action involves perception
Defensive Driving dangerous. Your reflexes, time and reaction time. Deciding to
perceptions, attentiveness, and push the brake pedal is perception
Defensive driving means “always judgment can be affected by even time. Actually doing it is
expect the unexpected.” The first reaction time.
a small amount of alcohol. You
step in driving defensively is to wear
can have a serious — or even Average driver reaction time is
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on
page 3‑13. fatal — collision if you drive after about three-quarters of a second.
drinking. In that time, a vehicle moving at
. Assume that other road users 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
(Continued)
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and (66 ft), which could be a lot of
other drivers) are going to be distance in an emergency.
Helpful braking tips to keep in mind If power steering assist is lost due See your dealer if there is a
include: to a system malfunction, the vehicle problem.
. Keep enough distance between can be steered, but may require
increased effort. See your dealer if Curve Tips
you and the vehicle in front
of you. there is a problem. . Take curves at a reasonable
If the steering wheel is turned until it speed.
. Avoid needless heavy braking.
reaches the end of its travel, and is . Reduce speed before entering a
. Keep pace with traffic. held in that position for an extended curve.
If the engine ever stops while the period of time, power steering assist . Maintain a reasonable steady
vehicle is being driven, brake may be reduced.
speed through the curve.
normally but do not pump the Normal use of the power steering
brakes. Doing so could make the
. Wait until the vehicle is out of
assist should return when the
pedal harder to push down. If the the curve before accelerating
system cools down.
engine stops, there will be some gently into the straightaway.
power brake assist but it will be Hydraulic Power Steering
Steering in Emergencies
used when the brake is applied. If the vehicle has the hydraulic
Once the power assist is used up, it
. There are some situations when
power steering, it may require
can take longer to stop and the steering around a problem may
maintenance. See Power Steering
brake pedal will be harder to push. be more effective than braking.
Fluid (1.4L L4 Engine) on
page 10‑20 or Power Steering Fluid . Holding both sides of the
Steering (1.8L L4 Engine) on page 10‑20. steering wheel allows you to turn
180 degrees without removing
Electric Power Steering If power steering assist is lost
a hand.
because the engine stops or a
If the vehicle has electric power system malfunctions, the vehicle . Antilock Brake System (ABS)
steering, it does not have power can be steered but may require allows steering while braking.
steering fluid. Regular maintenance increased effort.
is not required.
Off-Road Recovery 3. Turn the steering wheel to go If the vehicle starts to slide, follow
straight down the roadway. these suggestions:
. Ease your foot off the
Loss of Control accelerator pedal and steer the
Skidding way you want the vehicle to go.
The vehicle may straighten out.
There are three types of skids that Be ready for a second skid if it
correspond to the vehicle's three occurs.
control systems: . Slow down and adjust your
. Braking Skid — wheels are not driving according to weather
rolling. conditions. Stopping distance
. Steering or Cornering Skid — can be longer and vehicle
too much speed or steering in a control can be affected when
curve causes tires to slip and traction is reduced by water,
The vehicle's right wheels can drop lose cornering force. snow, ice, gravel, or other
off the edge of a road onto the material on the road. Learn to
shoulder while driving. Follow
. Acceleration Skid — too much recognize warning clues — such
these tips: throttle causes the driving as enough water, ice, or packed
wheels to spin. snow on the road to make a
1. Ease off the accelerator and
Defensive drivers avoid most skids mirrored surface — and slow
then, if there is nothing in the
by taking reasonable care suited to down when you have any doubt.
way, steer the vehicle so that it
straddles the edge of the existing conditions, and by not . Try to avoid sudden steering,
pavement. overdriving those conditions. But acceleration, or braking,
skids are always possible. including reducing vehicle speed
2. Turn the steering wheel about
by shifting to a lower gear. Any
one-eighth of a turn, until the
sudden changes could cause
right front tire contacts the
the tires to slide.
pavement edge.
Remember: Antilock brakes help Other Rainy Weather Tips

avoid only the braking skid. WARNING (Continued)
Besides slowing down, other wet
Flowing or rushing water creates weather driving tips include:
Driving on Wet Roads strong forces. Driving through . Allow extra following distance.
Rain and wet roads can reduce flowing water could cause the
vehicle traction and affect your vehicle to be carried away. If this
. Pass with caution.
ability to stop and accelerate. happens, you and other vehicle . Keep windshield wiping
Always drive slower in these types occupants could drown. Do not equipment in good shape.
of driving conditions and avoid ignore police warnings and be
driving through large puddles and
. Keep the windshield washer fluid
very cautious about trying to drive reservoir filled.
deep‐standing or flowing water. through flowing water. . Have good tires with proper
{ WARNING Hydroplaning
tread depth. See Tires on
page 10‑40.
Wet brakes can cause crashes. Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water . Turn off cruise control.
They might not work as well in a can build up under the vehicle's
quick stop and could cause tires so they actually ride on the Highway Hypnosis
pulling to one side. You could water. This can happen if the road is
lose control of the vehicle. wet enough and you are going fast Always be alert and pay attention to
enough. When the vehicle is your surroundings while driving.
After driving through a large If you become tired or sleepy, find a
puddle of water or a car/vehicle hydroplaning, it has little or no
contact with the road. safe place to park the vehicle
wash, lightly apply the brake and rest.
pedal until the brakes work There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to Other driving tips include:
normally.
slow down when the road is wet. . Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
(Continued)
. Keep the interior
temperature cool.

. Keep your eyes moving — scan . Stay in your own lane. Do not
the road ahead and to the sides. WARNING (Continued) swing wide or cut across the
. Check the rearview mirror and center of the road. Drive at
none going down a hill. You could speeds that let you stay in your
vehicle instruments often.
crash. Shift down to let the engine own lane.
assist the brakes on a steep
Hill and Mountain Roads downhill slope.
. Be alert on top of hills;
something could be in your lane
Driving on steep hills or through (stalled car, accident).
mountains is different than driving
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for . Pay attention to special road
driving in these conditions include: { WARNING signs (falling rocks area, winding
roads, long grades, passing or
. Keep the vehicle serviced and in Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) no-passing zones) and take
good shape. or with the ignition off is appropriate action.
. Check all fluid levels and brakes, dangerous. The brakes will have
tires, cooling system, and to do all the work of slowing down Winter Driving
transmission. and they could get so hot that
they would not work well. You Driving on Snow or Ice
. Shift to a lower gear when going
would then have poor braking or Drive carefully when there is snow
down steep or long hills.
even none going down a hill. or ice between the tires and the
Steering may also be affected
{ WARNING when ignition is off. You could
road, creating less traction or grip.
Wet ice can occur at about 0°C
If you do not shift down, the crash. Always have the engine (32°F) when freezing rain begins to
brakes could get so hot that they running and the vehicle in gear fall, resulting in even less traction.
would not work well. You would when going downhill. Avoid driving on wet ice or in
then have poor braking or even freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
(Continued)
Drive with caution, whatever the Turn off cruise control on slippery
condition. Accelerate gently so surfaces. WARNING (Continued)
traction is not lost. Accelerating too
quickly causes the wheels to spin Blizzard Conditions cannot be seen or smelled. It can
and makes the surface under the Being stuck in snow can be a cause unconsciousness and even
tires slick, so there is even less serious situation. Stay with the death.
traction. vehicle unless there is help nearby. If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
Try not to break the fragile traction. If possible, use Roadside . Clear away snow from around
If you accelerate too fast, the drive Assistance. See Roadside
the base of your vehicle,
wheels will spin and polish the Assistance Program (Canada) on
especially any that is blocking
surface under the tires even more. page 13‑5 or Roadside Assistance
the exhaust pipe.
Program (Mexico) on page 13‑7. To
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) get help and keep everyone in the . Check again from time to
improves vehicle stability during vehicle safe: time to be sure snow does
hard stops on slippery roads, but not collect there.
apply the brakes sooner than when
. Turn on the hazard warning
on dry pavement. See Antilock flashers. . Open a window about 5 cm
Brake System (ABS) on page 9‑28. (2 in) on the side of the
. Tie a red cloth to an outside
vehicle that is away from the
Allow greater following distance on mirror.
wind to bring in fresh air.
any slippery road and watch for
slippery spots. Icy patches can { WARNING . Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
occur on otherwise clear roads in
shaded areas. The surface of a Snow can trap engine exhaust panel.
curve or an overpass can remain icy under the vehicle. This may . Adjust the climate control
when the surrounding roads are cause exhaust gases to get system to a setting that
clear. Avoid sudden steering inside. Engine exhaust contains circulates the air inside the
maneuvers and braking while carbon monoxide (CO) which vehicle and set the fan speed
on ice. (Continued) (Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
If the Vehicle Is Stuck Rocking the Vehicle to Get
it Out
Slowly and cautiously spin the
to the highest setting. See wheels to free the vehicle when Turn the steering wheel left and
“Climate Control Systems” in stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. right to clear the area around the
the Index. front wheels. Turn off any traction
If stuck too severely for the traction
For more information about system. Shift back and forth
system to free the vehicle, turn the
between R (Reverse) and a low
carbon monoxide, see Engine traction system off and use the
forward gear, spinning the wheels
Exhaust on page 9‑22. rocking method. See Traction
as little as possible. To prevent
Control System (TCS) on
transmission wear, wait until the
page 9‑30.
To save fuel, run the engine for only wheels stop spinning before shifting
short periods as needed to warm gears. Release the accelerator
the vehicle and then shut the engine { WARNING pedal while shifting, and press
off and close the window most of lightly on the accelerator pedal
the way to save heat. Repeat this If the vehicle's tires spin at high when the transmission is in gear.
until help arrives but only when you speed, they can explode, and you Slowly spinning the wheels in the
feel really uncomfortable from the or others could be injured. The forward and reverse directions
cold. Moving about to keep warm vehicle can overheat, causing an causes a rocking motion that could
also helps. engine compartment fire or other free the vehicle. If that does not get
damage. Spin the wheels as little the vehicle out after a few tries, it
If it takes some time for help to
as possible and avoid going might need to be towed out. If the
arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator above 56 km/h (35 mph). vehicle does need to be towed out,
pedal slightly so the engine runs see Towing the Vehicle on
faster than the idle speed. This page 10‑71.
keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help
with the headlamps. Do this as little
as possible to save fuel.
Vehicle Load Limits WARNING (Continued)

pillar (B-pillar). With the driver
door open, you will find the label
It is very important to know how attached below the door lock
much weight the vehicle can vehicle handles. This could
cause loss of control and a post. The Tire and Loading
carry. This weight is called the Information label shows the
vehicle capacity weight and crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle. number of occupant seating
includes the weight of all positions (1), and the maximum
occupants, cargo, and all vehicle capacity weight (2) in
nonfactory-installed options. Tire and Loading Information kilograms and pounds.
Two labels on the vehicle show Label
how much weight it may The Tire and Loading
properly carry: the Tire and Information label also shows the
Loading Information label and tire size of the original
the Certification label. equipment tires (3) and the
recommended cold tire inflation
{ WARNING pressures (4). For more
information on tires and inflation
Do not load the vehicle any see Tires on page 10‑40 and
heavier than the Gross Tire Pressure on page 10‑48.
Vehicle Weight Rating There is also important loading
(GVWR), or either the information on the Certification
maximum front or rear Gross label. It tells you the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Label Example
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
This can cause systems to A vehicle-specific Tire and and the Gross Axle Weight
break and change the way the Loading Information label is
(Continued) attached to the vehicle center
Rating (GAWR) for the front and 4. The resulting figure equals
rear axle; see “Certification the available amount of cargo
Label” later in this section. and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX”
Steps for Determining Correct
amount equals 1400 lbs and
Load Limit
there will be five 150 lb
1. Locate the statement “The passengers in your vehicle,
combined weight of the amount of available cargo
occupants and cargo should and luggage load capacity is
never exceed XXX kg or 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)
XXX lbs” on your vehicle's = 650 lbs).
placard. Example 1
5. Determine the combined
2. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
weight of the driver and being loaded on the vehicle. Example 1 = 453 kg
passengers that will be riding That weight may not safely (1,000 lbs).
in your vehicle. exceed the available cargo
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @
3. Subtract the combined and luggage load capacity
68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg
weight of the driver and calculated in Step 4.
(300 lbs).
passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs. 3. Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight = 317 kg
(700 lbs).
seating positions. The combined

weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 2 Example 3
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 2 = 453 kg Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg Label Example
(750 lbs). (1,000 lbs). A vehicle-specific Certification
3. Available Cargo Weight = 3. Available Cargo Weight = label, found on the vehicle
113 kg (250 lbs). 0 kg (0 lbs). center pillar (B-pillar), tells you
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and the gross weight capacity of the
Loading Information label for vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle
specific information about the Weight Rating (GVWR). The
vehicle's capacity weight and GVWR includes the weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel,
and cargo. Never exceed the If you put things inside the
GVWR for the vehicle, or the vehicle — like suitcases, tools, WARNING (Continued)
Gross Axle Weight Rating packages, or anything else — . Never stack heavier
(GAWR) for either the front or they will go as fast as the things, like suitcases,
rear axle. vehicle goes. If you have to stop inside the vehicle so that
And, if you do have a heavy or turn quickly, or if there is a some of them are above
load, you should spread it out. crash, they will keep going. the tops of the seats.
See “Steps for Determining
Correct Load Limit” earlier in this { WARNING . Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint
section. Things inside the vehicle can in the vehicle.
strike and injure people in a
{ WARNING sudden stop or turn, or in a
. Secure loose items in the
vehicle.
Do not load the vehicle any crash.
. Do not leave a seat folded
heavier than the Gross . Put things in the cargo down unless needed.
Vehicle Weight Rating area of the vehicle. In the
(GVWR), or either the cargo area, put them as
maximum front or rear Gross far forward as possible.
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Try to spread the weight
This can cause systems to evenly.
break and change the way the (Continued)
vehicle handles. This could
cause loss of control and a
crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle.
Starting and Following break‐in, engine speed

and load can be gradually
1 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/
OFF): When the vehicle is stopped,
Operating increased. turn the ignition switch to LOCK/
OFF to turn the engine off.
New Vehicle Break-In Ignition Positions This position locks the steering
Notice: The vehicle does not wheel, ignition, and transmission.
need an elaborate break-in. But it The ignition switch can bind in the
will perform better in the long run LOCK/OFF position with the wheels
if you follow these guidelines: turned off center. If this happens,
. Do not drive at any one move the steering wheel from right
constant speed, fast or slow, to left while turning the key to ACC/
for the first 805 km (500 mi). ACCESSORY. If this does not work,
Do not make full-throttle then the vehicle needs service.
starts. Avoid downshifting to Do not turn the engine off when the
brake or slow the vehicle. vehicle is moving. This will cause a
. Avoid making hard stops for loss of power assist in the brake
the first 322 km (200 mi) or and steering systems and disable
so. During this time the new the airbags.
The ignition switch has four different
brake linings are not yet positions. If the vehicle must be shut off in an
broken in. Hard stops with emergency:
new linings can mean The key must be fully extended to
premature wear and earlier start the vehicle. 1. Brake using a firm and steady
replacement. Follow this pressure. Do not pump the
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition brakes repeatedly. This may
breaking-in guideline every must be in ON/RUN and the regular
time you get new brake deplete power assist, requiring
brake pedal applied. increased brake pedal force.
linings.
2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). Notice: Using a tool to force the If you leave the key in the ACC/
This can be done while the key to turn in the ignition could ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position
vehicle is moving. After shifting cause damage to the switch or with the engine off, the battery could
to N (Neutral), firmly apply the break the key. Use the correct be drained. You may not be able to
brakes and steer the vehicle to a key, make sure it is all the way in, start the vehicle if the battery is
safe location. and turn it only with your hand. allowed to drain for an extended
3. Come to a complete stop. Shift If the key cannot be turned by period of time.
to P (Park) with an automatic hand, see your dealer. 4 (START): This is the position that
transmission, or Neutral with a 2 (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is the starts the engine. When the engine
manual transmission. Turn the position in which you can operate starts, release the key. The ignition
ignition to LOCK/OFF. things like the radio and the switch returns to ON/RUN for
4. Set the parking brake. See windshield wipers when the engine driving.
Parking Brake on page 9‑29. is off. A warning tone will sound when the
3 (ON/RUN): This position can be driver door is opened, the ignition is
{ WARNING used to operate the electrical
accessories and to display some
in ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/
OFF, and the key is in the ignition.
Turning off the vehicle while instrument cluster warning and If the ignition becomes difficult to
moving may cause loss of power indicator lights. This position can turn, see Keys on page 2‑1.
assist in the brake and steering also be used for service and
systems and disable the airbags. diagnostics, and to verify the proper
While driving, only shut the operation of the malfunction
vehicle off in an emergency. indicator lamp as may be required
for emission inspection purposes.
The switch stays in this position
If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, when the engine is running.
and must be shut off while driving,
turn the ignition to ACC/
ACCESSORY.
Key Lock Release If charging or jump starting the Any resulting damage would not
battery does not work, there is a be covered by the vehicle
manual key lock release. Locate the warranty. See Add-On Electrical
hole below the ignition lock. Insert a Equipment on page 9‑44.
tool or key into the opening. Locate
the lever, and press it toward the Manual Transmission
driver while removing the key from The shift lever should be in Neutral
the ignition. and the parking brake engaged.
Hold the clutch pedal down to the
Starting the Engine floor and start the engine. The
vehicle will not start if the clutch
Place the transmission in the pedal is not all the way down.
proper gear.
Starting Procedure
Automatic Transmission
1. With your foot off the accelerator
Vehicles with an automatic Move the shift lever to P (Park) or pedal, turn the ignition key to
transmission may be equipped with N (Neutral). The engine will not start START. When the engine starts,
an electronic key lock release in any other position. To restart the let go of the ignition.
system. This system is to prevent vehicle when it is already moving,
ignition key removal unless the shift use N (Neutral) only. The idle speed will go down as
lever is in P (Park). your engine gets warm. Do not
Notice: Do not try to shift to race the engine immediately
The key lock release will not work if P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. after starting it. Operate the
the battery is charged less than If you do, you could damage the engine and transmission gently
9-volts, or uncharged. Try charging transmission. Shift to P (Park) to allow the oil to warm up and
or jump starting the battery. See only when the vehicle is stopped. lubricate all moving parts.
Jump Starting on page 10‑68 Notice: If you add electrical parts The vehicle has a
or accessories, you could change Computer-Controlled Cranking
the way the engine operates. System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects battery. Wait at least 15 seconds Engine Heater
components. If the ignition key is between each try, to let the
turned to the START position, cranking motor cool down. Vehicles with the 1.4L engine may
and then released when the have an engine heater. The engine
2. If the engine does not start after heater can help in cold weather
engine begins cranking, the five to 10 seconds, especially in
engine will continue cranking for conditions at or below −18°C (0°F)
very cold weather (below −18°C for easier starting and better fuel
a few seconds or until the or 0°F), it could be flooded with
vehicle starts. If the engine does economy during engine warm-up.
too much gasoline. Try pushing Plug in the heater at least four hours
not start and the key is held in the accelerator pedal all the way
START for many seconds, before starting the vehicle. An
to the floor and holding it there internal thermostat in the plug-end
cranking will be stopped after as you hold the key in START
15 seconds to prevent cranking of the cord will prevent engine
for up to a maximum of heater operation at temperatures
motor damage. To prevent gear 15 seconds. Wait at least
damage, this system also above −18°C (0°F).
15 seconds between each try, to
prevents cranking if the engine allow the cranking motor to cool
is already running. Engine down. When the engine starts,
cranking can be stopped by let go of the key or button, and
turning the ignition switch to the accelerator. If the vehicle
ACC/ACCESSORY or starts briefly but then stops
LOCK/OFF. again, do the same thing. This
Notice: Cranking the engine for clears the extra gasoline from
long periods of time, by returning the engine. Do not race the
the key to the START position engine immediately after starting
immediately after cranking has it. Operate the engine and
ended, can overheat and damage transmission gently until the oil
the cranking motor, and drain the warms up and lubricates all
moving parts.
To Use The Engine Heater Retained Accessory

1. Turn off the engine.
{ WARNING Power (RAP)
Plugging the cord into an These vehicle accessories may be
ungrounded outlet could cause an used for up to 10 minutes after the
electrical shock. Also, the wrong engine is turned off:
kind of extension cord could
overheat and cause a fire. You
. Audio System
could be seriously injured. Plug . Power Windows
the cord into a properly grounded . Sunroof
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If the cord will not reach, use a The power windows and sunroof will
heavy-duty three-prong extension continue to work for up to
cord rated for at least 15 amps. 10 minutes or until any door is
opened. The radio will work when
the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/
3. Open the hood and unwrap the 5. Before starting the engine, be ACCESSORY. Once the key is
electrical cord. The cord is sure to unplug and store the turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,
located in the driver side of the cord as it was before to keep it the radio will continue to work for
engine compartment, near the away from moving engine parts. 10 minutes, or until the driver door is
battery. It is shipped from the If you do not it could be opened.
factory with a tie holding it in damaged.
place. Use care in removing the The length of time the heater should Shifting Into Park
tie so that the cord is not remain plugged in depends on 1. Hold the brake pedal down and
damaged. several factors. Ask a dealer in the set the parking brake. See
4. Plug it into a normal, grounded area where you will be parking the Parking Brake on page 9‑29.
110-volt AC outlet. vehicle for the best advice on this.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) Torque Lock (Automatic

by pressing the button on the WARNING (Continued) Transmission)
shift lever and pushing the lever
all the way toward the front of Do not leave the vehicle when the If you are parking on a hill and you
the vehicle. engine is running. If you have left do not shift your transmission into
the engine running, the vehicle P (Park) properly, the weight of the
3. Turn the ignition key to can move suddenly. You or others vehicle may put too much force on
LOCK/OFF. could be injured. To be sure the the parking pawl in the
4. Remove the key and take it with vehicle will not move, even when transmission. You may find it difficult
you. If you can leave the vehicle you are on fairly level ground, to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
with the ignition key in your always set the parking brake and This is called “torque lock.”
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park). move the shift lever to P (Park). To prevent torque lock, set the
See Shifting Into Park on parking brake and then shift into
Leaving the Vehicle with the P (Park) properly before you leave
page 9‑18.
Engine Running (Automatic the driver seat. To find out how, see
Transmission) “Shifting Into Park (Automatic
If you have to leave the vehicle with Transmission)” in this section.
{ WARNING the engine running, be sure the
vehicle is in P (Park) and the
When you are ready to drive, move
the shift lever out of P (Park) before
It can be dangerous to leave the parking brake is firmly set before
you release the parking brake.
vehicle with the engine running. you leave it. After you have moved
It could overheat and catch fire. the shift lever into P (Park), hold the If torque lock does occur, you may
brake pedal down. Then see if you need to have another vehicle push
It is dangerous to get out of the can move the shift lever away from yours a little uphill to take some of
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully P (Park) without first pushing the the pressure from the parking pawl
in P (Park) with the parking brake button on the shift lever. If you can, in the transmission, so you can pull
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. it means that the shift lever was not the shift lever out of P (Park).
(Continued) fully locked into P (Park).
Shifting out of Park 3. Press the shift lever button. To access the shift lock manual
4. Move the shift lever to the release:
This vehicle is equipped with a shift
lock control. The shift lock control is desired position. 1. Turn the ignition OFF and
designed to: If still unable to shift out of P (Park): remove the key.
. Prevent ignition key removal 1. Fully release the shift lever 2. Hold the brake pedal down.
unless the shift lever is in button. Apply the parking brake.
P (Park) with the shift lever
button fully released. 2. Hold the brake pedal down and
press the shift lever button
. Prevent movement of the shift again.
lever out of P (Park) unless the
3. Move the shift lever to the
ignition is in ON/RUN and the
desired position.
brake pedal is applied.
If the shift lever still cannot be
The shift lock control is always
moved from P (Park), see “Shift
functional except in the case of an
Lock Manual Release.”
uncharged or low voltage (less than
9-volt) battery. Shift Lock Manual Release
If the vehicle has an uncharged The automatic transmission has an
battery or a battery with low voltage, electric park lock. The key must be
try charging or jump starting the in the ON/RUN position, and the 3. Remove the cover on the
battery. See Jump Starting on brake pedal pressed so the shift console.
page 10‑68. lever can be moved from the
To shift out of P (Park): P (Park) position. If the battery has
lost power, the shift lever cannot be
1. Apply the brake pedal. moved from P (Park) unless the shift
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN. lock manual release is disengaged
manually.
Parking Parking over Things

If the vehicle has a manual That Burn
transmission, before getting out of
the vehicle, move the shift lever into
R (Reverse) if parking on a downhill
{ WARNING
slope. On a level surface or an Things that can burn could touch
uphill slope, use 1 (First) gear. hot exhaust parts under the
Firmly apply the parking brake. Turn vehicle and ignite. Do not park
the wheels toward the curb for a over papers, leaves, dry grass,
downhill slope, or away from the or other things that can burn.
curb for an uphill slope. Once the
shift lever has been placed into gear
4. Insert and press the ignition key with the clutch pedal pressed in,
into the slot. turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF,
5. Move the shift lever out of remove the key, and release the
P (Park). If P (Park) is selected clutch.
again after the key is removed
from the slot, the shift lever will
be locked again.
6. Remove the key from the slot.
7. Close the cover.
8. Have the cause of the problem
fixed by your dealer.
Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued)

Running the Vehicle
While Parked
{ WARNING . There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
It is better not to park with the
engine running.
Engine exhaust contains carbon damage or aftermarket
monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not If the vehicle is left with the engine
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed. running, follow the proper steps to
can cause unconsciousness and be sure the vehicle will not move.
If unusual fumes are detected or
even death. See Shifting Into Park on page 9‑18
if it is suspected that exhaust is and Engine Exhaust on page 9‑22.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle: If the vehicle has a manual
. The vehicle idles in areas . Drive it only with the windows transmission, see Parking on
with poor ventilation (parking completely down. page 9‑21.
garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired
that may block underbody immediately.
airflow or tail pipes).
Never park the vehicle with the
. The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed
sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a
. The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air
due to corrosion or damage. ventilation.
. The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged,
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
Automatic { WARNING
lever button pressed before shifting
from P (Park) when the ignition key
Transmission It is dangerous to get out of the
is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out
of P (Park), ease pressure on the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully shift lever, then push the shift lever
in P (Park) with the parking brake all the way into P (Park) as you
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. maintain brake application. Then
Do not leave the vehicle when the press the shift lever button and
engine is running. If you have left move the shift lever into another
the engine running, the vehicle gear. See Shifting out of Park on
can move suddenly. You or others page 9‑20.
could be injured. To be sure the R (Reverse): Use this gear to
vehicle will not move, even when back up.
you are on fairly level ground, Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
always set the parking brake and while the vehicle is moving
move the shift lever to P (Park). forward could damage the
The selected gear is also shown in See Shifting Into Park on transmission. The repairs would
the instrument cluster. page 9‑18. not be covered by the vehicle
P (Park): This position locks the warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
drive wheels. It is the best position Make sure the shift lever is fully in after the vehicle is stopped.
to use when starting the engine P (Park) before starting the engine. To rock the vehicle back and forth to
because the vehicle cannot move The vehicle has an automatic get out of snow, ice, or sand without
easily. transmission shift lock control damaging the transmission, see If
system. The regular brake must be the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑9.
fully applied first and then the shift
N (Neutral): In this position, the Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or M (Manual Mode): This position
engine does not connect with the N (Neutral) with the engine allows shifting similar to a manual
wheels. To restart the engine when running at high speed may transmission. See Manual Mode on
the vehicle is already moving, use damage the transmission. The page 9‑25.
N (Neutral) only. Also, use repairs would not be covered by Notice: If the vehicle seems to
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is the vehicle warranty. Be sure the accelerate slowly or not shift
being towed. engine is not running at high gears when you go faster, and
The vehicle has an automatic speed when shifting the vehicle. you continue to drive the vehicle
neutral shift feature which allows the D (Drive): This position is for that way, you could damage the
transmission to automatically shift to normal driving. It provides the best transmission. Have the vehicle
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is fuel economy. If more power is serviced right away.
stopped with a forward gear needed for passing, and the
engaged. The reduced load on the vehicle is:
engine improves vehicle fuel . Going less than 56 km/h
economy. (35 mph), push the accelerator
pedal about halfway down.
{ WARNING . Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or
Shifting into a drive gear while the more, push the accelerator all
engine is running at high speed is the way down.
dangerous. Unless your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly.
You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift
into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed.
Manual Mode 2. Press the + (plus) end of the The transmission will only allow you
button on the side of the shift to shift into gears appropriate for the
Driver Shift Control (DSC) lever to upshift, or push the − vehicle speed and engine
(minus) end of the button to revolutions per minute (rpm):
downshift. . The transmission will not allow
The instrument cluster will change shifting to the next higher gear if
from the currently displayed the vehicle speed or engine rpm
message to the letter “M,” for is too low.
Manual position, and a number . The transmission will not allow
indicating the requested gear. shifting to the next lower gear if
While using the DSC feature, the the vehicle speed or engine rpm
transmission will have firmer shifting is too high.
and sportier performance. This can
be used for sport driving or when
climbing hills to stay in gear longer
or to downshift for more power or
To use this feature: engine braking.
1. Move the shift lever from
D (Drive) rearward to
M (Manual).
While driving in manual mode,
the transmission will remain in
the driver selected gear. When
coming to a stop in the manual
position, the vehicle will
automatically shift into
1 (First) gear.
Manual Transmission 1 (First): Press the clutch pedal To stop, let up on the accelerator
fully to the pedal stop and shift into pedal and press the brake pedal.
The vehicle may be equipped with a 1 (First). Then slowly let up on the Just before the vehicle stops, press
five-speed or six-speed manual clutch pedal as you press the the clutch pedal and the brake
transmission. accelerator pedal. pedal, and shift to Neutral.
Notice: Do not rest your hand on You can shift into 1 (First) when Neutral: Use this position when
the shift lever while driving. The going less than 32 km/h (20 mph). you start or idle the engine. The
pressure could cause premature If you have come to a complete stop shift lever is in Neutral when it is
wear in the transmission. The and it is hard to shift into 1 (First), centered in the shift pattern, not in
repairs would not be covered by put the shift lever in Neutral and let any gear.
the vehicle warranty. up on the clutch. Press the clutch
Notice: Do not rest your foot on pedal back down. Then shift into
the clutch pedal while driving or 1 (First).
while stopped. The pressure can 2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal
cause premature wear in the as you let up on the accelerator
clutch. The repairs would not be pedal and shift into 2 (Second).
covered by the vehicle warranty. Then, slowly let up on the clutch
Notice: Shifting the vehicle pedal as you press the accelerator
initially into any gear other than pedal.
1 (First) or R (Reverse) can 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and
damage the clutch. Shift the 6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third),
manual transmission in the 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and 6 (Sixth)
proper sequence, and time the (if equipped) the same way as for
gear shifting with the accelerator 2 (Second). Slowly let up on the
R (Reverse): To engage reverse,
to avoid revving the engine and clutch pedal as you press the
with the vehicle stationary, pull up
damaging the clutch. accelerator pedal.
on the button on the selector lever
and engage the gear. If the gear
does not engage, set the lever in Up-Shift Light Drive Systems
neutral, release the clutch pedal and
apply it again; then repeat gear
selection. All-Wheel Drive
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) If the vehicle has active on demand
while the vehicle is moving All-Wheel Drive (AWD), the AWD
forward could damage the system operates automatically
transmission. The repairs would without any action required by the
not be covered by the vehicle Vehicles equipped with a manual driver. If the front drive wheels begin
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only transmission may have an up-shift to slip, the rear wheels will
after the vehicle is stopped. light. This light indicates when to automatically begin to drive the
shift to the next higher gear for vehicle as required. There may be a
Shift Speeds better fuel economy. slight engagement noise during hard
use but this is normal.
For the best fuel economy,
{ WARNING accelerate slowly and shift when the The vehicle may display a Driver
light comes on, and if the weather, Information Center (DIC) message.
If you skip a gear when you The message indicates that there is
downshift, you could lose control road, and traffic conditions allow.
a malfunction in the AWD system.
of the vehicle. You could injure It is normal for the light to go on and If this happens, the vehicle should
yourself or others. Do not shift off if the accelerator position be serviced. When TCS/StabiliTrak®
down more than one gear at a changes quickly. Ignore the light is activated on icy or slippery roads,
time when you downshift. during downshifts. AWD may be deactivated. This is
not displayed in the DIC. See
Vehicle Messages on page 5‑27.
Brakes If driving safely on a wet road and it suddenly slows or stops. Always
becomes necessary to slam on the leave enough room up ahead to
brakes and continue braking to stop, even with ABS.
Antilock Brake avoid a sudden obstacle, a
System (ABS) computer senses that the wheels Using ABS
are slowing down. If one of the Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
wheels is about to stop rolling, the the brake pedal down firmly and let
System (ABS), an advanced
computer will separately work the ABS work. You might hear the ABS
electronic braking system that helps
brakes at each wheel. pump or motor operating and feel
prevent a braking skid.
ABS can change the brake pressure the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
When the engine is started and the normal.
to each wheel, as required, faster
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
than any driver could. This can help Braking in Emergencies
checks itself. A momentary motor or
the driver steer around the obstacle
clicking noise might be heard while ABS allows the driver to steer and
while braking hard.
this test is going on, and it might brake at the same time. In many
even be noticed that the brake As the brakes are applied, the emergencies, steering can help
pedal moves a little. This is normal. computer keeps receiving updates more than even the very best
on wheel speed and controls braking.
braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you,
If there is a problem with ABS, this there will not be enough time to
warning light stays on. See Antilock apply the brakes if that vehicle
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑17.
Parking Brake Notice: Driving with the parking Minor brake pedal pulsation or
brake on can overheat the brake pedal movement during this time is
system and cause premature normal and the driver should
wear or damage to brake system continue to apply the brake pedal as
parts. Make sure that the parking the driving situation dictates.
brake is fully released and the The brake assist feature will
brake warning light is off before automatically disengage when the
driving. brake pedal is released or brake
pedal pressure is quickly
Brake Assist decreased.
This vehicle has a brake assist
feature designed to assist the driver
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
in stopping or decreasing vehicle This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist
speed in emergency driving (HSA) feature, which may be useful
To set the parking brake, hold the conditions. This feature uses the when the vehicle is stopped on a
brake pedal down and pull up on the stability system hydraulic brake grade. This feature is designed to
parking brake lever. If the ignition is control module to supplement the prevent the vehicle from rolling,
on, the brake system warning light power brake system under either forward or rearward, during
will come on. See Brake System conditions where the driver has vehicle drive off. After the driver
Warning Light on page 5‑16. quickly and forcefully applied the completely stops and holds the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly vehicle in a complete standstill on a
To release the parking brake, hold stop or slow down the vehicle. The grade, HSA will be automatically
the brake pedal down. Pull the stability system hydraulic brake activated.
parking brake lever up until you can control module increases brake
press the release button. Hold the pressure at each corner of the
release button in as you move the vehicle until the ABS activates.
brake lever all the way down.
During the transition period between Ride Control Systems conditions, the system should
when the driver releases the brake always be left on. But, TCS can be
pedal and starts to accelerate to turned off if needed.
drive off on a grade, HSA holds the Traction Control
braking pressure to ensure that System (TCS)
there is no rolling. The brakes will
The vehicle has a Traction Control
automatically release when the
System (TCS) that limits wheel spin.
accelerator pedal is applied within
On a front-wheel-drive vehicle, the
the two-second window. It will not
system operates if it senses that
activate if the vehicle is in a drive
one or both of the front wheels are TCS/StabiliTrak Light
gear and facing downhill, or if the
spinning or beginning to lose d flashes to indicate that the
vehicle is facing uphill and in
traction. On an All-Wheel-Drive traction control system is active.
R (Reverse).
(AWD) vehicle, the system will
operate if it senses that any of the If there is a problem detected with
wheels are spinning or beginning to TCS, d comes on and stays on, the
lose traction. When this happens, vehicle is safe to drive but the
the system brakes the spinning system is not operational. Driving
wheel(s), and/or reduces engine should be adjusted accordingly.
power to limit wheel spin.
If d comes on and stays on, reset
The system may be heard or felt the system:
while it is working, but this is
normal. 1. Stop the vehicle.
TCS is on whenever the vehicle is 2. Turn the engine off and wait
started. To limit wheel spin, 15 seconds.
especially in slippery road 3. Start the engine.
If d still comes on and stays on at a Press the cruise control button to

speed above 20 km/h (13 mph), see reengage when road conditions
your dealer for service. allow. See Cruise Control on
page 9‑34.
A chime may also sound when the
light comes on steady. Adding non-GM accessories can
affect the vehicle performance. See
Notice: Do not repeatedly brake TCS Off Light Accessories and Modifications on
or accelerate heavily when TCS is TCS can be turned off by pressing page 10‑3.
off. The vehicle's driveline could
and releasing g. When TCS is
be damaged.
turned off, i comes on and the
StabiliTrak® System
system will not limit wheel spin. The vehicle has a vehicle stability
Driving should be adjusted enhancement system called
accordingly. Press and release g StabiliTrak. It is an advanced
again to turn the system back on. computer controlled system that
assists with directional control of the
It may be necessary to turn the vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
system off if the vehicle gets stuck
in sand, mud, or snow and rocking StabiliTrak activates when the
the vehicle is required. See If the computer senses a difference
Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑9 for between the intended path, and the
more information. See also Winter direction the vehicle is actually
Driving on page 9‑7 for information traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
TCS/StabiliTrak Button on using TCS when driving in snowy applies braking pressure at any one
or icy conditions. of the vehicle's brakes to help steer
g is on the center stack. the vehicle in the intended direction.
If cruise control is being used when
TCS activates, cruise control will
automatically disengage.
StabiliTrak is on automatically If d comes on and stays on, reset

whenever the vehicle is started. To the system:
assist with directional control of the
vehicle, the system should always 1. Stop the vehicle.
be left on. 2. Turn the engine off and wait
15 seconds.
StabiliTrak Off TCS Off Light
3. Start the engine.
Light
If d still comes on and stays on at a
speed above 20 km/h (13 mph), see StabiliTrak can be turned off if
your dealer for service. needed by pressing and holding g
TCS/StabiliTrak Light until g and i come on in the
When the stability control system instrument cluster. When StabiliTrak
is turned off, the system will not
activates, d flashes on in the
assist with directional control of the
instrument cluster. This also occurs
vehicle or limit wheel spin. TCS will
when traction control is activated.
also be turned off. Driving should be
A noise may be heard or vibration
adjusted accordingly. Press and
may be felt in the brake pedal. This
is normal. Continue to steer the release g again to turn both
vehicle in the intended direction. systems back on.
If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak will automatically turn
back on when the vehicle speed
StabiliTrak, d comes on and stays
exceeds 50 km/h (31 mph).
on. The vehicle is safe to drive, but TCS/StabiliTrak Button
the system is not operational.
Driving should be adjusted
g is on the center stack.
accordingly.
If cruise control is being used when DCS will not activate at speeds
StabiliTrak activates, cruise control above 35 km/h (22 mph), even if the
will automatically disengage. Press button is pressed.
the cruise control button to Notice
reengage when road conditions
. DCS is designed for driving
allow. See Cruise Control on
page 9‑34. down steep off-road hills.
. Unnecessary use of DCS can
Descent Control cause malfunctions in the
System (DCS) brake system or StabiliTrak.
The Descent Control System (DCS)
. Some noise or vibration from
allows the vehicle to travel at a low the brake system may be
speed without applying the brake. Turn the system on by pressing the heard or felt when DCS is
DCS button located on the center active. This is normal.
The vehicle will automatically stack. The green DCS light comes
decelerate to a low speed and To turn the system off, press the
on steady in the instrument cluster
remain there when DCS is DCS button again and the DCS light
when the system is on.
turned on. turns off. Applying the brake or
accelerator will also cause DCS to
Use only when descending steep turn off.
grades while driving off-road. Do not
use when driving on normal road
surfaces.
The green DCS light flashes on the

instrument cluster while driving at
speeds below 35 km/h (22 mph) to
show the system is operating.
Cruise Control { WARNING

For vehicles with cruise control, the
vehicle can maintain a speed of Cruise control can be dangerous
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more where you cannot drive safely at
without keeping your foot on the a steady speed. So, do not use
accelerator. Cruise control does not the cruise control on winding
work at speeds below 40 km/h roads or in heavy traffic.
(25 mph). Cruise control can be dangerous
If the brakes are applied, the cruise on slippery roads. On such roads,
control shuts off. fast changes in tire traction can
If the vehicle's Traction Control cause excessive wheel slip, and
System (TCS) or StabiliTrak system you could lose control. Do not use
begins to limit wheel spin while cruise control on slippery roads. 1 (On/Off): Press to turn the
cruise control system on and off.
using cruise control, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. RES/+ (Resume/Accelerate):
See Traction Control System (TCS) Move the thumbwheel up to resume
on page 9‑30 or StabiliTrak® System a previously set speed or to
on page 9‑31. When road conditions accelerate.
allow you to safely use it again, the SET/− (Set/Coast): Move the
cruise control can be turned thumbwheel down to set a speed or
back on. to make the vehicle decelerate.
* (Cancel): Press to disengage
cruise control without erasing the
set speed from memory.
Setting Cruise Control briefly. The vehicle returns to the

. To slow down in small amounts,
speed selected previously and move the thumbwheel toward
If 1 is on when not in use, it could stays there. SET/− briefly. Each time this is
get bumped and go into cruise when done, the vehicle goes about
not desired. Keep 1 off when cruise Increasing Speed While Using 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
Cruise Control
control is not being used. Passing Another Vehicle While
If the cruise control system is Using Cruise Control
To set cruise control:
already activated:
1. Press 1. Use the accelerator pedal to
. Move the thumbwheel up toward increase the vehicle speed. When
2. Get to the speed desired. RES/+ and hold it until the you take your foot off the pedal, the
desired speed is reached, then vehicle slows down to the previous
3. Move the thumbwheel down to release it.
SET/- and release it. set cruise control speed.
. To increase the speed in small
4. Take your foot off the accelerator Using Cruise Control on Hills
amounts, move the thumbwheel
pedal. up toward RES/+ briefly and How well cruise control works on
Resuming a Set Speed then release it. Each time this is hills depends on the vehicle speed,
done, the vehicle goes about load, and the steepness of the hills.
If the cruise control is set at a 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster. When going up steep hills, you
desired speed and then the brakes might have to step on the
or clutch for manual transmissions Reducing Speed While Using accelerator pedal to maintain the
are applied, the cruise control is Cruise Control vehicle speed. When going
disengaged without erasing the set If the cruise control system is downhill, you might have to brake or
speed from memory. already activated: shift to a lower gear to maintain the
Once the vehicle reaches about vehicle speed. When the brakes are
. Move the thumbwheel toward
40 km/h (25 mph) or more, move the applied, cruise control is
SET/− and hold until the desired
thumbwheel up toward RES/+ disengaged.
lower speed is reached, then
release it.
Ending Cruise Control Object Detection WARNING (Continued)

There are three ways to end cruise
control:
Systems damage, even with URPA, always
. To disengage cruise control, check the area around the vehicle
Ultrasonic Parking Assist and check all mirrors before
step lightly on the brake pedal or
clutch for manual transmission. For vehicles with the Ultrasonic backing.
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
. Press * on the steering wheel. it assists the driver with parking and
avoiding objects while in How the System Works
. To turn off cruise control, press
1 on the steering wheel. R (Reverse). URPA operates at URPA comes on automatically when
speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph), the shift lever is moved into
Erasing Speed Memory and the sensors on the rear bumper R (Reverse).
The cruise control set speed is detect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft)
URPA operates only at speeds less
behind the vehicle, and at least
erased from memory if the 1 button than 8 km/h (5 mph).
20 cm (8 in) off the ground.
is pressed or if the ignition is An obstacle is indicated by audible
turned off.
{ WARNING beeps. The interval between the
beeps becomes shorter as the
The URPA system does not vehicle gets closer to the obstacle.
detect children, pedestrians, When the distance is less than
bicyclists, animals, or objects 40 cm (16 in) the beeping is a
below the bumper or that are too continuous tone for five seconds.
close or too far from the vehicle. To be detected, objects must be at
It is not available at speeds least 20 cm (8 in) off the ground and
greater than 8 km/h (5 mph). To below liftgate level. Objects must
prevent injury, death, or vehicle also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from the
(Continued)

. The park assist sensors are
rear bumper. The distance objects
covered by frost or ice. Frost or
Rear Vision
can be detected may be less during
warmer or humid weather. ice can form around and behind Camera (RVC)
the sensors and may not always The vehicle may have an RVC
Turning the System On and Off be seen; this can occur after system. Read this entire section
The URPA system can be turned on washing the vehicle in cold before using it.
and off using the infotainment weather. The light may not clear
until the frost or ice has melted. The RVC can assist the driver when
system controls. See Vehicle backing up by displaying a view of
Personalization on page 5‑27 for . A trailer was attached to the the area behind the vehicle.
more information. vehicle, or an object was
hanging out of the liftgate during
When the System Does Not the last drive cycle. Once the { WARNING
Seem to Work Properly object is removed, URPA will The RVC system does not display
return to normal operation. children, pedestrians, bicyclists,
. A tow bar is attached to the animals, or any other object
vehicle. located outside the camera's field
. The bumper is damaged. Take of view, below the bumper,
the vehicle to your dealer to or under the vehicle. Perceived
repair the system. distances may be different from
This light may come on for the actual distances. Do not back the
. Other conditions, such as
following reasons: vehicle using only the RVC
vibrations from a jackhammer or
the compression of air brakes on screen, during longer, higher
. The ultrasonic sensors are not speed backing maneuvers,
clean. Keep the vehicle's rear a very large truck, are affecting
system performance. or where there could be
bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
cross traffic.
ice, and slush. For cleaning If the above conditions do not exist,
instructions, see Exterior Care take the vehicle to your dealer to (Continued)
on page 10‑74. repair the system.
To cancel the delay, do one of the Rear Vision Camera Location

WARNING (Continued) following:
. Press a hard key on the
Failure to use proper care before
infotainment system.
backing may result in injury,
. Shift into P (Park).
death, or vehicle damage. Always
check behind and around the . Reach a vehicle speed of
vehicle before backing. 8 km/h (5 mph).
Turning the Rear Vision Camera
An image appears on the radio System On or Off
screen with the message Check
Surroundings for Safety when the To turn the rear vision camera
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). system on or off, press the CAM
The radio screen goes to the button on the infotainment system.
previous screen after approximately The camera is located above the
10 seconds once the vehicle is license plate.
shifted out of R (Reverse).
The area displayed by the camera is
limited.
It does not display objects that are

. The sun or the beam of
close to either corner or under the headlights is shining directly into
bumper and can vary depending on the camera lens.
vehicle orientation or road . Ice, snow, mud, or anything else
conditions. The distance of the builds up on the camera lens.
image that appears on the screen is Clean the lens, rinse it with
different from the actual distance. water, and wipe it with a soft
The following illustration shows the cloth.
field of view that the camera . The back of the vehicle is in an
1. View displayed by the camera.
provides. accident, the position and
2. Corner of the rear bumper. mounting angle of the camera
When the System Does Not can change or the camera can
Seem To Work Properly be affected. Be sure to have the
camera and its position and
The RVC system may not work mounting angle checked at
properly or display a clear image if: your dealer.
. The RVC is turned off. See . There are extreme temperature
“Turning the Rear Vision Camera changes.
System On or Off” earlier in this
section.
. It is dark.
1. View displayed by the camera.

Fuel Gasoline Specifications

Use of the recommended fuel is At a minimum, gasoline should
an important part of the proper meet ASTM specification D 4814.
maintenance of this vehicle. To help Some gasolines contain an
keep the engine clean and maintain octane-enhancing additive called
optimum vehicle performance, we methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
recommend the use of gasoline tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent against the use of gasolines
Gasoline. containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
on page 9‑41.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
enhanced detergency standards
California Fuel
developed by auto companies. A list Recommended Fuel Requirements
of marketers providing TOP TIER Use regular unleaded gasoline with If the vehicle is certified to meet
Detergent Gasoline can be found at a posted octane rating of 87 or California Emissions Standards, it is
www.toptiergas.com. TOP TIER higher. If the octane rating is less designed to operate on fuels that
gasoline is only available in the than 87, an audible knocking noise, meet California specifications. See
U.S. and Canada. commonly referred to as spark the underhood emission control
knock, might be heard when driving. label. If this fuel is not available in
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated states adopting California Emissions
at 87 octane or higher as soon as Standards, the vehicle will operate
possible. If heavy knocking is heard satisfactorily on fuels meeting
when using gasoline rated at federal specifications, but emission
87 octane or higher, the engine control system performance might
needs service. be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on Fuel Additives See Recommended Fluids and
page 5‑13. If this occurs, return to Lubricants on page 11‑13 for
your authorized dealer for diagnosis. Gasoline should contain detergent more information.
If it is determined that the condition additives that help prevent engine
and fuel system deposits from Notice: This vehicle was not
is caused by the type of fuel used, designed for fuel that contains
repairs might not be covered by the forming. Clean fuel injectors and
intake valves will allow the emission methanol. Do not use fuel
vehicle warranty. containing methanol. It can
control system to work properly.
Some gasoline does not contain corrode metal parts in the fuel
Fuels in Foreign sufficient quantities of additive to system and also damage plastic
Countries keep fuel injectors and intake valves and rubber parts. That damage
clean. To make up for this lack of would not be covered under the
Never use leaded gasoline or any
detergency, it is recommended that vehicle warranty.
other fuel not recommended in the
previous text on fuel. Costly repairs GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS Some gasolines can contain an
caused by use of improper fuel (GM Part No. 88861011) be added octane-enhancing additive called
would not be covered by the vehicle to the fuel tank at every engine oil methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
warranty. change or every 15 000 km, tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
whichever occurs first. where you buy gasoline whether the
To check the fuel availability, ask an
Gasolines containing oxygenates, fuel contains MMT. We recommend
auto club, or contact a major oil
such as ethers and ethanol, may against the use of such gasolines.
company that does business in the
be available in your area. Fuels containing MMT can reduce
country where you will be driving.
However, fuels containing more spark plug life and affect emission
than 15% ethanol, such as control system performance. The
E85 (85% ethanol), or more malfunction indicator lamp might
than 15% MTBE (an ether) should turn on. If this occurs, return to your
not be used in vehicles that were dealer for service.
not designed for those fuels.
Filling the Tank WARNING (Continued)

{ WARNING . Keep children away from the
Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn fuel pump and never let
violently and can cause injury or children pump fuel.
death. . Fuel can spray out if the fuel
. To help avoid injuries to you cap is opened too quickly.
and others, read and follow This spray can happen if the
all the instructions on the fuel tank is nearly full, and is
pump island. more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and
. Turn off the engine when To open the fuel door, push the
wait for any hiss noise to stop
refueling. rearward center edge in and release
then unscrew the cap all
. Keep sparks, flames, and the way and it will open.
smoking materials away To remove the fuel cap, turn it
from fuel. slowly counterclockwise. The fuel
The tethered fuel cap is located
. Do not leave the fuel pump behind a hinged fuel door on the cap has a spring in it; if the cap is
unattended. right rear side of the vehicle. If released too soon, it will spring back
equipped, the fuel door is locked to the right.
. Do not reenter the vehicle
while pumping fuel. when the vehicle doors are locked. While refueling, hang the tethered
(Continued) Press K on the RKE to unlock. fuel cap from the hook on the
fuel door.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not Notice: If a new fuel cap is

top off or overfill the tank and wait a needed, be sure to get the right WARNING (Continued)
few seconds after you have finished type of cap from your dealer. The
pumping before removing the wrong type of fuel cap might not Always:
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted fit properly, might cause the . Use approved fuel
surfaces as soon as possible. See malfunction indicator lamp to containers.
Exterior Care on page 10‑74. light, and could damage the fuel
tank and emissions system. See
. Remove container from
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it vehicle, trunk, or pickup bed
clockwise until it clicks. Make sure Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑13. before filling.
the cap is fully installed. The
. Place container on the
diagnostic system can determine if
the fuel cap has been left off or Filling a Portable Fuel ground.
improperly installed. This would Container . Place the nozzle inside the fill
allow fuel to evaporate into the opening of the container
atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 5‑13.
{ WARNING before dispensing fuel, and
keep it in contact with the fill
Filling a portable fuel container opening until filling is
{ WARNING while it is in the vehicle can cause complete.
fuel vapors that can ignite either . Do not smoke while
If a fire starts while you are by static electricity or other pumping fuel.
refueling, do not remove the means. You or others could be
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by badly burned and the vehicle
shutting off the pump or by could be damaged.
notifying the station attendant.
(Continued)
Leave the area immediately.
Towing Conversions and The vehicle has an airbag system.

Before attempting to add anything
Add-Ons electrical to the vehicle, see
General Towing Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Information Add-On Electrical Vehicle on page 3‑36 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
The vehicle is neither designed nor Equipment Vehicle on page 3‑36.
intended to tow a trailer.
Notice: Some electrical
equipment can damage the
vehicle or cause components to
not work and would not be
covered by the warranty. Always
check with your dealer before
adding electrical equipment.
Add-on equipment can drain the
vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the
vehicle is not operating.
Vehicle Care 10-1
Vehicle Care Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-13
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Bulb Replacement
General Information Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-18 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Power Steering Fluid (1.4L Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
California Proposition L4 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Headlamps, Front Turn
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Power Steering Fluid (1.8L Signal and Parking
California Perchlorate L4 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Accessories and Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 and Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . 10-30
Vehicle Checks Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-31
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Doing Your Own
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-24 Electrical System
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Automatic Transmission Shift
Electrical System
Engine Compartment Lock Control Function
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Fuses and Circuit
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Ignition Transmission Lock
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-11 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Engine Compartment Fuse
Automatic Transmission Park Brake and P (Park)
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-26
Instrument Panel Fuse
Manual Transmission Wiper Blade
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
10-2 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires Uniform Tire Quality General Information

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Wheel Alignment and Tire For service and parts needs, visit
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 your dealer. You will receive
Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-60 genuine GM parts and GM-trained
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-42 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60 and supported service people.
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-61 Genuine GM parts have one of
Tire Terminology and Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 these marks:
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-67
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-67
Tire Pressure Monitor
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49 Jump Starting
Tire Pressure Monitor Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Towing
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Recreational Vehicle
When It Is Time for New Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 Appearance Care
Different Size Tires and Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Vehicle Care 10-3
California Proposition Accessories and GM Accessories are designed to

complement and function with other
65 Warning Modifications systems on the vehicle. See your
Most motor vehicles, including this Adding non‐dealer accessories or dealer to accessorize the vehicle
one, contain and/or emit chemicals making modifications to the vehicle using genuine GM Accessories
known to the State of California to can affect vehicle performance and installed by a dealer technician.
cause cancer and birth defects or safety, including such things as Also, see Adding Equipment to the
other reproductive harm. Engine airbags, braking, stability, ride and Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
exhaust, many parts and systems, handling, emissions systems, page 3‑36.
many fluids, and some component aerodynamics, durability, and
wear by-products contain and/or electronic systems like antilock
emit these chemicals. brakes, traction control, and stability
control. These accessories or
California Perchlorate modifications could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
Materials Requirements by the vehicle warranty.
Certain types of automotive
Damage to vehicle components
applications, such as airbag
resulting from modifications or the
initiators, safety belt pretensioners,
installation or use of non‐GM
and lithium batteries contained in
certified parts, including control
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
module or software modifications, is
may contain perchlorate materials.
not covered under the terms of the
Special handling may be necessary.
vehicle warranty and may affect
For additional information, see
remaining warranty coverage for
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
affected parts.
perchlorate.
10-4 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Checks This vehicle has an airbag system. Hood

Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Servicing the To open the hood:
Doing Your Own Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
Service Work page 3‑36.
Keep a record with all parts receipts
{ WARNING and list the mileage and the date of
any service work performed. See
It can be dangerous to work on Maintenance Records on
your vehicle if you do not have page 11‑16.
the proper knowledge, service
manual, tools, or parts. Always Notice: Even small amounts of
contamination can cause damage
follow owner manual procedures
to vehicle systems. Do not allow
and consult the service manual
contaminants to contact the
for your vehicle before doing any fluids, reservoir caps,
service work. or dipsticks. 1. Pull the hood release handle
inside the vehicle. It is located
If doing some of your own service on the lower left side of the
work, use the proper service instrument panel.
manual. It tells you much more
about how to service the vehicle
than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information
on page 13‑15.
Vehicle Care 10-5
To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, be sure
all filler caps are on properly.
Then, lift the hood to relieve
pressure on the hood prop.
Remove the hood prop from the
slot in the underside of the hood
and return the prop to its
retainer. The prop rod must click
into place when returning it to
the retainer to prevent hood
damage.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and 3. Lift the hood and release the 2. Lower the hood 30 cm (12 in)
move the secondary hood hood prop from its retainer, above the vehicle and release it
release lever toward the right above the radiator. Securely so it fully latches. Check to
side of the vehicle. place the hood prop into the slot make sure the hood is closed
on the underside of the hood. and repeat the process if
necessary.
10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
1.4L L4 Engine
Vehicle Care 10-7
1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on 4. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine 7. Auxiliary Fuse Block. See
page 10‑13. Oil on page 10‑9. Engine Compartment Fuse
2. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine 5. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Block on page 10‑33.
Oil on page 10‑9. Pressure Cap. See Cooling 8. Battery on page 10‑24.
3. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of System on page 10‑15. 9. Windshield Washer Fluid
View). See Cooling System on 6. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir. Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑15. See Brakes on page 10‑21 and page 10‑21.
Hydraulic Clutch on page 10‑13. 10. Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 10‑33.
10-8 Vehicle Care
1.8L L4 Engine
Vehicle Care 10-9
1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on 8. Auxiliary Fuse Block. See

. Check the engine oil level
page 10‑13. Engine Compartment Fuse regularly and maintain the
Block on page 10‑33. proper oil level. See “Checking
2. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. Engine Oil” and “When to Add
See Power Steering Fluid (1.4L 9. Battery on page 10‑24. Engine Oil” in this section.
L4 Engine) on page 10‑20 or 10. Windshield Washer Fluid
Power Steering Fluid (1.8L L4
. Change the engine oil at the
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid appropriate time. See Engine Oil
Engine) on page 10‑20. on page 10‑21. Life System on page 10‑11.
3. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine 11. Engine Compartment Fuse
Oil on page 10‑9.
. Always dispose of engine oil
Block on page 10‑33. properly. See “What to Do with
4. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of Used Oil” in this section.
View). See Cooling System on Engine Oil
page 10‑15. Checking Engine Oil
To ensure proper engine
5. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine performance and long life, careful It is a good idea to check the engine
Oil on page 10‑9. attention must be paid to engine oil. oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
6. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Following these simple, but get an accurate reading, the vehicle
Pressure Cap. See Cooling important steps will help protect must be on level ground. The
System on page 10‑15. your investment: engine oil dipstick handle is a loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview
7. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir. . Always use engine oil approved on page 10‑6 for the location of the
See Brakes on page 10‑21 and to the proper specification and of engine oil dipstick.
Hydraulic Clutch on page 10‑13. the proper viscosity grade. See
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”
in this section.
10-10 Vehicle Care
Obtaining an accurate oil level When to Add Engine Oil should drain out the excess oil or
reading is essential: limit driving of the vehicle and
1. If the engine has been running seek a service professional to
recently, turn off the engine and remove the excess amount of oil.
allow several minutes for the oil See Engine Compartment Overview
to drain back into the oil pan. on page 10‑6 for the location of the
Checking the oil level too soon engine oil fill cap.
after engine shutoff will not Add enough oil to put the level
provide an accurate oil level If the oil is below the MIN mark on somewhere in the proper operating
reading. the dipstick, add 1 L (1 qt) of the range between the MIN and MAX
recommended oil and then recheck marks. Push the dipstick all the way
{ WARNING the level. See “Selecting the Right back in when through.
Engine Oil” in this section for an
The engine oil dipstick handle explanation of what kind of oil to Selecting the Right Engine Oil
may be hot; it could burn you. use. For engine oil crankcase Selecting the right engine oil
Use a towel or glove to touch the capacity, see Capacities and depends on both the proper oil
dipstick handle. Specifications on page 12‑2. specification and viscosity grade.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. See Recommended Fluids and
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it Oil levels above or below the Lubricants on page 11‑13.
with a paper towel or cloth, then acceptable operating range Specification
push it back in all the way. shown on the dipstick are harmful
Remove it again, keeping the to the engine. If you find that you Use and ask for licensed engine oils
tip down, and check the level. have an oil level above the with the dexos1® approved
operating range, i.e., the engine certification mark. Engine oils
has so much oil that the oil level meeting the requirements for the
gets above the MAX mark, the vehicle should have the dexos1
engine could be damaged. You approved certification mark.
Vehicle Care 10-11
This certification mark indicates that used. An oil of this viscosity grade your skin for very long. Clean your
the oil has been approved to the will provide easier cold starting for skin and nails with soap and water,
dexos1 specification. the engine at extremely low or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
temperatures. When selecting an oil properly dispose of clothing or rags
of the appropriate viscosity grade, containing used engine oil. See the
always select an oil of the correct manufacturer's warnings about the
specification. See “Specification” use and disposal of oil products.
earlier in this section for more Used oil can be a threat to the
information. environment. If you change your
Engine Oil Additives/Engine own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
Notice: Failure to use the Oil Flushes from the filter before disposal. Never
recommended engine oil or dispose of oil by putting it in the
equivalent can result in engine Do not add anything to the oil. The trash or pouring it on the ground,
damage not covered by the recommended oils with the dexos into sewers, or into streams or
vehicle warranty. Check with your specification and displaying the bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
dealer or service provider on dexos certification mark are all that it to a place that collects used oil.
whether the oil is approved to the is needed for good performance and
dexos1 specification. engine protection. Engine Oil Life System
Viscosity Grade Engine oil system flushes are not
recommended and could cause When to Change Engine Oil
SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity engine damage not covered by the This vehicle has a computer system
grade for the vehicle. Do not use vehicle warranty. that indicates when to change the
other viscosity grade oils such as engine oil and filter. This is based
SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50. What to Do with Used Oil on a combination of factors which
Cold Temperature Operation: In an Used engine oil contains certain include engine revolutions, engine
area of extreme cold, where the elements that can be unhealthy for temperature, and miles driven.
temperature falls below −29°C your skin and could even cause Based on driving conditions, the
(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be cancer. Do not let used oil stay on mileage at which an oil change is
10-12 Vehicle Care
indicated can vary considerably. For If the system is ever reset Be careful not to reset the oil life
the oil life system to work properly, accidentally, the oil must be display accidentally at any time
the system must be reset every time changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi) other than after the oil is changed.
the oil is changed. since the last oil change. It cannot be reset accurately.
When the system has calculated Remember to reset the oil life If the Code 82 DIC message comes
that oil life has been diminished, it system whenever the oil is changed. back on when the vehicle is started,
indicates that an oil change is How to Reset the Engine Oil the engine oil life system has not
necessary. A Code 82 (change Life System reset. Repeat the procedure.
engine oil soon) DIC message
comes on. See Vehicle Messages Reset the system whenever the Automatic Transmission
on page 5‑27. Change the oil as engine oil is changed so that the
soon as possible within the next system can calculate the next Fluid
1 000 km (600 mi). It is possible that, engine oil change. To reset the How to Check Automatic
if driving under the best conditions, system:
Transmission Fluid
the oil life system might indicate that 1. Press the MENU button to show
an oil change is not necessary for It is not necessary to check the
Remaining Oil Life on the
up to a year. The engine oil and transmission fluid level.
display. This display shows an
filter must be changed at least once A transmission fluid leak is the only
estimate of the oil’s remaining
a year and, at this time, the system reason for fluid loss. If a leak
useful life. If 99% is displayed,
must be reset. Your dealer has occurs, take the vehicle to your
that means that 99% of the
trained service people who will dealer and have it repaired as soon
current oil life remains.
perform this work and reset the as possible.
system. It is also important to check 2. To reset the engine oil life
There is a special procedure for
the oil regularly over the course of system, press the SET/CLR
checking and changing the
an oil drain interval and keep it at button while the oil life display is
transmission fluid. Because this
the proper level. active. After a few seconds,
procedure is difficult, you should
there will be a single chime and
have this done at your dealer.
the oil life will be reset to 100%.
Vehicle Care 10-13
Change the fluid and filter at the When to Check and What Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
intervals listed in Maintenance to Use
Schedule on page 11‑3, and be sure The engine air cleaner/filter is
to use the fluid listed in The common hydraulic clutch and in the engine compartment on the
Recommended Fluids and brake master cylinder fluid reservoir passenger side of the vehicle. See
Lubricants on page 11‑13. is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as Engine Compartment Overview on
indicated on the reservoir cap. See page 10‑6 for more information on
Engine Compartment Overview on location.
Manual Transmission page 10‑6 for reservoir location.
Fluid When to Inspect the Engine Air
How to Check and Add Fluid Cleaner/Filter
It is not necessary to check the
manual transmission fluid level. Visually check the brake/clutch fluid Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
A transmission fluid leak is the only reservoir to make sure the fluid level scheduled maintenance intervals.
reason for fluid loss. If a leak is at the MIN (minimum) line on the See Maintenance Schedule on
occurs, take the vehicle to your side of the reservoir. The brake/ page 11‑3. If you are driving in
dealer and have it repaired as hydraulic clutch fluid system should dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the
soon as possible. be closed and sealed. filter at each engine oil change.
Do not remove the cap to check the How to Inspect the Engine Air
Hydraulic Clutch fluid level or to top‐off the fluid level.
Cleaner/Filter
Remove the cap only when
For vehicles with a manual
necessary to add the proper fluid To inspect the engine air cleaner/
transmission, it is not necessary to
until the level reaches the MIN line. filter, remove the filter from the
regularly check brake/clutch fluid
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to
unless there is a leak suspected.
release loose dust and dirt. If the
Adding fluid will not correct a leak.
filter remains covered with dirt, a
A fluid loss in this system could
new filter is required.
indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired.
10-14 Vehicle Care
To inspect or replace the air cleaner/

filter: { WARNING
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or
others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
1.8L L4 Engine Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is

1. Remove the two screws, tilt the off, dirt can easily get into the
1.4L L4 Engine cover, and slide it out of the engine, which could damage it.
assembly. Always have the air cleaner/filter
in place when you are driving.
2. Inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter.
3. Lower the cover, slide it into the
assembly, then secure with the
two screws.
See Maintenance Schedule on
page 11‑3 for replacement intervals.
Vehicle Care 10-15
Cooling System
{ WARNING
The cooling system allows the
engine to maintain the correct Heater and radiator hoses, and
working temperature. other engine parts, can be very
hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a
leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you
could be burned. Get any leak
1.8L L4 Engine fixed before you drive the vehicle.
1. Engine Cooling Fan (Out
of View) Notice: Using coolant other than
2. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and DEX‐COOL® can cause premature
Pressure Cap engine, heater core, or radiator
1.4L L4 Engine
corrosion. In addition, the engine
1. Engine Cooling Fan (Out coolant may require changing
of View) { WARNING sooner, at the first maintenance
2. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and An electric engine cooling fan service after each 30,000 miles
Pressure Cap under the hood can start up even (50 000 km) or 24 months,
when the engine is not running whichever occurs first. Any
repairs would not be covered by
and can cause injury. Keep
the vehicle warranty. Always use
hands, clothing, and tools away
DEX‐COOL® (silicate‐free) coolant
from any underhood electric fan. in the vehicle.
10-16 Vehicle Care
Engine Coolant WARNING (Continued)

Notice: If improper coolant
mixture, inhibitors, or additives
The cooling system in the vehicle is are used in the vehicle cooling
filled with DEX-COOL engine mixture, the engine could get too system, the engine could
coolant. This coolant is designed to hot but you would not get the overheat and be damaged. Too
remain in the vehicle for 5 years or overheat warning. The engine much water in the mixture can
240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever could catch fire and you or others freeze and crack engine cooling
occurs first. could be burned. Use a 50/ parts. The repairs would not be
The following explains the cooling 50 mixture of clean, drinkable covered by the warranty. Use only
system and how to check and add water and DEX-COOL coolant. the proper mixture of engine
coolant when it is low. If there is a coolant for the cooling system.
problem with engine overheating, Use a 50/50 mixture of clean See Recommended Fluids and
see Engine Overheating on drinkable water and DEX-COOL Lubricants on page 11‑13.
page 10‑18. coolant. This mixture: Never dispose of engine coolant by
What to Use . Gives freezing protection down putting it in the trash, pouring it on
to −37°C (−34°F), outside the ground, or into sewers, streams,
or bodies of water. Have the coolant
{ WARNING temperature.
changed by an authorized service
. Gives boiling protection up to center, familiar with legal
Adding only plain water or some 129°C (265°F), engine requirements regarding used
other liquid to the cooling system temperature. coolant disposal. This will help
can be dangerous. Plain water protect the environment and
and other liquids, can boil before
. Protects against rust and
corrosion. your health.
the proper coolant mixture will.
The coolant warning system is set . Will not damage aluminum parts.
for the proper coolant mixture. . Helps keep the proper engine
With plain water or the wrong temperature.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-17
Checking Coolant If no coolant is visible in the coolant

The vehicle must be on a level
surge tank, add coolant as follows: { WARNING
surface when checking the coolant How to Add Coolant to the Steam and scalding liquids from a
level. Coolant Surge Tank hot cooling system can blow out
It is normal to see coolant moving in and burn you badly. Never turn
Notice: This vehicle has a
the upper coolant hose return line specific coolant fill procedure. the cap when the cooling system,
when the engine is running. Failure to follow this procedure including the surge tank pressure
could cause the engine to cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling
Check to see if coolant is visible in
overheat and be severely system and surge tank pressure
the coolant surge tank. If the coolant
inside the coolant surge tank is damaged. cap to cool.
boiling, do not do anything else until If no problem is found, check to see
it cools down. if coolant is visible in the coolant Notice: In cold weather, water
If coolant is visible but the coolant surge tank. If coolant is visible but can freeze and crack the engine,
level is not at or above the mark the coolant level is not at the radiator, heater core and other
pointed to, add a 50/50 mixture of indicated level mark, add a 50/ parts. Use the recommended
clean drinkable water and 50 mixture of clean, drinkable water coolant and the proper coolant
DEX-COOL coolant. and DEX-COOL coolant at the mixture.
coolant surge tank, but be sure the
Be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done.
cooling system, including the { WARNING
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is
cool before you do it. You can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
10-18 Vehicle Care
2. Keep turning the pressure cap the proper level, repeat Steps 1–
slowly and remove it. 3 and reinstall the pressure cap.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with If the coolant still is not at the proper
the proper DEX-COOL coolant level when the system cools down
mixture to the indicated again, see your dealer.
level mark.
Engine Overheating
4. With the coolant surge tank
pressure cap off, start the The vehicle has an indicator to warn
engine and let it run until you of the engine overheating. See
can feel the upper radiator hose Engine Coolant Temperature
getting hot. Watch out for the Warning Light on page 5‑19.
engine cooling fan. If the decision is made not to lift the
1.4L Engine Shown, 1.8L Engine
Similar By this time, the coolant level hood when this warning appears,
inside the coolant surge tank get service help right away. See
1. Remove the coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level is Roadside Assistance Program
pressure cap when the cooling lower, add more of the proper (Canada) on page 13‑5 or Roadside
system, including the coolant DEX-COOL coolant mixture to Assistance Program (Mexico) on
surge tank pressure cap and the coolant surge tank until the page 13‑7.
upper radiator hose, is no level reaches the indicated
longer hot. If the decision is made to lift the
level mark. hood, make sure the vehicle is
Turn the pressure cap slowly 5. Replace the pressure cap. parked on a level surface.
counterclockwise about Be sure the pressure cap is
one-quarter of a turn. If you hear Then check to see if the engine
hand-tight. cooling fan is running. If the engine
a hiss, wait for that to stop. This
will allow any pressure still left to Check the level in the coolant surge is overheating, the fan should be
be vented out the tank when the cooling system has running. If it is not, do not continue
discharge hose. cooled down. If the coolant is not at to run the engine. Have the vehicle
serviced.
Vehicle Care 10-19
Notice: Running the engine 3. In heavy traffic, let the engine

without coolant may cause WARNING (Continued) idle in N (Neutral) for an
damage or a fire. Vehicle damage automatic transmission or
would not be covered by the engine if it overheats, and get out Neutral for a manual
warranty. of the vehicle until the engine transmission while stopped. If it
is cool. is safe to do so, pull off the road,
If Steam Is Coming from the shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) for
Engine Compartment an automatic transmission or
If No Steam Is Coming from
the Engine Compartment Neutral for a manual
{ WARNING If an engine overheat warning is
transmission, and let the
engine idle.
Steam from an overheated engine displayed but no steam can be seen
or heard, the problem may not be If the overheat warning no longer
can burn you badly, even if you
too serious. Sometimes the engine displays, the vehicle can be driven.
just open the hood. Stay away
can get a little too hot when the Continue to drive the vehicle slowly
from the engine if you see or hear for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
steam coming from it. Just turn it vehicle:
vehicle distance from the vehicle in
off and get everyone away from . Climbs a long hill on a hot day. front. If the warning does not come
the vehicle until it cools down. back on, continue to drive normally.
. Stops after high-speed driving.
Wait until there is no sign of
steam or coolant before you open . Idles for long periods in traffic. If the warning continues, pull over,
stop, and park the vehicle
the hood. If the overheat warning is displayed right away.
If you keep driving when the with no sign of steam:
If there is no sign of steam, idle the
engine is overheated, the liquids 1. Turn the air conditioning off. engine for three minutes while
in it can catch fire. You or others parked. If the warning is still
2. Turn the heater on to the highest
could be badly burned. Stop the temperature and to the highest displayed, turn off the engine until it
(Continued) fan speed. Open the windows as cools down.
necessary.
10-20 Vehicle Care
Power Steering Fluid A fluid loss in this system could

indicate a problem. Have the
(1.4L L4 Engine) system inspected and repaired.
The vehicle has electric power
steering and does not use power How to Check Power Steering
steering fluid. Fluid
Check the level after the vehicle has
Power Steering Fluid been driven for at least 20 minutes
(1.8L L4 Engine) so the fluid is warm.
To check the power steering fluid:
1. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF
and let the engine compartment
When the engine is hot, the level
cool down.
should be at the hot MAX level.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the When the engine is cold, the fluid
reservoir clean. level should be between MIN and
See Engine Compartment Overview 3. Unscrew the cap and pull it MAX on the dipstick.
on page 10‑6 for information on the straight up. What to Use
location of the power steering fluid 4. Wipe the dipstick with a
reservoir. To determine what kind of fluid to
clean rag. use, see Recommended Fluids and
When to Check Power Steering 5. Replace the cap and completely Lubricants on page 11‑13. Always
Fluid tighten it. use the proper fluid.
It is not necessary to regularly 6. Remove the cap again and look
check power steering fluid unless a at the fluid level on the dipstick.
leak is suspected in the system or
an unusual noise is heard.
Vehicle Care 10-21
Washer Fluid Notice Brakes

. When using concentrated This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc
What to Use washer fluid, follow the brake pads have built-in wear
When the vehicle needs windshield manufacturer instructions for indicators that make a high-pitched
washer fluid, be sure to read the adding water. warning sound when the brake pads
manufacturer's instructions before . Do not mix water with are worn and new pads are needed.
use. If operating the vehicle in an The sound can come and go or be
ready-to-use washer fluid.
area where the temperature may fall heard all the time the vehicle is
Water can cause the solution
below freezing, use a fluid that has to freeze and damage the moving, except when applying the
sufficient protection against washer fluid tank and other brake pedal firmly.
freezing.
parts of the washer system.
Adding Washer Fluid . Fill the washer fluid tank only { WARNING
three-quarters full when it is
very cold. This allows for The brake wear warning sound
fluid expansion if freezing means that soon the brakes will
occurs, which could damage not work well. That could lead to
the tank if it is a crash. When the brake wear
completely full. warning sound is heard, have the
vehicle serviced.
. Do not use engine coolant
Open the cap with the washer (antifreeze) in the windshield
symbol on it. Add washer fluid until washer. It can damage the Notice: Continuing to drive with
the tank is full. See Engine windshield washer system worn-out brake pads could result
Compartment Overview on and paint. in costly brake repair.
page 10‑6 for reservoir location.
10-22 Vehicle Care
Some driving conditions or climates Replacing Brake System Parts location of the reservoir. The fluid
can cause a brake squeal when the level must be between the MIN and
The braking system on a vehicle is
brakes are first applied or lightly MAX marks.
complex. Its many parts have to be
applied. This does not mean
of top quality and work well together
something is wrong with the brakes.
if the vehicle is to have really good
Properly torqued wheel nuts are braking. The vehicle was designed
necessary to help prevent brake and tested with top-quality brake
pulsation. When tires are rotated, parts. When parts of the braking
inspect brake pads for wear and system are replaced, be sure to get
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the new, approved replacement parts.
proper sequence to torque If this is not done, the brakes might
specifications in Capacities and not work properly. For example,
Specifications on page 12‑2. installing disc brake pads that are
Brake linings should always be wrong for the vehicle, can change
replaced as complete axle sets. the balance between the front and
rear brakes — for the worse. The
Brake Pedal Travel braking performance expected can There are only two reasons why the
See your dealer if the brake pedal change in many other ways if the fluid level in the reservoir might
does not return to normal height, wrong replacement brake parts are go down:
or if there is a rapid increase in installed. . The fluid level goes down
pedal travel. This could be a sign because of normal brake lining
that brake service might be Brake Fluid wear. When new linings are
required. The brake/clutch master cylinder installed, the fluid level goes
reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake back up.
Brake Adjustment
fluid as indicated on the reservoir . A fluid leak in the brake/clutch
Every time the brakes are applied, cap. See Engine Compartment hydraulic system can also cause
with or without the vehicle moving, Overview on page 10‑6 for the a low fluid level. Have the brake/
the brakes adjust for wear.
Vehicle Care 10-23
clutch hydraulic system fixed, When the brake fluid falls to a low Notice
since a leak means that sooner level, the brake warning light comes . Using the wrong fluid can
or later the brakes will not on. See Brake System Warning badly damage brake/clutch
work well. Light on page 5‑16. hydraulic system parts. For
Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid. What to Add example, just a few drops of
Adding fluid does not correct a leak. mineral-based oil, such as
If fluid is added when the linings are Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid engine oil, in the brake
worn, there will be too much fluid from a sealed container. See hydraulic system can
when new brake linings are Recommended Fluids and damage brake hydraulic
installed. Add or remove fluid, as Lubricants on page 11‑13. system parts so badly that
necessary, only when work is done Always clean the brake fluid they will have to be replaced.
on the brake/clutch hydraulic reservoir cap and the area around Do not let someone put in
system. the cap before removing it. This the wrong kind of fluid.
helps keep dirt from entering the . If brake fluid is spilled on the
{ WARNING reservoir. vehicle's painted surfaces,
the paint finish can be
If too much brake fluid is added, it { WARNING damaged. Be careful not to
can spill on the engine and burn, spill brake fluid on the
if the engine is hot enough. You With the wrong kind of fluid in the vehicle. If you do, wash it
or others could be burned, and brake/clutch hydraulic system, the off immediately.
the vehicle could be damaged. brakes might not work well. This
Add brake fluid only when work is could cause a crash. Always use
done on the brake/clutch the proper brake/clutch fluid.
hydraulic system.
10-24 Vehicle Care
Battery Infrequent Usage: Remove the Starter Switch Check

black, negative (−) cable from the
Refer to the replacement number on battery to keep the battery from
the original battery label when a running down. { WARNING
new battery is needed.
Extended Storage: Remove the When you are doing this
black, negative (−) cable from the inspection, the vehicle could
{ WARNING battery or use a battery trickle move suddenly. If the vehicle
Battery posts, terminals, and charger. moves, you or others could
related accessories contain lead be injured.
and lead compounds, chemicals All-Wheel Drive
known to the State of California to Transfer Case 1. Before starting this check, be
cause cancer and reproductive sure there is enough room
harm. Wash hands after handling. Under normal driving conditions, around the vehicle.
transfer case fluid does not require
changing or checking unless there 2. Firmly apply both the parking
Vehicle Storage is a fluid leak or unusual noise. brake and the regular brake.
If required, have the transfer case See Parking Brake on
{ WARNING serviced by your dealer. page 9‑29.
Do not use the accelerator
Batteries have acid that can burn pedal, and be ready to turn off
you and gas that can explode. the engine immediately if it
You can be badly hurt if you are starts.
not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 10‑68 for tips on working
around a battery without
getting hurt.
Vehicle Care 10-25
3. For automatic transmission Automatic Transmission 3. With the engine off, turn the
vehicles, try to start the engine ignition on, but do not start the
in each gear. The vehicle
Shift Lock Control engine. Without applying the
should start only in P (Park) or Function Check regular brake, try to move the
N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts shift lever out of P (Park) with
in any other position, contact
your dealer for service.
{ WARNING normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact
For manual transmission When you are doing this your dealer for service.
vehicles, put the shift lever in inspection, the vehicle could
Neutral, push the clutch pedal move suddenly. If the vehicle Ignition Transmission
down halfway, and try to start moves, you or others could be Lock Check
the engine. The vehicle should injured.
While parked, and with the parking
start only when the clutch pedal
brake set, try to turn the ignition to
is pushed down all the way to 1. Before starting this check, be LOCK/OFF in each shift lever
the floor. If the vehicle starts sure there is enough room position.
when the clutch pedal is not around the vehicle. It should be
pushed all the way down, parked on a level surface.
. The ignition should turn to
contact your dealer for service. LOCK/OFF only when the shift
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. lever is in P (Park).
See Parking Brake on
page 9‑29.
. The ignition key should come
out only in LOCK/OFF.
Be ready to apply the regular
brake immediately if the vehicle Contact your dealer if service is
begins to move. required.
10-26 Vehicle Care

. To check the P (Park)
Park Brake and P (Park) mechanism's holding ability:
Front Wiper Blade
Mechanism Check Replacement
With the engine running, shift to
P (Park). Then release the To replace the front wiper blades:
{ WARNING parking brake followed by the 1. Lift the wiper arm from the
regular brake. windshield until no further
When you are doing this check, movement is possible.
Contact your dealer if service is
the vehicle could begin to move. required.
You or others could be injured
and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
Wiper Blade Replacement
of the vehicle in case it begins to Windshield wiper blades should be
roll. Be ready to apply the regular inspected for wear and cracking.
brake at once should the vehicle See Maintenance Schedule on
begin to move. page 11‑3.
Replacement blades come in
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the different types and are removed
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping in different ways. For proper type
your foot on the regular brake, set and length, see Maintenance
the parking brake. Replacement Parts on page 11‑15.
. To check the parking brake's Notice: Allowing the wiper arm to 2. Press the release button on the
holding ability: With the engine touch the windshield when no top side of the wiper and pull the
running and the transmission in wiper blade is installed could wiper blade out of the end of the
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot damage the windshield. Any wiper arm.
pressure from the regular brake damage that occurs would not be
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is covered by your warranty. Do not
held by the parking brake only. allow the wiper arm to touch the
windshield.
Vehicle Care 10-27
3. Install the wiper blade connector Rear Wiper Blade Replacement To replace the wiper blade:
by sliding into the end of the 1. Lift the wiper arm away from the
The rear wiper blade and wiper arm
wiper arm until the button on the windshield.
have a cover for protection. The
wiper blade clicks into place with
cover must be removed before the
the wiper arm.
wiper blade can be replaced.
4. Place the wiper arm with the
To remove the cover:
wiper blade in place back on
the windshield.
Notice: Damage may occur if the
wiper blades are not in contact
with the windshield before
turning on the wiper system.
2. Push the release lever (2) to
1. Slide a plastic tool under the disengage the hook and push
cover and push upward to the wiper arm (1) out of the
unsnap. blade assembly (3).
2. Slide the cover toward the wiper 3. Push the new blade assembly
blade tip to unhook it from the securely on the wiper arm until
blade assembly. the release lever clicks into
3. Remove the cover. place.
4. After wiper blade replacement, 4. Replace the wiper cover.
ensure that the cover hook
slides into the slot in the blade
assembly.
5. Snap the cover down to secure.
10-28 Vehicle Care
Headlamp Aiming Bulb Replacement Headlamps, Front Turn

Headlamp aim has been preset and For the proper type of replacement Signal and Parking
should need no further adjustment. bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on Lamps
If the vehicle is damaged in a crash, page 10‑32.
the headlamp aim may be affected. For any bulb‐changing procedure
If adjustment to the headlamps is not listed in this section, contact
necessary, see your dealer. your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{ WARNING
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you
drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure
Driver Side Shown, Passenger
to read and follow the instructions
Side Similar
on the bulb package.
1. Low-Beam Headlamp
2. Turn Signal Lamp
3. High-Beam Headlamp
4. Parking Lamp
Vehicle Care 10-29
High-Beam Headlamp/
Low-Beam Headlamp
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 10‑4.
4. Disconnect the wiring harness 2. Remove the parking lamp bulb

connector from the bulb. socket from the headlamp
5. Install the new bulb in the assembly by turning
headlamp assembly by turning counterclockwise.
clockwise. 3. Remove the bulb from the bulb
2. Remove the headlamp bulb 6. Reconnect the wiring harness socket by pulling it straight out.
access cover. connector. 4. Install the new bulb in the bulb
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise 7. Install the headlamp bulb access socket.
and pull straight back. cover. 5. Install the bulb socket into the
headlamp assembly by turning
Parking Lamp clockwise.
page 10‑4.
10-30 Vehicle Care
Turn Signal Lamp 5. Install the bulb socket into the 4. Back-up Lamp
headlamp assembly by turning 5. Turn Signal Lamp
clockwise.
page 10‑4. To replace one of these bulbs:
Taillamps, Turn Signal, 1. Open the trunk.
Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
and Back-Up Lamps
2. Remove the turn signal lamp

bulb socket from the headlamp
assembly by turning 2. Remove the two screws, which
counterclockwise. secure the taillamp assembly.
3. Remove the bulb from the bulb Passenger Side Shown, Driver 3. Remove the taillamp assembly
socket by pulling it straight out. Side Similar by pulling it straight back until
1. Sidemarker Lamp the two posts disengage from
4. Install the new bulb in the bulb the grommets. Do not pull on the
socket. 2. Stoplamp/Taillamp wiring harness.
3. Taillamp
Vehicle Care 10-31
4. Remove the bulb socket from License Plate Lamp 1. Bulb Socket
the taillamp assembly by turning 2. Bulb
it counterclockwise.
3. Lamp Assembly
5. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out. To replace one of these bulbs:
6. Install a new bulb into the bulb 1. Push the left end of the lamp
socket. assembly toward the right.
7. Install the bulb socket into the 2. Turn the lamp assembly down to
taillamp assembly by turning it remove it.
clockwise. 3. Turn the bulb socket (1)
8. Install the taillamp assembly and counterclockwise to remove it
tighten the two screws. from the lamp assembly (3).
Lamp Assembly 4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out of
the bulb socket (1).
5. Push the replacement bulb
straight into the bulb socket and
turn the bulb socket clockwise to
install it into the lamp assembly.
6. Turn the lamp assembly into the
lamp assembly opening
engaging the clip side first.
7. Push on the lamp side opposite
the clip until the lamp assembly
snaps into place.
Bulb Assembly
10-32 Vehicle Care
Replacement Bulbs Electrical System Headlamp Wiring

Bulb An electrical overload may cause
Exterior Lamp
Number Electrical System the lamps to go on and off, or in
Overload some cases to remain off. Have the
Back-Up Lamp 921 headlamp wiring checked right away
Front Parking Lamp 7444NA The vehicle has fuses and circuit if the lamps go on and off or
breakers to protect against an remain off.
Front Turn 7444NA electrical system overload.
Signal Lamp Windshield Wipers
When the current electrical load is
High-Beam 9005LL too heavy, the circuit breaker opens If the wiper motor overheats due to
Headlamp and closes, protecting the circuit heavy snow or ice, the windshield
until the current load returns to wipers will stop until the motor cools
License Plate Lamp W5W LL and will then restart.
normal or the problem is fixed.
Low-Beam H11 LL This greatly reduces the chance of Although the circuit is protected
Headlamp circuit overload and fire caused by from electrical overload, overload
Rear W5W LL electrical problems. due to heavy snow or ice may
Sidemarker Lamp Fuses and circuit breakers protect cause wiper linkage damage.
power devices in the vehicle. Always clear ice and heavy snow
Rear Turn 7443NA from the windshield before using
Signal Lamp Replace a bad fuse with a new one the windshield wipers.
of the identical size and rating.
Stoplamp/Taillamp 7443 LL If the overload is caused by an
If there is a problem on the road and electrical problem and not snow or
For replacement bulbs not listed a fuse needs to be replaced, the ice, be sure to get it fixed.
here, contact your dealer. same amperage fuse can be
borrowed. Choose some feature of
the vehicle that is not needed to use
and replace it as soon as possible.
Vehicle Care 10-33
Fuses and Circuit Engine Compartment

Breakers Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
protected from short circuits by a
combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the
chance of damage caused by
electrical problems.
To check a fuse, look at the
silver-colored band inside the fuse.
If the band is broken or melted,
replace the fuse. Be sure to replace
a bad fuse with a new one of the
identical size and rating.
Fuses of the same amperage can To remove the fuse block cover,
be temporarily borrowed from squeeze the clip and lift it up.
another fuse location, if a fuse goes
out. Replace the fuse as soon as Notice: Spilling liquid on any
possible. electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
To identify and check fuses, circuit keep the covers on any electrical
breakers, and relays, see Engine component.
Compartment Fuse Block on
page 10‑33 and Instrument Panel
Fuse Block on page 10‑36. The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
10-34 Vehicle Care
Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage

1 Sunroof 12 Rear Window 23 Ignition Coil/Injectors
Defogger
2 Outside Rearview 24 Washer Pump
Mirror Switch 13 Not Used
25 Not Used
3 Canister Vent 14 Outside Rearview
26 Canister Purge
Solenoid (1.4L Only) Mirror Heater
Solenoid/Water
4 Not Used 15 Fuel System Control Valve Solenoid/
Module Battery Oxygen Sensors –
5 Electronic Brake
(1.4L Only) Pre and Post/
Control Module
Turbo Wastegate
Valve 16 Heated Seat Module
Solenoid (1.4L)/
6 Not Used 17 Transmission Turbo Bypass
Control Module R/C Solenoid (1.4L)/
7 Not Used
IMTV
18 Engine Control
8 Transmission Solenoid (1.8L)
Module R/C
Control Module
27 Not Used
Battery 19 Fuel Pump
(1.8L Only) 28 Not Used
9 Not Used
20 Not Used 29 Engine Control
10 Fuel System
Module Powertrain
Control Module 21 Fan Relay (Auxiliary
Ignition 1/Ignition 2
R/C (1.4L Only)/ Fuse Block – 1.4L)/
Headlamp Leveling Fan 3 Relay 30 Mass Air Flow
85 (1.8L) Sensor
11 Rear Wiper
22 Cold Start Pump 31 Left High-Beam
(1.8L Only) Headlamp
Vehicle Care 10-35
Mini Fuses Usage J-Case Usage Mini Usage

Fuses Relays
32 Right High-Beam
Headlamp 7 Not Used 1 Run Crank
33 Engine Control 8 Cooling Fan Low/ 3 Cooling Fan Mid
Module Battery Mid (1.4L)/Cooling (1.4L Only)
Fan Low (1.8L)
34 Horn 5 Powertrain Relay
9 Cooling Fan High
35 Air Conditioning 8 Cooling Fan Low
Compressor Clutch 10 EVP
36 Front Fog Lamps 11 Starter Solenoid HC-Mini Usage
Relays
J-Case Usage U-Micro Usage 6 Cooling Fan High
Fuses Relays
1 Electronic Brake 2 Fuel Pump
Control (1.8L Only)
Module Pump
4 Spare
2 Front Wiper
3 Blower Motor HC-Micro Usage
Relays
4 IEC R/C
7 Starter
5 Not Used
6 Not Used
10-36 Vehicle Care
Auxiliary Fuse Block Instrument Panel Fuse

Block
The vehicle may not be equipped

with all of the fuses, relays, and
To remove the fuse block cover, features shown.
squeeze the clips and lift it up.
Relays Usage The instrument panel fuse block is
Notice: Spilling liquid on any on the underside of the driver side
electrical component on the 01 Electric
instrument panel. To access the
vehicle may damage it. Always Vacuum Pump
fuses, remove the storage
keep the covers on any electrical 02 Cooling Fan compartment. To remove the
component. Control 1 storage compartment, open the
03 Cooling Fan compartment and pull it out.
Control 2
04 Trailer (1.4L Only)
Vehicle Care 10-37
Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage

1 Body Control 12 Heater, Ventilation,
Module 1 and Air Conditioning
MDL/ICS
2 Body Control
Module 2 13 Liftgate Relay
3 Body Control 14 UPA Module
Module 3
15 LDW Module/Inside
4 Body Control Rearview Mirror
Module 4
16 Adaptive Forward
5 Body Control Lighting Module
Module 5
17 Power
6 Body Control WNDWSW DR
Module 6
18 Rain Sensor
7 Body Control
19 Body Control
Module 7
Module Regulated
8 Body Control Voltage Control
Module 8
20 Steering Wheel
9 Discrete Logic Switch Backlighting
Ignition Sensor
21 A/C Accessory
Instrument Panel Fuse Block 10 Sensing Diagnostic Power Outlet/
Module Battery PRNDL
with all of the fuses, relays, and 11 Data Link
features shown. Connection
10-38 Vehicle Care
Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage Circuit Usage

Breaker
22 Cigar Lighter/DC 31 IPC Battery
Accessory Power CB1 Spare
32 Radio/Chime
Outlet
33 Display Midi Fuse Usage
23 Spare
34 OnStar/VLBS M01 PTC
24 Spare
25 Spare S/B Fuses Usage Relays Usage
26 Sensing Diagnostic 1 PTC 1
Module RC/ 01 Accessory/Retained
Automatic Occupant 2 PTC 2 Accessory Power
Sensing Display 3 Power Window 02 Liftgate
27 IPC/Compass Motor Front 03 Spare
Module 4 Power Window 04 Blower Relay
28 Headlamp Switch// Motor Rear
DC Converter/Clutch 05 Logistic Mode
5 Logistic Mode Relay
Switch
6 Spare
29 Spare
7 Spare
30 Spare
8 Spare
Vehicle Care 10-39
Rear Compartment Fuse Mini Fuses Usage

Block 1 Driver Seat Power
Lumbar Switch
2 Passenger Seat
Power Lumbar
Switch
3 Amplifier
4 Trailer Socket
5 All-Wheel Drive
Module
6 Automatic Occupant
Sensing Module
The rear compartment fuse block is 7 Spare

behind a cover on the left side of 8 Trailer Parking
the rear compartment. To access Lamps
the fuses, remove the cover.
9 Spare
with all of the fuses, relays, and 10 Spare
features shown. 11 Trailer Module
12 Nav Dock
13 Heated Steering
Wheel
10-40 Vehicle Care
Mini Fuses Usage S/B Fuses Usage Wheels and Tires

14 Trailer Socket 4 A/C-D/C Inverter
Tires
15 EVP Switch 5 Battery
Every new GM vehicle has
16 Water In Fuel 6 Headlamp Washer
high-quality tires made by a
Sensor
7 Spare leading tire manufacturer.
17 Inside Rearview See the warranty manual for
8 Spare
Mirror/Regulated information regarding the tire
Voltage Control 9 Spare warranty and where to get
18 Spare service. For additional
Relays Usage information refer to the tire
S/B Fuses Usage 1 Ignition Relay manufacturer.
1 Driver Power Seat 2 Run Relay
Switch/Memory { WARNING
Module . Poorly maintained and
2 Passenger Power improperly used tires are
Seat Switch dangerous.
3 Trailer Module . Overloading the tires can
cause overheating as a
result of too much flexing.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-41
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

All-Season Tires
This vehicle may come with
. Worn or old tires can all-season tires. These tires are
There could be a blowout and cause a crash. If the tread
a serious crash. See Vehicle designed to provide good overall
is badly worn, performance on most road surfaces
Load Limits on page 9‑10. replace them. and weather conditions. Original
. Underinflated tires pose . Replace any tires that equipment tires designed to GM's
the same danger as have been damaged by specific tire performance criteria
overloaded tires. The have a TPC specification code
impacts with potholes, molded onto the sidewall. Original
resulting crash could curbs, etc.
cause serious injury. equipment all-season tires can be
. Improperly repaired tires identified by the last two characters
Check all tires frequently
can cause a crash. Only of this TPC code, which will
to maintain the be “MS.”
recommended pressure. the dealer or an
Tire pressure should be authorized tire service Consider installing winter tires on
checked when the tires center should repair, the vehicle if frequent driving on
replace, dismount, and snow or ice-covered roads is
are cold. expected. All-season tires provide
mount the tires.
. Overinflated tires are more adequate performance for most
likely to be cut, punctured, . Do not spin the tires in winter driving conditions, but they
or broken by a sudden excess of 56 km/h may not offer the same level of
impact— such as when (35 mph) on slippery traction or performance as winter
surfaces such as snow, tires on snow or ice-covered roads.
hitting a pothole. Keep
mud, ice, etc. Excessive See Winter Tires on page 10‑42.
tires at the recommended
pressure. spinning may cause the
(Continued)
tires to explode.
10-42 Vehicle Care

. Use only radial ply tires of the
Winter Tires same size, load range, and
Tire Sidewall Labeling
This vehicle was not, originally, speed rating as the original Useful information about a tire is
equipped with winter tires. Winter equipment tires. molded into its sidewall. The
tires are designed for increased examples show a typical
Winter tires with the same speed
traction on snow and ice-covered passenger vehicle tire and a
rating as the original equipment tires
roads. Consider installing winter
may not be available for H, V, W, Y, compact spare tire sidewall.
tires on the vehicle if frequent
and ZR speed rated tires. If winter
driving on snow or ice-covered
tires with a lower speed rating are
roads is expected. See your dealer
chosen, never exceed the tire's
for details regarding winter tire
maximum speed capability.
availability and proper tire selection.
Also, see Buying New Tires on
page 10‑56. Summer Tires
With winter tires, there may be This vehicle may come with high
decreased dry road traction, performance summer tires. These
increased road noise, and shorter tires have a special tread and
tread life. After changing to winter compound that are optimized for
tires, be alert for changes in vehicle maximum dry and wet road
handling and braking. performance. This special tread
and compound will decrease Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
If using winter tires: performance in cold climates, and
on ice and snow. We recommend (1) Tire Size: The tire size is a
. Use tires of the same brand and
tread type on all four wheel installing winter tires on the vehicle combination of letters and
positions. if frequent driving in cold numbers used to define a
temperatures or on snow or ice particular tire's width, height,
covered roads is expected. See aspect ratio, construction type,
Winter Tires on page 10‑42.
Vehicle Care 10-43
and service description. See the digits represent the week (01– performance factors: treadwear,
“Tire Size” illustration later in this 52) and the last two digits, the traction, and temperature
section. year. For example, the third resistance. For more information
(2) TPC Spec (Tire week of the year 2010 would see Uniform Tire Quality
Performance Criteria have a four-digit DOT date Grading on page 10‑58.
Specification): Original of 0310. (7) Maximum Cold Inflation
equipment tires designed to (4) Tire Identification Number Load Limit: Maximum load
GM's specific tire performance (TIN): The letters and numbers that can be carried and the
criteria have a TPC specification following the DOT (Department maximum pressure needed to
code molded onto the sidewall. of Transportation) code are the support that load.
GM's TPC specifications meet or Tire Identification Number (TIN).
exceed all federal safety The TIN shows the
guidelines. manufacturer and plant code,
(3) DOT (Department of tire size, and date the tire was
Transportation): The manufactured. The TIN is
Department of Transportation molded onto both sides of the
(DOT) code indicates that the tire, although only one side may
tire is in compliance with the have the date of manufacture.
U.S. Department of (5) Tire Ply Material : The type
Transportation Motor Vehicle of cord and number of plies in
Safety Standards. the sidewall and under the tread.
DOT Tire Date of (6) Uniform Tire Quality Compact Spare Tire Example
Manufacture: The last four Grading (UTQG): Tire (1) Tire Ply Material : The type
digits of the TIN indicate the tire manufacturers are required to of cord and number of plies in
manufactured date. The first two grade tires based on three the sidewall and under the tread.
10-44 Vehicle Care
(2) Temporary Use Only: The (4) Maximum Cold Inflation criteria have a TPC specification
compact spare tire or temporary Load Limit: Maximum load code molded onto the sidewall.
use tire should not be driven at that can be carried and the GM's TPC specifications meet or
speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph). maximum pressure needed to exceed all federal safety
The compact spare tire is for support that load. guidelines.
emergency use when a regular (5) Tire Inflation: The
road tire has lost air and gone temporary use tire or compact Tire Designations
flat. If the vehicle has a compact spare tire should be inflated to Tire Size
spare tire, see Compact Spare 420 kPa (60 psi). For more
Tire on page 10‑67 and If a Tire The following is an example of a
information on tire pressure and
Goes Flat on page 10‑61. typical passenger vehicle
inflation see Tire Pressure on
tire size.
(3) Tire Identification Number page 10‑48.
(TIN): The letters and numbers (6) Tire Size: A combination of
following the DOT (Department letters and numbers define a
of Transportation) code are the tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
Tire Identification Number (TIN). construction type, and service
The TIN shows the description. The letter T as the
manufacturer and plant code, first character in the tire size
tire size, and date the tire was means the tire is for temporary (1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:
manufactured. The TIN is use only. The United States version of a
molded onto both sides of the metric tire sizing system. The
tire, although only one side may (7) TPC Spec (Tire letter P as the first character in
have the date of manufacture. Performance Criteria the tire size means a passenger
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
Vehicle Care 10-45
vehicle tire engineered to (5) Rim Diameter : Diameter of steering, power brakes, power
standards set by the U.S. Tire the wheel in inches. windows, power seats, and air
and Rim Association. (6) Service Description: These conditioning.
(2) Tire Width: The three-digit characters represent the load Aspect Ratio: The relationship
number indicates the tire section index and speed rating of the of a tire's height to its width.
width in millimeters from tire. The load index represents Belt: A rubber coated layer of
sidewall to sidewall. the load carrying capacity a tire cords between the plies and the
(3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit is certified to carry. The speed tread. Cords may be made from
number that indicates the tire rating is the maximum speed a steel or other reinforcing
height-to-width measurements. tire is certified to carry a load. materials.
For example, if the tire size Bead: The tire bead contains
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in Tire Terminology and
Definitions steel wires wrapped by steel
item 3 of the illustration, it would cords that hold the tire onto
mean that the tire's sidewall is Air Pressure: The amount of the rim.
60 percent as high as it is wide. air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire
(4) Construction Code: A letter in which the plies are laid at
code is used to indicate the type the tire. Air pressure is
expressed in kPa (kilopascal) alternate angles less than
of ply construction in the tire. 90 degrees to the centerline of
The letter R means radial ply or psi (pounds per square inch).
the tread.
construction; the letter D means Accessory Weight: The
diagonal or bias ply combined weight of optional Cold Tire Pressure: The
construction; and the letter B accessories. Some examples of amount of air pressure in a tire,
means belted-bias ply optional accessories are measured in kPa (kilopascal)
construction. automatic transmission, power or psi (pounds per square inch)
10-46 Vehicle Care
before a tire has built up heat GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Load Index: An assigned
from driving. See Tire Pressure Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits number ranging from 1 to 279
on page 10‑48. on page 9‑10. that corresponds to the load
Curb Weight: The weight of a GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight carrying capacity of a tire.
motor vehicle with standard and Rating for the front axle. See Maximum Inflation Pressure:
optional equipment including the Vehicle Load Limits on The maximum air pressure to
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, page 9‑10. which a cold tire can be inflated.
and coolant, but without GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight The maximum air pressure is
passengers and cargo. Rating for the rear axle. See molded onto the sidewall.
DOT Markings: A code molded Vehicle Load Limits on Maximum Load Rating: The
into the sidewall of a tire page 9‑10. load rating for a tire at the
signifying that the tire is in Intended Outboard Sidewall : maximum permissible inflation
compliance with the U.S. The side of an asymmetrical tire, pressure for that tire.
Department of Transportation that must always face outward Maximum Loaded Vehicle
(DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety when mounted on a vehicle. Weight: The sum of curb
Standards. The DOT code weight, accessory weight,
includes the Tire Identification Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
unit for air pressure. vehicle capacity weight, and
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric production options weight.
designator which can also Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire:
identify the tire manufacturer, A tire used on light duty trucks Normal Occupant Weight: The
production plant, brand, and and some multipurpose number of occupants a vehicle
date of production. passenger vehicles. is designed to seat multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑10.
Vehicle Care 10-47
Occupant Distribution : See Tire Pressure on Tread: The portion of a tire that
Designated seating positions. page 10‑48 and Vehicle Load comes into contact with
Outward Facing Sidewall: The Limits on page 9‑10. the road.
side of an asymmetrical tire that Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
has a particular side that faces tire in which the ply cords that bands, sometimes called wear
outward when mounted on a extend to the beads are laid at bars, that show across the
vehicle. The side of the tire that 90 degrees to the centerline of tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm
contains a whitewall, bears the tread. (1/16 in) of tread remains. See
white lettering, or bears Rim: A metal support for a tire When It Is Time for New Tires
manufacturer, brand, and/or and upon which the tire beads on page 10‑55.
model name molding that is are seated. UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
higher or deeper than the same Grading Standards): A tire
moldings on the other sidewall Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead. information system that provides
of the tire. consumers with ratings for a
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Speed Rating: An tire's traction, temperature, and
A tire used on passenger cars alphanumeric code assigned to treadwear. Ratings are
and some light duty trucks and a tire indicating the maximum determined by tire
multipurpose vehicles. speed at which a tire can manufacturers using
operate. government testing procedures.
Recommended Inflation
Pressure: Vehicle Traction: The friction between The ratings are molded into the
manufacturer's recommended the tire and the road surface. sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
tire inflation pressure as shown The amount of grip provided. Tire Quality Grading on
on the tire placard. page 10‑58.
10-48 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The Tire Pressure

. Rough ride.
number of designated seating . Needless damage from
positions multiplied by Tires need the correct amount of
air pressure to operate road hazards.
68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
cargo load. See Vehicle Load effectively. The Tire and Loading
Limits on page 9‑10. Notice: Neither tire Information label on the vehicle
underinflation nor indicates the original equipment
Vehicle Maximum Load on the tires and the correct cold tire
Tire: Load on an individual tire overinflation is good.
Underinflated tires, or tires inflation pressures. The
due to curb weight, accessory recommended pressure is the
weight, occupant weight, and that do not have enough air,
can result in: minimum air pressure needed to
cargo weight. support the vehicle's maximum
Vehicle Placard: A label
. Tire overloading and load carrying capacity. See
permanently attached to a overheating which could Vehicle Load Limits on
vehicle showing the vehicle lead to a blowout. page 9‑10.
capacity weight and the original . Premature or How the vehicle is loaded
equipment tire size and irregular wear. affects vehicle handling and ride
recommended inflation pressure. . Poor handling. comfort. Never load the vehicle
See “Tire and Loading with more weight than it was
Information Label” under Vehicle . Reduced fuel economy. designed to carry.
Load Limits on page 9‑10. Overinflated tires, or tires that
When to Check
have too much air, can
result in: Check the tires once a month or
more. Do not forget to check the
. Unusual wear.
spare tire. If the vehicle has a
. Poor handling. compact spare tire, it should be
Vehicle Care 10-49
at 420 kPa (60 psi). See If the inflation pressure is low, by the vehicle manufacturer on the
Compact Spare Tire on add air until the recommended vehicle placard or tire inflation
page 10‑67 and Full-Size Spare pressure is reached. If the pressure label. (If your vehicle has
Tire on page 10‑67 for additional inflation pressure is high, press tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or
information. on the metal stem in the center
tire inflation pressure label, you
of the tire valve to release air. should determine the proper tire
How to Check
Re-check the tire pressure with inflation pressure for those tires.)
Use a good quality pocket-type
the tire gauge. As an added safety feature, your
gauge to check tire pressure.
Proper tire inflation cannot be Return the valve caps on the vehicle has been equipped with a
valve stems to prevent leaks tire pressure monitoring system
determined by looking at the tire. (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
Check the tire inflation pressure and keep out dirt and moisture.
pressure telltale when one or more
when the tires are cold, meaning of your tires is significantly
the vehicle has not been driven Tire Pressure Monitor under-inflated.
for at least three hours or no System Accordingly, when the low tire
more than 1.6 km (1 mi). The Tire Pressure Monitor System pressure telltale illuminates, you
Remove the valve cap from the (TPMS) uses radio and sensor should stop and check your tires as
tire valve stem. Press the tire technology to check tire pressure soon as possible, and inflate them
gauge firmly onto the valve to levels. The TPMS sensors monitor to the proper pressure. Driving on a
get a pressure measurement. the air pressure in your tires and significantly under-inflated tire
transmit tire pressure readings to a causes the tire to overheat and can
If the cold tire inflation pressure lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
receiver located in the vehicle.
matches the recommended also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
pressure on the Tire and Each tire, including the spare
tread life, and may affect the
Loading Information label, no (if provided), should be checked
vehicle's handling and stopping
monthly when cold and inflated to
further adjustment is necessary. ability.
the inflation pressure recommended
10-50 Vehicle Care
Please note that the TPMS is TPMS malfunctions may occur for a Tire Pressure Monitor
not a substitute for proper tire variety of reasons, including the
maintenance, and it is the driver's installation of replacement or
Operation
responsibility to maintain correct tire alternate tires or wheels on the This vehicle may have a Tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has vehicle that prevent the TPMS from Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
not reached the level to trigger functioning properly. Always check The TPMS is designed to warn the
illumination of the TPMS low tire the TPMS malfunction telltale after driver when a low tire pressure
pressure telltale. replacing one or more tires or condition exists. TPMS sensors are
Your vehicle has also been wheels on your vehicle to ensure mounted onto each tire and wheel
equipped with a TPMS malfunction that the replacement or alternate assembly, excluding the spare tire
indicator to indicate when the tires and wheels allow the TPMS to and wheel assembly. The TPMS
system is not operating properly. continue to function properly. sensors monitor the air pressure in
The TPMS malfunction indicator is See Tire Pressure Monitor the tires and transmit the tire
combined with the low tire pressure Operation on page 10‑50. pressure readings to a receiver
telltale. When the system detects a located in the vehicle.
malfunction, the telltale will flash for Federal Communications
approximately one minute and then Commission (FCC) Rules and
remain continuously illuminated. with Industry Canada
This sequence will continue upon Standards
subsequent vehicle start-ups as See Radio Frequency Statement
long as the malfunction exists. (Canada) on page 13‑18 for
When the malfunction indicator information regarding Part 15 of
is illuminated, the system may not the Federal Communications When a low tire pressure condition
be able to detect or signal low tire Commission (FCC) Rules and with is detected, the TPMS illuminates
pressure as intended. Industry Canada Standards the low tire pressure warning light
RSS-GEN/210/220/310. located on the instrument cluster.
If the warning light comes on, stop
as soon as possible and inflate the
Vehicle Care 10-51
tires to the recommended pressure A Tire and Loading Information label TPMS Malfunction Light and
shown on the Tire and Loading shows the size of the original Message
Information label. See Vehicle Load equipment tires and the correct
Limits on page 9‑10. inflation pressure for the tires when The TPMS will not function properly
they are cold. See Vehicle Load if one or more of the TPMS sensors
A message to check the pressure in are missing or inoperable. When the
a specific tire may display in the Limits on page 9‑10, for an example
of the Tire and Loading Information system detects a malfunction, the
Driver Information Center (DIC). The low tire pressure warning light,
low tire pressure warning light and label and its location. Also see Tire
Pressure on page 10‑48. defined above, flashes for about
the DIC warning message, one minute and then stays on for
if equipped, come on at each The TPMS can warn about a low the remainder of the ignition cycle.
ignition cycle until the tires are tire pressure condition, but it does A DIC warning message may also
inflated to the correct inflation not replace normal tire display. The malfunction light and
pressure. Using the DIC, it may be maintenance. See Tire Inspection DIC warning message, if equipped,
possible to view the tire pressure on page 10‑53, Tire Rotation on come on at each ignition cycle until
levels. For additional information page 10‑54, and Tires on the problem is corrected. Some of
and details about the DIC operation page 10‑40. the conditions that can cause these
and displays, see Driver Information Notice: Tire sealant materials are to come on are:
Center (DIC) on page 5‑24. not all the same. A non-approved . One of the road tires has been
The low tire pressure warning light tire sealant could damage the replaced with the spare tire.
may come on in cool weather when TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor The spare tire does not have a
the vehicle is first started, and then damage caused by using an TPMS sensor. The malfunction
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This incorrect tire sealant is not light and the DIC message,
could be an early indicator that the covered by the vehicle warranty. if equipped, should go off after
air pressure is getting low and Always use only the the road tire is replaced and the
needs to be inflated to the proper GM-approved tire sealant sensor matching process is
pressure. available through your dealer or performed successfully. See
included in the vehicle. "TPMS Sensor Matching
Process" later in this section.
10-52 Vehicle Care

. The TPMS sensor matching . Operating electronic devices or wheel positions, using a TPMS
process was not done or not being near facilities using radio relearn tool, in the following order:
completed successfully after wave frequencies similar to the driver side front tire, passenger side
rotating the tires. The TPMS could cause the TPMS front tire, passenger side rear tire,
malfunction light and the DIC sensors to malfunction. and driver side rear. See your
message, if equipped, should go If the TPMS is not functioning dealer for service or to purchase a
off after successfully completing properly, it cannot detect or signal a relearn tool.
the sensor matching process. low tire condition. See your dealer
See "TPMS Sensor Matching There are two minutes to match
for service if the TPMS malfunction the first tire/wheel position, and
Process" later in this section. light and DIC message, if equipped, five minutes overall to match all
. One or more TPMS sensors are come on and stay on. four tire/wheel positions. If it takes
missing or damaged. The longer, the matching process stops
malfunction light and the DIC TPMS Sensor Matching
and must be restarted.
message, if equipped, should go Process
off when the TPMS sensors are The TPMS sensor matching
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
installed and the sensor process is:
identification code. The identification
matching process is performed code needs to be matched to a new 1. Set the parking brake.
successfully. See your dealer for tire/wheel position after rotating the 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
service. vehicle’s tires or replacing one or the engine off.
. Replacement tires or wheels do more of the TPMS sensors. Also,
the TPMS sensor matching process 3. Use the MENU button to select
not match the original equipment
should be performed after replacing the Vehicle Information Menu
tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
a spare tire with a road tire (Menu 2) in the Driver
other than those recommended
containing the TPMS sensor. The Information Center (DIC).
could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying malfunction light and the DIC 4. Use the thumbwheel (or up and
New Tires on page 10‑56. message, if equipped, should go off down arrows) to scroll to the Tire
at the next ignition cycle. The Pressure Menu Item screen.
sensors are matched to the tire/
Vehicle Care 10-53
5. Press and hold the SET/CLR 9. Proceed to the passenger side Tire Inspection
button to begin the sensor front tire, and repeat the
matching process. procedure in Step 8. We recommend that the tires,
including the spare tire, if the
A message requesting 10. Proceed to the passenger side
acceptance of the process may rear tire, and repeat the vehicle has one, be inspected
display. procedure in Step 8. for signs of wear or damage at
least once a month.
6. If requested, press the SET/CLR 11. Proceed to the driver side rear
button again to confirm the tire, and repeat the procedure Replace the tire if:
selection. in Step 8. The horn sounds two . The indicators at three or
The horn sounds twice to signal times to indicate the sensor
identification code has been
more places around the tire
the receiver is in relearn mode can be seen.
and the TIRE LEARN or TIRE matched to the driver side rear
LEARNING ACTIVE message tire, and the TPMS sensor . There is cord or fabric
displays on the DIC screen. matching process is no longer showing through the tire's
active. The TIRE LEARN or rubber.
7. Start with the driver side TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
front tire. message on the DIC display . The tread or sidewall is
8. Place the relearn tool against screen goes off. cracked, cut, or snagged
the tire sidewall, near the valve 12. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. deep enough to show cord or
stem. Then press the button to fabric.
activate the TPMS sensor. 13. Set all four tires to the
recommended air pressure . The tire has a bump, bulge,
A horn chirp confirms that the
sensor identification code has level as indicated on the Tire or split.
been matched to this tire and and Loading Information label.
wheel position.
10-54 Vehicle Care

. The tire has a puncture, cut, See When It Is Time for New See Tire Pressure on
or other damage that cannot Tires on page 10‑55 and Wheel page 10‑48 and Vehicle Load
be repaired well because of Replacement on page 10‑60. Limits on page 9‑10.
the size or location of the
damage. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor
System. See Tire Pressure
Tire Rotation Monitor Operation on
page 10‑50.
Tires should be rotated every
12 000 km (7,500 mi). See Check that all wheel nuts are
Maintenance Schedule on properly tightened. See “Wheel
page 11‑3. Nut Torque” under Capacities
and Specifications on
Tires are rotated to achieve a page 12‑2.
uniform wear for all tires. The
first rotation is the most
important.
{ WARNING
Use this rotation pattern when Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
Anytime unusual wear is rotating the tires. parts to which it is fastened, can
noticed, rotate the tires as soon make wheel nuts become loose
as possible, check for proper tire Do not include the spare tire in
the tire rotation. after time. The wheel could come
inflation pressure, and check for off and cause an accident. When
damaged tires or wheels. If the Adjust the front and rear tires to changing a wheel, remove any
unusual wear continues after the the recommended inflation rust or dirt from places where the
rotation, check the wheel pressure on the Tire and wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
alignment. Loading Information label after an emergency, a cloth or a paper
the tires have been rotated. (Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-55
WARNING (Continued)
When It Is Time for The rubber in tires ages over time.
This also applies to the spare tire,
New Tires if the vehicle has one, even if it is
towel can be used; however, use Factors such as maintenance, never used. Multiple factors
a scraper or wire brush later to temperatures, driving speeds, including temperatures, loading
remove all rust or dirt. vehicle loading, and road conditions conditions, and inflation pressure
affect the wear rate of the tires. maintenance affect how fast aging
Lightly coat the center of the takes place. GM recommends that
wheel hub with wheel bearing tires, including the spare if
equipped, be replaced after
grease after a wheel change or
six years, regardless of tread wear.
tire rotation to prevent corrosion The tire manufacturer date is the
or rust build-up. Do not get last four digits of the DOT Tire
grease on the flat wheel Identification Number (TIN) which is
mounting surface or on the molded into one side of the tire
wheel nuts or bolts. sidewall. The first two digits
represent the week (01–52) and
the last two digits, the year. For
example, the third week of the year
2010 would have a four-digit DOT
date of 0310.
Treadwear indicators are one way to
tell when it is time for new tires.
Treadwear indicators appear when
the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
or less of tread remaining. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑53 and Tire
Rotation on page 10‑54.
10-56 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Storage When replacement tires are Braking and handling

Tires age when stored normally needed, GM strongly performance may be adversely
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park recommends buying tires with affected if all the tires are not
a vehicle that will be stored for at the same TPC Spec rating. replaced at the same time.
least a month in a cool, dry, clean GM's exclusive TPC Spec If proper rotation and
area away from direct sunlight to
system considers over a dozen maintenance have been done,
slow aging. This area should be all four tires should wear out at
free of grease, gasoline, or other critical specifications that impact
the overall performance of the about the same time. See Tire
substances that can deteriorate Rotation on page 10‑54 for
rubber. vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, information on proper tire
Parking for an extended period can rotation. However, if it is
cause flat spots on the tires that
traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring necessary to replace only one
may result in vibrations while axle set of worn tires, place the
driving. When storing a vehicle for performance. GM's TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire's new tires on the rear axle.
at least a month, remove the tires or
raise the vehicle to reduce the sidewall near the tire size. If the Winter tires with the same speed
weight from the tires. tires have an all-season tread rating as the original equipment
design, the TPC Spec number tires may not be available for H,
Buying New Tires will be followed by MS for mud V, W, Y and ZR speed rated
GM has developed and matched and snow. See Tire Sidewall tires. Never exceed the winter
specific tires for the vehicle. The Labeling on page 10‑42. tire's maximum speed capability
original equipment tires installed GM recommends replacing worn when using winter tires with a
were designed to meet General tires in complete sets of four. lower speed rating.
Motors Tire Performance Criteria Uniform tread depth on all tires
Specification (TPC Spec) will help to maintain the
system rating. performance of the vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-57
The Tire and Loading

{ WARNING { WARNING Information label indicates the
Tires could explode during Using bias-ply tires on the original equipment tires on the
improper service. Attempting vehicle may cause the wheel vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits
to mount or dismount a tire rim flanges to develop cracks on page 9‑10.
could cause injury or death. after many miles of driving.
Only your dealer or authorized A tire and/or wheel could fail Different Size Tires and
tire service center should suddenly and cause a crash. Wheels
mount or dismount the tires. Use only radial-ply tires with If wheels or tires are installed that
the wheels on the vehicle. are a different size than the original
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle
performance, including its braking,
{ WARNING If the vehicle tires must be
ride and handling characteristics,
replaced with a tire that does not stability, and resistance to rollover
Mixing tires of different sizes, have a TPC Spec number, make may be affected. If the vehicle has
brands, or types may cause sure they are the same size, electronic systems such as antilock
loss of control of the vehicle, load range, speed rating, and brakes, rollover airbags, traction
resulting in a crash or other construction (radial) as the control, electronic stability control,
vehicle damage. Use the original tires. or All-Wheel Drive, the performance
correct size, brand, and type of these systems can also be
of tires on all wheels. Vehicles that have a tire affected.
pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate
low-pressure warning if non-TPC
Spec rated tires are installed.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 10‑49.
10-58 Vehicle Care
Uniform Tire Quality (UTQG) system does not apply

{ WARNING Grading to deep tread, winter tires,
If different sized wheels are used, compact spare tires, tires with
Quality grades can be found nominal rim diameters of
there may not be an acceptable
level of performance and safety if
where applicable on the tire 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
tires not recommended for those sidewall between tread shoulder or to some limited-production
wheels are selected. This and maximum section width. tires.
increases the chance of a crash For example:
While the tires available on
and serious injury. Only use GM Treadwear 200 Traction AA General Motors passenger cars
specific wheel and tire systems Temperature A and light trucks may vary with
developed for the vehicle, and
The following information relates respect to these grades, they
have them properly installed by a
to the system developed by the must also conform to federal
GM certified technician.
United States National Highway safety requirements and
Traffic Safety Administration additional General Motors Tire
See Buying New Tires on Performance Criteria (TPC)
page 10‑56 and Accessories and (NHTSA), which grades tires by
treadwear, traction, and standards.
Modifications on page 10‑3.
temperature performance. This All Passenger Car Tires Must
applies only to vehicles sold in Conform to Federal Safety
the United States. The grades Requirements In Addition To
are molded on the sidewalls of These Grades.
most passenger car tires. The
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Vehicle Care 10-59
Treadwear controlled conditions on to sudden tire failure. The grade

The treadwear grade is a specified government test C corresponds to a level of
comparative rating based on the surfaces of asphalt and performance which all
wear rate of the tire when tested concrete. A tire marked C may passenger car tires must meet
under controlled conditions on a have poor traction performance. under the Federal Motor Safety
specified government test Warning: The traction grade Standard No. 109. Grades B and
course. For example, a tire assigned to this tire is based on A represent higher levels of
graded 150 would wear one and straight-ahead braking traction performance on the laboratory
one-half (1½) times as well on tests, and does not include test wheel than the minimum
the government course as a tire acceleration, cornering, required by law. Warning: The
graded 100. The relative hydroplaning, or peak traction temperature grade for this tire is
performance of tires depends characteristics. established for a tire that is
upon the actual conditions of properly inflated and not
Temperature – A, B, C
their use, however, and may overloaded. Excessive speed,
The temperature grades are A underinflation, or excessive
depart significantly from the
(the highest), B, and C, loading, either separately or in
norm due to variations in driving
representing the tire's resistance combination, can cause heat
habits, service practices and
to the generation of heat and its buildup and possible tire failure.
differences in road
ability to dissipate heat when
characteristics and climate.
tested under controlled Wheel Alignment and Tire
Traction – AA, A, B, C conditions on a specified indoor Balance
The traction grades, from laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the The tires and wheels were aligned
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and balanced at the factory to
and C. Those grades represent material of the tire to degenerate
provide the longest tire life and best
the tire's ability to stop on wet and reduce tire life, and overall performance. Adjustments to
pavement as measured under excessive temperature can lead wheel alignment and tire balancing
10-60 Vehicle Care
will not be necessary on a regular Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel Used Replacement Wheels
basis. However, check the nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
alignment if there is unusual tire
wear or if the vehicle is pulling to
System (TPMS) sensors with new
GM original equipment parts.
{ WARNING
one side or the other. If the vehicle Replacing a wheel with a used
vibrates when driving on a smooth
road, the tires and wheels might
{ WARNING one is dangerous. How it has
been used or how far it has been
need to be rebalanced. See your Using the wrong replacement driven may be unknown. It could
dealer for proper diagnosis. wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel fail suddenly and cause a crash.
nuts can be dangerous. It could When replacing wheels, use a
Wheel Replacement affect the braking and handling of new GM original equipment
Replace any wheel that is bent, the vehicle. Tires can lose air, wheel.
cracked, or badly rusted or and cause loss of control, causing
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming a crash. Always use the correct
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel Tire Chains
wheel nuts should be replaced. nuts for replacement.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it. { WARNING
Some aluminum wheels can be Notice: The wrong wheel can
repaired. See your dealer if any of Do not use tire chains. There is
also cause problems with bearing
these conditions exist. not enough clearance. Tire chains
life, brake cooling, speedometer
or odometer calibration, used on a vehicle without the
Your dealer will know the kind of
headlamp aim, bumper height, proper amount of clearance can
wheel that is needed.
vehicle ground clearance, and tire cause damage to the brakes,
Each new wheel should have the suspension, or other vehicle
or tire chain clearance to the
same load-carrying capacity,
body and chassis. (Continued)
diameter, width, offset, and be
mounted the same way as the one it
replaces.
Vehicle Care 10-61
If a Tire Goes Flat

WARNING (Continued) { WARNING
It is unusual for a tire to blow out
parts. The area damaged by the while driving, especially if the tires Driving on a flat tire will cause
tire chains could cause loss of are maintained properly. See Tires permanent damage to the tire.
control and a crash. on page 10‑40. If air goes out of a Re-inflating a tire after it has been
Use another type of traction tire, it is much more likely to leak driven on while severely
out slowly. But if there ever is a underinflated or flat may cause a
device only if its manufacturer
blowout, here are a few tips about blowout and a serious crash.
recommends it for the vehicle's what to expect and what to do:
tire size combination and road Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
conditions. Follow that If a front tire fails, the flat tire that has been driven on while
manufacturer's instructions. creates a drag that pulls the vehicle severely underinflated or flat.
To avoid vehicle damage, drive toward that side. Take your foot off Have your dealer or an authorized
slow and readjust or remove the the accelerator pedal and grip the tire service center repair or
traction device if it contacts the steering wheel firmly. Steer to replace the flat tire as soon as
maintain lane position, and then possible.
vehicle. Do not spin the wheels.
gently brake to a stop, well off the
If traction devices are used,
road, if possible.
install them on the front tires.
A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
{ WARNING
may require the same correction as Lifting a vehicle and getting
used in a skid. Stop pressing the under it to do maintenance or
accelerator pedal and steer to repairs is dangerous without the
straighten the vehicle. It may be appropriate safety equipment and
very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake training. If a jack is provided with
to a stop, well off the road,
the vehicle, it is designed only for
if possible.
(Continued)
10-62 Vehicle Care
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

changing a flat tire. If it is used for To help prevent the vehicle from
anything else, you or others could moving:
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack 1. Set the parking brake firmly.
is provided with the vehicle, only 2. Put an automatic
use it for changing a flat tire. transmission in P (Park) or a
manual transmission in 1. Wheel Block
1 (First) or R (Reverse).
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire 2. Flat Tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly 3. Turn off the engine and do
The following information explains
to a level place, well off the road, not restart while the vehicle
how to repair or change a tire.
if possible. Turn on the hazard is raised.
warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 6‑4.
4. Do not allow passengers to Tire Changing
remain in the vehicle.
Removing the Spare Tire and
5. Place wheel blocks on both
{ WARNING sides of the tire at the Tools
Changing a tire can be opposite corner of the tire The spare tire and tools are located
dangerous. The vehicle can slip being changed. in the storage compartment in the
off the jack and roll over or fall rear of the vehicle.
causing injury or death. Find a When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),
level place to change the tire. use the following example as a
(Continued) guide to assist in the placement of
the wheel blocks (1).
Vehicle Care 10-63
Removing the Flat Tire and

Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10‑61.
1. Wrench 3. Turn the wheel wrench

2. Jack counterclockwise to loosen the
wheel nuts. Do not remove
3. Strap them yet.
To access the spare tire and tools:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
on page 2‑8. 2. Remove the wheel cover, if the
2. Lift the trim cover. vehicle has one, to reach the
wheel bolts.
3. Turn the retainer
counterclockwise to remove it.
4. Remove the spare tire, jack, and
tools and place them near the
tire being changed.
10-64 Vehicle Care
5. Place the hex tube end of the

wrench over the hex head of the WARNING (Continued)
jack to attach it.
avoid personal injury and vehicle
6. Turn the wheel wrench damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
clockwise until the lift head is head into the proper location
firmly contacting the proper before raising the vehicle.
lifting point nearest the flat tire.
{ WARNING
{ WARNING
Getting under a vehicle when it is
lifted on a jack is dangerous. Lifting a vehicle and getting under
4. Place the jack at the position If the vehicle slips off the jack, it to do maintenance or repairs is
marked with a half circle. you could be badly injured or dangerous without the
killed. Never get under a vehicle appropriate safety equipment and
when it is supported only by training. If a jack is provided with
a jack. the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
{ WARNING vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
Raising the vehicle with the jack
use it for changing a flat tire.
improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-65
7. Turn the wheel wrench 12. Reinstall the wheel nuts. Turn
clockwise to raise the vehicle far each nut clockwise, by hand,
enough off the ground so there until the wheel is held against
is enough room for the spare tire the hub.
to fit underneath the wheel well. 13. Lower the vehicle by turning
8. Turn the wheel nuts the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to counterclockwise. Lower the
remove them. jack completely.
9. Remove the flat tire.
{ WARNING
{ WARNING Wheel nuts that are improperly or
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the 10. Remove any rust or dirt from incorrectly tightened can cause
parts to which it is fastened, can the wheel bolts, mounting the wheels to become loose or
surfaces, and spare wheel. come off. The wheel nuts should
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come 11. Place the spare tire on the be tightened with a torque wrench
off and cause an accident. When wheel-mounting surface. to the proper torque specification
changing a wheel, remove any after replacing. Follow the torque
rust or dirt from places where the { WARNING specification supplied by the
aftermarket manufacturer when
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, a cloth or a paper Never use oil or grease on bolts using accessory locking wheel
towel can be used; however, use or nuts because the nuts might nuts. See Capacities and
a scraper or wire brush later to come loose. The vehicle's wheel Specifications on page 12‑2 for
remove all rust or dirt. could fall off, causing a crash. original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
10-66 Vehicle Care
Notice: Improperly tightened Notice: Wheel covers will not fit 4. Attach one end of the strap to a
wheel nuts can lead to brake on the vehicle's compact spare. cargo tie-down in the rear of the
pulsation and rotor damage. To If you try to put a wheel cover on vehicle.
avoid expensive brake repairs, the compact spare, the cover or
evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the spare could be damaged.
the proper sequence and to the
proper torque specification. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
Capacities and Specifications on and Tools
page 12‑2 for the wheel nut
torque specification. { WARNING
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could 5. Route the strap through the
cause injury. In a sudden stop or wheel, as shown.
collision, loose equipment could
6. Attach the other end of the strap
strike someone. Store all these in
to the other cargo tie-down in
the proper place.
the rear of the vehicle.
7. Tighten the strap.
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools
Storing the Compact Spare Tire
1. Return the jack and tools to their
and Tools
original storage location.
Reverse the instructions for
14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly 2. Replace the trim cover.
removing the spare tire and tools to
with the wheel wrench in a 3. Place the flat tire, lying flat, in store the spare tire.
crisscross sequence, as the rear storage compartment.
shown.
Vehicle Care 10-67
The compact spare tire is for Stop as soon as possible and check Do not mix the compact spare tire or
temporary use only. Replace the that the spare tire is correctly wheel with other wheels or tires.
compact spare tire with a full-size inflated after being installed on the They will not fit. Keep the spare tire
tire as soon as you can. See vehicle. The compact spare tire is and its wheel together.
Compact Spare Tire on page 10‑67. designed for temporary use only. Notice: Tire chains will not fit the
The vehicle will perform differently compact spare. Using them can
Compact Spare Tire with the spare tire installed and it is damage the vehicle and the
recommended that the vehicle chains. Do not use tire chains on
speed be limited to 80 km/h
{ WARNING (50 mph). To conserve the tread of
the compact spare.
Driving with more than one the spare tire, have the standard tire
repaired or replaced as soon as Full-Size Spare Tire
compact spare tire at a time could
result in loss of braking and convenient and return the spare tire If this vehicle came with a full-size
to the storage area. spare tire, it was fully inflated when
handling. This could lead to a
crash and you or others could be Notice: When the compact spare new, however, it can lose air over
is installed, do not take the time. Check the inflation pressure
injured. Use only one compact
vehicle through an automatic car regularly. See Tire Pressure on
spare tire at a time.
wash with guide rails. The page 10‑48 and Vehicle Load Limits
compact spare can get caught on on page 9‑10 for information
If this vehicle has a compact spare the rails which can damage the regarding proper tire inflation and
tire, it was fully inflated when new; tire, wheel, and other parts of loading the vehicle. For instructions
however, it can lose air over time. the vehicle. on how to remove, install, or store a
Check the inflation pressure spare tire, see Tire Changing on
regularly. It should be 420 kPa Do not use the compact spare on page 10‑62.
(60 psi). other vehicles.
10-68 Vehicle Care
After installing the spare tire on the Jump Starting Notice: Ignoring these steps
vehicle, stop as soon as possible could result in costly damage to
and check that the spare is correctly For more information about the the vehicle that would not be
inflated. The spare tire is made to vehicle battery, see Battery on covered by the warranty.
perform well at speeds up to page 10‑24.
Trying to start the vehicle by
112 km/h (70 mph) at the If the battery has run down, try to pushing or pulling it will not
recommended inflation pressure, so use another vehicle and some work, and it could damage the
you can finish your trip. jumper cables to start your vehicle. vehicle.
Have the damaged or flat road tire Be sure to use the following steps to
repaired or replaced and installed do it safely.
back onto the vehicle as soon as
possible so the spare tire will be
available in case it is needed again.
{ WARNING
Do not mix tires and wheels of Batteries can hurt you. They can
different sizes, because they will not be dangerous because:
fit. Keep the spare tire and its wheel . They contain acid that can
together.
burn you.
. They contain gas that can
explode or ignite.
. They contain enough 1.4L L4 Engine Shown, 1.8L L4
electricity to burn you. Engine Similar
If you do not follow these steps 1. Discharged Battery Negative
exactly, some or all of these Grounding Point
things can hurt you.
2. Discharged Battery Positive
Terminal
Vehicle Care 10-69
3. Good Battery Negative Terminal starting. If the other vehicle does 4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
4. Good Battery Positive Terminal not have a 12-volt system with a Turn off all lights and
negative ground, both vehicles accessories in both vehicles,
The jump start negative grounding can be damaged. except the hazard warning
point (1) for the discharged battery flashers if needed.
is the engine block or an engine 2. Position the two vehicles so that
they are not touching.
mounting bolt. Connect to a spot as
far away from the discharged 3. Set the parking brake firmly and
{ WARNING
battery as possible. put the shift lever in P (Park) An electric fan can start up even
The jump start positive terminal on with an automatic transmission, when the engine is not running
the discharged battery (2) is located or Neutral with a manual and can injure you. Keep hands,
in the engine compartment on the transmission. See Shifting Into clothing and tools away from any
driver side of the vehicle. Park on page 9‑18 with an underhood electric fan.
automatic transmission,
The jump start positive terminal (3) or Parking on page 9‑21 with a
and negative terminal (4) are on the manual transmission.
battery of the vehicle providing the
jump start. Notice: If any accessories are left { WARNING
on or plugged in during the jump
The positive jump start connection starting procedure, they could be Using a match near a battery can
for the discharged battery is under a damaged. The repairs would not cause battery gas to explode.
trim cover. Open the cover to be covered by the vehicle People have been hurt doing this,
expose the terminal. warranty. Whenever possible, and some have been blinded.
turn off or unplug all accessories Use a flashlight if you need
1. Check the other vehicle. It must
have a 12-volt battery with a on either vehicle when jump more light.
negative ground system. starting the vehicle. (Continued)
Notice: Only use a vehicle that
has a 12-volt system with a
negative ground for jump
10-70 Vehicle Care
9. Start the engine in the vehicle

WARNING (Continued) { WARNING with the good battery and run
the engine at idle speed for at
Be sure the battery has enough Fans or other moving engine least four minutes.
water. You do not need to add parts can injure you badly. Keep
water to the battery installed in your hands away from moving 10. Try to start the vehicle that had
your new vehicle. But if a battery parts once the engine is running. the dead battery. If it will not
has filler caps, be sure the right start after a few tries, it
amount of fluid is there. If it is low, probably needs service.
5. Connect one end of the
add water to take care of that red positive (+) cable to the Notice: If the jumper cables are
first. If you do not, explosive gas positive (+) terminal on the connected or removed in the
could be present. discharged battery. wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the
Battery fluid contains acid that 6. Connect the other end of the vehicle. The repairs would not be
can burn you. Do not get it on red positive (+) cable to the covered by the vehicle warranty.
you. If you accidentally get it in positive (+) terminal of the good Always connect and remove the
your eyes or on your skin, flush battery. jumper cables in the correct
the place with water and get 7. Connect one end of the order, making sure that the
medical help immediately. black negative (–) cable to the cables do not touch each other or
negative (–) terminal of the good other metal.
battery. Jumper Cable Removal
8. Connect the other end of the Reverse sequence exactly when
black negative (–) cable to the removing jumper cables.
negative (–) grounding point for
the discharged battery.
Vehicle Care 10-71
Towing Notice: A tow eye may be used to Recreational Vehicle

move a disabled vehicle if the
proper equipment is used. Use
Towing
Towing the Vehicle caution and low speeds to Recreational vehicle towing means
Notice: Incorrectly towing a prevent damage to the vehicle. towing the vehicle behind another
disabled vehicle may cause If equipped, carefully open the cover vehicle – such as behind a
damage. The damage would not by using the small notch that motorhome. The two most common
be covered by the vehicle conceals the tow eye socket. types of recreational vehicle towing
warranty. are known as dinghy towing and
Install the tow eye into the socket by dolly towing. Dinghy towing is
Have the vehicle towed on a flatbed turning it clockwise until it stops. towing the vehicle with all four
car carrier or a wheel lift tow truck. When the tow eye is removed, wheels on the ground. Dolly towing
If a wheel lift tow truck is used, the reinstall the cover with the notch in is towing the vehicle with two
drive wheels cannot contact the the original position. wheels on the ground and two
road while the vehicle is being
To tow the vehicle behind another wheels up on a device known as a
towed. A wheel dolly must be used
vehicle for recreational purposes, dolly.
to lift all drive wheels off the ground.
such as behind a motor home, see Here are some important things to
Consult your dealer or a “Recreational Vehicle Towing” in this consider before recreational vehicle
professional towing service if the section. towing:
disabled vehicle must be towed.
. What is the towing capacity of
the towing vehicle? Be sure to
read the tow vehicle
manufacturer's
recommendations.
10-72 Vehicle Care

. What is the distance that will be Dinghy Towing Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive
travelled? Some vehicles have Vehicles)
restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
. Is the proper towing equipment
going to be used? See your
dealer or trailering professional
for additional advice and
equipment recommendations.
. Is the vehicle ready to be
towed? Just as preparing the
vehicle for a long trip, make sure
the vehicle is prepared to be
towed.
Notice: If the vehicle is towed
with all four wheels on the All-wheel-drive vehicles must not be
ground, the drivetrain towed with two wheels on the
components could be damaged. ground. To properly tow these
The repairs would not be covered vehicles, they should be placed on
by the vehicle warranty. Do not a platform trailer with all four wheels
tow the vehicle with all four off of the ground.
wheels on the ground.
The vehicle was not designed to be
towed with all four wheels on the
ground.
Vehicle Care 10-73
Dolly Towing 4. Clamp the steering wheel in a

(Front-Wheel-Drive straight-ahead position with a
Vehicles Only) clamping device designed for
towing.
5. Remove the key from the
ignition.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
7. Release the parking brake.
Towing the Vehicle From
the Rear
Notice: Towing the vehicle from
the rear could damage it. Also,
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Never have
the vehicle towed from the rear.
To tow a front-wheel-drive vehicle
from the front with two wheels on Do not tow the vehicle from the rear.
the ground:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake.
10-74 Vehicle Care
Appearance Care exceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) If necessary, use non-abrasive
can result in damage or removal cleaners that are marked safe for
of paint and decals. painted surfaces to remove foreign
Exterior Care matter.
Rinse the vehicle well, before
Washing the Vehicle washing and after, to remove all Occasional hand waxing or mild
To preserve the vehicle's finish, cleaning agents completely. If they polishing should be done to remove
wash it often and out of direct are allowed to dry on the surface, residue from the paint finish. See
sunlight. they could stain. your dealer for approved cleaning
Dry the finish with a soft, clean products.
Notice: Do not use
petroleum-based, acidic, chamois or an all-cotton towel to Do not apply waxes or polishes to
or abrasive cleaning agents as avoid surface scratches and water uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,
they can damage the vehicle's spotting. decals, simulated wood, or flat paint
paint, metal, or plastic parts. as damage can occur.
Finish Care
If damage occurs, it would not be Notice: Machine compounding or
covered by the vehicle's warranty. Application of aftermarket clearcoat aggressive polishing on a
Approved cleaning products can sealant/wax materials is not basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
be obtained from your dealer. recommended. If painted surfaces may damage it. Use only
Follow all manufacturer are damaged, see your dealer to non-abrasive waxes and polishes
directions regarding correct have the damage assessed and that are made for a basecoat/
product usage, necessary safety repaired. Foreign materials such as clearcoat paint finish on the
precautions, and appropriate calcium chloride and other salts, ice vehicle.
disposal of any vehicle care melting agents, road oil and tar, tree
sap, bird droppings, chemicals from To keep the paint finish looking new,
product.
industrial chimneys, etc., can keep the vehicle garaged or
Notice: Avoid using damage the vehicle's finish if they covered whenever possible.
high-pressure washes closer than remain on painted surfaces. Wash
30 cm (12 in) to the surface of the the vehicle as soon as possible.
vehicle. Use of power washers
Vehicle Care 10-75
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Windshield and Wiper Blades clean cloth. See Recommended
Parts Fluids and Lubricants on
Clean the outside of the windshield
Regularly clean bright metal parts page 11‑13.
with glass cleaner.
with water or chrome polish on Tires
Clean rubber blades using a lint-free
chrome or stainless steel trim,
cloth or paper towel soaked with Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to
if necessary.
windshield washer fluid or a mild clean the tires.
For aluminum, never use auto or detergent. Wash the windshield
chrome polish, steam, or caustic thoroughly when cleaning the Notice: Using petroleum-based
soap to clean. A coating of wax, blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and tire dressing products on the
rubbed to a high polish, is a buildup of vehicle wash/wax vehicle may damage the paint
recommended for all bright metal treatments may cause wiper finish and/or tires. When applying
parts. streaking. a tire dressing, always wipe off
any overspray from all painted
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/ Replace the wiper blades if they are surfaces on the vehicle.
Lenses and Emblems worn or damaged. Damage can be
caused by extreme dusty Wheels and Trim — Aluminum
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun, or Chrome
soft cloth, and a car washing soap snow, and ice.
to clean exterior lamps, lenses and Use a soft, clean cloth with mild
emblems. Follow instructions under Weatherstrips soap and water to clean the wheels.
"Washing the Vehicle" in this After rinsing thoroughly with clean
Apply silicone grease on water, dry with a soft, clean towel.
section. weatherstrips to make them last A wax may then be applied.
longer, seal better, and not stick or
squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips Notice: Chrome wheels and other
once a year. Black marks from chrome trim may be damaged if
rubber material on painted surfaces the vehicle is not washed after
can be removed by rubbing with a driving on roads that have been
sprayed with magnesium,
10-76 Vehicle Care
calcium, or sodium chloride. leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually material to parts repaired or
These chlorides are used on check constant velocity joints, replaced to restore corrosion
roads for conditions such as ice rubber boots, and axle seals for protection.
and dust. Always wash the leaks. Original manufacturer replacement
chrome with soap and water after parts will provide the corrosion
exposure. Body Component Lubrication
protection while maintaining the
Notice: To avoid surface damage, Lubricate all key lock cylinders, vehicle warranty.
do not use strong soaps, hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and the
chemicals, abrasive polishes, steel fuel door hinge unless the Finish Damage
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners components are plastic. Applying Quickly repair minor chips and
that contain acid on aluminum or silicone grease on weatherstrips scratches with touch-up materials
chrome-plated wheels. Use only with a clean cloth will make them available from your dealer to avoid
approved cleaners. Also, never last longer, seal better, and not stick corrosion. Larger areas of finish
drive a vehicle with aluminum or or squeak. damage can be corrected in your
chrome-plated wheels through an Underbody Maintenance dealer's body and paint shop.
automatic car wash that uses
silicone carbide tire cleaning Use plain water to flush dirt and Chemical Paint Spotting
brushes. Damage could occur debris from the vehicle's underbody. Airborne pollutants can fall upon
and the repairs would not be Your dealer or an underbody car and attack painted vehicle surfaces
covered by the vehicle warranty. washing system can do this. If not causing blotchy, ring-shaped
removed, rust and corrosion can discolorations, and small, irregular
Steering, Suspension, and develop. dark spots etched into the paint
Chassis Components surface.
Sheet Metal Damage
Visually inspect the front and rear
suspension and steering system for If the vehicle is damaged and
damaged, loose, or missing parts or requires sheet metal repair or
signs of wear. Inspect the power replacement, make sure the body
steering for proper hook-up, binding, repair shop applies anti-corrosion
Vehicle Care 10-77

. Do not use laundry detergents or
Interior Care remain on the surface being
dishwashing soaps with
cleaned for extended periods
To prevent dirt particle abrasions, of time. degreasers. For liquid cleaners,
regularly clean the vehicle's interior. use approximately 20 drops per
Immediately remove any soils. Note Cleaners may contain solvents that 3.78 L (1 gal) of water.
that newspapers or dark garments can become concentrated in the A concentrated soap solution will
that can transfer color to home interior. Before using cleaners, read leave a residue that creates
furnishings can also permanently and adhere to all safety instructions streaks and attracts dirt. Do not
transfer color to the vehicle's on the label. While cleaning the use solutions that contain strong
interior. interior, maintain adequate or caustic soap.
ventilation by opening the doors and
Use a soft bristle brush to remove windows.
. Do not heavily saturate the
dust from knobs and crevices on the upholstery when cleaning.
instrument cluster. Using a mild To prevent damage, do not clean
the interior using the following
. Do not use solvents or cleaners
soap solution, immediately remove
cleaners or techniques: containing solvents.
hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect
repellent from all interior surfaces or . Never use a razor or any other Interior Glass
permanent damage may result. sharp object to remove a soil To clean, use a terry cloth fabric
Your dealer may have products for from any interior surface. dampened with water. Wipe droplets
cleaning the interior. Use cleaners . Never use a brush with stiff left behind with a clean dry cloth.
specifically designed for the bristles. Commercial glass cleaners may be
surfaces being cleaned to prevent used, if necessary, after cleaning
. Never rub any surface
permanent damage. Apply all the interior glass with plain water.
aggressively or with excessive
cleaners directly to the cleaning
cloth. Do not spray cleaners directly pressure. Notice: To prevent scratching,
on any switches or controls. never use abrasive cleaners on
Cleaners should be removed automotive glass. Abrasive
quickly. Never allow cleaners to
10-78 Vehicle Care
cleaners or aggressive cleaning Fabric/Carpet/Suede 3. Start on the outside edge of the

may damage the rear window soil and gently rub toward the
Start by vacuuming the surface
defogger. center. Fold the cleaning cloth to
using a soft brush attachment. If a
Notice: Cleaning the windshield a clean area frequently to
rotating brush attachment is being
with water during the first three to prevent forcing the soil in to the
used during vacuuming, only use it
six months of ownership will fabric.
on the floor carpet. Before cleaning,
reduce tendency to fog. gently remove as much of the soil 4. Continue gently rubbing the
as possible using one of the soiled area until there is no
Speaker Covers following techniques: longer any color transfer from
Vacuum around a speaker cover the soil to the cleaning cloth.
. Gently blot liquids with a paper
gently, so that the speaker will not towel. Continue blotting until no 5. If the soil is not completely
be damaged. Clean spots with just more soil can be removed. removed, use a mild soap
water and mild soap. solution followed only by club
. For solid soils, remove as much
Coated Moldings soda or plain water.
as possible prior to vacuuming.
Coated moldings should be cleaned. If the soil is not completely
To clean:
removed, it may be necessary to
. When lightly soiled, wipe with a 1. Saturate a clean lint-free use a commercial upholstery
sponge or soft lint-free cloth colorfast cloth with water or club cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small
dampened with water. soda. Microfiber cloth is hidden area for colorfastness before
. When heavily soiled, use warm recommended to prevent lint using a commercial upholstery
soapy water. transfer to the fabric or carpet. cleaner or spot lifter. If ring
2. Remove excess moisture by formation occurs, clean the entire
gently wringing until water does fabric or carpet.
not drip from the cleaning cloth. Following the cleaning process, a
paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture.
Vehicle Care 10-79
Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces Instrument Panel, Leather, Do not use cleaners that increase
and Vehicle Information and Vinyl, & Other Plastic Surfaces gloss, especially on the instrument
Radio Displays panel. Reflected glare can decrease
Use a soft microfiber cloth visibility through the windshield
For vehicles with high gloss dampened with water to remove under certain conditions.
surfaces or vehicle displays, use a dust and loose dirt. For a more
microfiber cloth to wipe surfaces. thorough cleaning, use a soft Notice: Use of air fresheners may
Before wiping the surface with the microfiber cloth dampened with a cause permanent damage to
microfiber cloth, use a soft bristle mild soap solution. plastics and painted surfaces.
brush to remove dirt that could If an air freshener comes in
Notice: Soaking or saturating contact with any plastic or
scratch the surface. Then use the leather, especially perforated
microfiber cloth by gently rubbing to painted surface in the vehicle,
leather, as well as other interior blot immediately and clean with a
clean. Never use window cleaners surfaces, may cause permanent
or solvents. Periodically hand wash soft cloth dampened with a mild
damage. Wipe excess moisture soap solution. Damage caused by
the microfiber cloth separately, from these surfaces after
using mild soap. Do not use bleach air fresheners would not be
cleaning and allow them to dry covered by the vehicle warranty.
or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly naturally. Never use heat, steam,
and air dry before next use. spot lifters, or spot removers. Cargo Cover and
Notice: Do not attach a device Do not use cleaners that contain Convenience Net
with a suction cup to the display. silicone or wax-based products.
Cleaners containing these Wash with warm water and mild
This may cause damage and
solvents can permanently change detergent. Do not use chlorine
would not be covered by the
the appearance and feel of leather bleach. Rinse with cold water, and
warranty.
or soft trim and are not then dry completely.
recommended.
10-80 Vehicle Care
Care of Safety Belts Floor Mats Non-GM floor mats may not fit
properly and may interfere with
Keep belts clean and dry.
the accelerator or brake pedal.
{ WARNING Always check that the floor mats
{ WARNING If a floor mat is the wrong size or do not interfere with the pedals.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. is not properly installed, it can . Use the floor mat with the
It may severely weaken them. In interfere with the pedals. correct side up. Do not turn
a crash, they might not be able to Interference with the pedals can it over.
provide adequate protection. cause unintended acceleration . Do not place anything on top of
Clean safety belts only with mild and/or increased stopping the driver side floor mat.
soap and lukewarm water. distance which can cause a crash . Use only a single floor mat on
and injury. Make sure the floor
the driver side.
mat does not interfere with the
pedals. . Do not place one floor mat on
top of another.
Use the following guidelines for The driver side floor mat is held in
proper floor mat usage. place by a button-type retainer.
. The original equipment floor
mats were designed for your
vehicle. If the floor mats need
replacing, it is recommended
that GM certified floor mats
be purchased.
Vehicle Care 10-81
Removing and Replacing the

Floor Mats
1. Pull up on the rear of the floor
mat to unlock the retainers and
remove.
2. Reinstall by lining up the floor
mat retainer openings over the
carpet retainers and snap into
position.
3. Make sure the floor mat is
properly secured and verify that
it does not interfere with the
pedals.
10-82 Vehicle Care
2 NOTES
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and Recommended Fluids,

Lubricants, and Parts
General Information
Maintenance Recommended Fluids and Your vehicle is an important
investment. This section describes
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Maintenance Replacement the required maintenance for the
General Information Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15 vehicle. Follow this schedule to help
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 protect against major repair
Maintenance Records expenses resulting from neglect or
Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-16 inadequate maintenance. It may
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 also help to maintain the value of
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the
Special Application Services responsibility of the owner to have
Special Application all required maintenance performed.
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Your dealer has trained technicians
Additional Maintenance who can perform required
and Care maintenance using genuine
Additional Maintenance replacement parts. They have up‐to‐
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 date tools and equipment for fast
and accurate diagnostics. Many
dealers have extended evening and
Saturday hours, courtesy
transportation, and online
scheduling to assist with service
needs.
11-2 Service and Maintenance
Your dealer recognizes the Proper vehicle maintenance helps to The Additional Required Services ‐
importance of providing keep the vehicle in good working Severe are for vehicles that are:
competitively priced maintenance condition, improves fuel economy, . Mainly driven in heavy city traffic
and repair services. With trained and reduces vehicle emissions. in hot weather.
technicians, the dealer is the place Because of the way people use . Mainly driven in hilly or
for routine maintenance such as oil vehicles, maintenance needs vary.
changes and tire rotations and mountainous terrain.
There may need to be more
additional maintenance items like frequent checks and services. . Frequently towing a trailer.
tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper The Additional Required Services ‐
blades.
. Used for high speed or
Normal are for vehicles that: competitive driving.
Notice: Damage caused by . Carry passengers and cargo
improper maintenance can lead to
. Used for taxi, police, or delivery
within recommended limits on service.
costly repairs and may not be the Tire and Loading Information
covered by the vehicle warranty. label. See Vehicle Load Limits Refer to the information in the
Maintenance intervals, checks, on page 9‑10. Maintenance Schedule Additional
inspections, recommended fluids, Required Services ‐ Severe chart.
. Are driven on reasonable road
and lubricants are important to
keep the vehicle in good working surfaces within legal driving
condition. limits.
The Tire Rotation and Required . Use the recommended fuel. See
Services are the responsibility of the Recommended Fuel on
vehicle owner. It is recommended to page 9‑40.
have your dealer perform these Refer to the information in the
services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi. Maintenance Schedule Additional
Required Services ‐ Normal chart.
Maintenance Engine Oil Change

{ WARNING When the Code 82 DIC message
Performing maintenance work can
Schedule displays, have the engine oil and
be dangerous and can cause Owner Checks and Services filter changed within the next
serious injury. Perform 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven under the
At Each Fuel Stop best conditions, the engine oil life
maintenance work only if the
required information, proper tools, . Check the engine oil level. See system might not indicate the need
and equipment are available. Engine Oil on page 10‑9. for vehicle service for more than a
If they are not, see your dealer to year. The engine oil and filter must
Once a Month be changed at least once a year
have a trained technician do the
. Check the tire inflation and the oil life system must be
work. See Doing Your Own
pressures. See Tire Pressure on reset. Your trained dealer technician
Service Work on page 10‑4.
page 10‑48. can perform this work. If the engine
oil life system is reset accidentally,
. Inspect the tires for wear. See service the vehicle within 5 000 km/
Tire Inspection on page 10‑53. 3,000 mi since the last service.
. Check the windshield washer Reset the oil life system when the
fluid level. See Washer Fluid on oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life
page 10‑21. System on page 10‑11.
Tire Rotation and Required

. Check windshield washer fluid . Inspect brake system.
Services Every 12 000 km/ level. See Washer Fluid on . Visually inspect steering,
page 10‑21. suspension, and chassis
7,500 mi
. Visually inspect windshield wiper components for damaged, loose,
Rotate the tires, if recommended for
blades for wear, cracking, or missing parts or signs of
the vehicle, and perform the
or contamination. See Exterior wear. See Exterior Care on
following services. See Tire
Care on page 10‑74. Replace page 10‑74.
Rotation on page 10‑54.
worn or damaged wiper blades. . Check restraint system
. Check engine oil level and oil See Wiper Blade Replacement components. See Safety System
life percentage. If needed, on page 10‑26. Check on page 3‑20.
change engine oil and filter, and . Check tire inflation pressures. . Visually inspect fuel system for
reset oil life system. See Engine
See Tire Pressure on damage or leaks.
Oil on page 10‑9 and Engine Oil
page 10‑48.
Life System on page 10‑11. . Visually inspect exhaust system
. Inspect tire wear. See Tire
. Check engine coolant level. See and nearby heat shields for
Inspection on page 10‑53. loose or damaged parts.
Engine Coolant on page 10‑16.
. Visually check for fluid leaks. . Lubricate body components. See
. Check engine cooling system
hoses and connections. . Inspect engine air cleaner filter. Exterior Care on page 10‑74.
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 10‑13.

. Check starter switch. See Starter . Check accelerator pedal for
Switch Check on page 10‑24. damage, high effort, or binding.
. Check automatic transmission Replace if needed.
shift lock control function. See . Visually inspect gas strut for
Automatic Transmission Shift signs of wear, cracks, or other
Lock Control Function Check on damage. Check the hold open
page 10‑25. ability of the strut. See your
. Check ignition transmission lock. dealer if service is required.
See Ignition Transmission Lock . Inspect sunroof track and seal,
Check on page 10‑25. if equipped. See Sunroof on
. Check parking brake and page 2‑16.
automatic transmission park
mechanism. See Park Brake and
P (Park) Mechanism Check on
page 10‑26.
Additional Required Services
1 2 0 0 0 k m/7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 k m /1 5 ,0 0 0 mi
3 6 0 0 0 k m /2 2 ,5 0 0 mi
4 8 0 0 0 k m /3 0 ,0 0 0 mi
6 0 0 0 0 k m /3 7 ,5 0 0 mi
7 2 0 0 0 k m /4 5 ,0 0 0 mi
8 4 0 0 0 k m /5 2 ,5 0 0 mi
9 6 0 0 0 k m /6 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 0 8 0 0 0 k m /6 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 2 0 0 0 0 k m /7 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 3 2 0 0 0 k m /8 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 4 4 0 0 0 k m /9 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 5 6 0 0 0 k m /9 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 6 8 0 0 0 k m /1 0 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 9 2 0 0 0 k m /1 2 0 ,0 0 0 mi
2 0 4 0 0 0 k m /1 2 7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 1 6 0 0 0 k m /1 3 5 ,0 0 0 mi
2 2 8 0 0 0 k m /1 4 2 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 0 k m /1 5 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 8 0 0 0 0 k m /11 2 ,5 0 0 mi
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required
Services - Normal
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @
Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @
Change automatic transmission fluid. Change
filter if serviceable.
@
Drain, flush, and fill engine cooling system. (4) @
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @
Replace brake/clutch fluid. (6) @
Replace timing belt or timing chain. (6) @
Footnotes — Maintenance (2) Check all fuel and vapor lines (5) Or every 10 years, whichever
Schedule Additional Required and hoses for proper hook-up, comes first. Inspect for fraying,
Services - Normal routing, and condition. Check that excessive cracking, or damage;
(1) Or every two years, whichever the purge valve works properly, replace, if needed.
comes first. More frequent if the vehicle has one. Replace as (6) Or every 10 years, whichever
replacement may be needed if the needed. comes first.
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy (3) Or every four years, whichever
traffic, areas with poor air quality, comes first.
or areas with high dust levels.
(4) Or every five years, whichever
Replacement may also be needed if
comes first. See Cooling System on
there is a reduction in air flow, page 10‑15.
excessive window fogging, or odors.
1 2 0 0 0 k m/7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 k m/1 5 ,0 0 0 mi
3 6 0 0 0 k m/2 2 ,5 0 0 mi
4 8 0 0 0 k m/3 0 ,0 0 0 mi
6 0 0 0 0 k m/3 7 ,5 0 0 mi
7 2 0 0 0 k m/4 5 ,0 0 0 mi
8 4 0 0 0 k m/5 2 ,5 0 0 mi
9 6 0 0 0 k m/6 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 0 8 0 0 0 k m/6 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 2 0 0 0 0 k m/7 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 3 2 0 0 0 k m/8 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 4 4 0 0 0 k m/9 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 5 6 0 0 0 k m/9 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 6 8 0 0 0 k m/1 0 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 9 2 0 0 0 k m/1 2 0 ,0 0 0 mi
2 0 4 0 0 0 k m/1 2 7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 1 6 0 0 0 k m/1 3 5 ,0 0 0 mi
2 2 8 0 0 0 k m/1 4 2 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 0 k m/1 5 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 8 0 0 0 0 k m/11 2 ,5 0 0 mi
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required
Services - Severe
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @
Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Change automatic transmission fluid. Change
filter if serviceable.
@ @ @
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @
Drain, flush, and fill engine cooling system. (4) @
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @
Replace brake/clutch fluid. (6) @
Replace timing belt or timing chain. (6) @
Footnotes — Maintenance vehicle is driven in areas with heavy (2) Check all fuel and vapor lines
Schedule Additional Required traffic, areas with poor air quality, and hoses for proper hook-up,
Services - Severe or areas with high dust levels. routing, and condition. Check that
(1) Or every two years, whichever Replacement may also be needed if the purge valve works properly,
comes first. More frequent there is a reduction in air flow, if the vehicle has one. Replace as
replacement may be needed if the excessive window fogging, or odors. needed.
(3) Or every four years, whichever Special Application Additional

comes first.
(4) Or every five years, whichever
Services Maintenance and Care
comes first. See Cooling System on . Severe Commercial Use Your vehicle is an important
page 10‑15. Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis investment and caring for it properly
(5) Or every 10 years, whichever components every 5 000 km/ may help to avoid future costly
comes first. Inspect for fraying, 3,000 mi. repairs. To maintain vehicle
excessive cracking, or damage; . Have underbody flushing service performance, additional
replace, if needed. performed once a year. maintenance services may be
required. It is recommended
(6) Or every 10 years, whichever that your dealer perform these
comes first. services — their trained dealer
technicians know your vehicle best.
Your dealer can also perform a
thorough assessment with a
multi‐point inspection to recommend
when your vehicle may need
attention. The following list is
intended to explain the services and
conditions to look for that may
indicate services are required.
Battery Brakes Hoses

The battery supplies power to start Brakes stop the vehicle and are Hoses transport fluids and should
the engine and operate any crucial to safe driving. be regularly inspected to ensure
additional electrical accessories. . Signs of brake wear may include that there are no cracks or leaks.
. To avoid break‐down or failure to chirping, grinding, or squealing With a multi‐point inspection, your
start the vehicle, maintain a noises, or difficulty stopping. dealer can inspect the hoses and
battery with full cranking power. advise if replacement is needed.
. Trained dealer technicians have
. Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment Lamps
the diagnostic equipment to test to inspect the brakes and Properly working headlamps,
the battery and ensure that the recommend quality parts taillamps, and brake lamps are
connections and cables are engineered for the vehicle. important to see and be seen on
corrosion‐free. the road.
Fluids
Belts Proper fluid levels and approved
. Signs that the headlamps need
. Belts may need replacing if they fluids protect the vehicle’s systems attention include dimming, failure
squeak or show signs of and components. See to light, cracking, or damage.
cracking or splitting. Recommended Fluids and The brake lamps need to be
Lubricants on page 11‑13 for GM checked periodically to ensure
. Trained dealer technicians can that they light when braking.
inspect the belts and approved fluids.
. With a multi‐point inspection,
recommend replacement when . Engine oil and windshield
necessary. washer fluid levels should be your dealer can check the lamps
checked at every fuel fill. and note any concerns.
. Instrument cluster lights may
come on to indicate that fluids
may be low and need to be
filled.
Shocks and Struts Tires Vehicle Care

Shocks and struts help aid in control Tires need to be properly inflated, To help keep the vehicle looking like
for a smoother ride. rotated, and balanced. Maintaining new, vehicle care products are
. Signs of wear may include the tires can save money, fuel, and available from your dealer. For
steering wheel vibration, bounce/ can reduce the risk of tire failure. information on how to clean and
sway while braking, longer . Signs that the tires need to be protect the vehicle’s interior and
stopping distance, or uneven replaced include three or more exterior, see Interior Care on
tire wear. visible treadwear indicators; cord page 10‑77 and Exterior Care on
or fabric showing through the page 10‑74.
. As part of the multi‐point
inspection, trained dealer rubber; cracks or cuts in the Wheel Alignment
technicians can visually inspect tread or sidewall; or a bulge or
split in the tire. Wheel alignment is critical for
the shocks and struts for signs ensuring that the tires deliver
of leaking, blown seals, . Trained dealer technicians can optimal wear and performance.
or damage, and can advise inspect and recommend the right
when service is needed. tires. Your dealer can also
. Signs that the alignment may
provide tire/wheel balancing need to be adjusted include
services to ensure smooth pulling, improper vehicle
vehicle operation at all speeds. handling, or unusual tire wear.
Your dealer sells and services . Your dealer has the required
name brand tires. equipment to ensure proper
wheel alignment.
Windshield Wiper Blades

For safety, appearance, and the Wiper blades need to be cleaned
best viewing, keep the windshield and kept in good condition to
clean and clear. provide a clear view.
. Signs of damage include . Signs of wear include streaking,
scratches, cracks, and chips. skipping across the windshield,
. Trained dealer technicians can and worn or split rubber.
inspect the windshield and . Trained dealer technicians can
recommend proper replacement check the wiper blades and
if needed. replace them when needed.
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, of
the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is
recommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑9.
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑16.
Hydraulic Brake/Clutch System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806, in
Canada 88863462).
Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection
requirements.
Hydraulic Power Steering System DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and Canada 89021674) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Release Pawl Category LB or GC-LB.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 95021102 —
Engine Oil Filter 93185674 PF2257G
Passenger Compartment Air Filter 13271190 CF181
Spark Plugs
1.4L L4 55585517 —
1.8L L4 55565219 —
Wiper Blades
Driver Side – 65.0 cm (25.6 in) 95915125 —
Passenger Side – 38.0 cm (15.0 in) 95915127 —
Rear – 26.5 cm (10.4 in) 95915137 —
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4 Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front . Paint information.
corner of the instrument panel, on .
the left side of the vehicle. It can be Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on Do not remove this label from the
the Vehicle Certification and Service vehicle.
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑13 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type and
charge amount, see the refrigerant label under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System
1.4L L4 6.5 L 6.9 qt
1.8L L4 6.6 L 7.0 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
1.4L L4 4.0 L 4.2 qt
1.8L L4 4.5 L 4.8 qt
Fuel Tank 53 L 14 gal
Wheel Nut Torque 140 Y 100 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Technical Data 12-3
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
1.4L L4 B Automatic and Manual 0.7 mm (0.028 in)
1.8L L4 5 Automatic and Manual 0.9 mm (0.035 in)
12-4 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
1.8L L4 Engine (with Air 1.8L L4 Engine (without Air

Conditioning) Conditioning)
1.4L L4 Engine
Customer Information 13-1
Courtesy Transportation
Customer Program (Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-11
Customer Information
Information Collision Damage Repair
(Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Customer Satisfaction
Service Publications Procedure (Canada)
Customer Information Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-15
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Customer Satisfaction Reporting Safety Defects important to your dealer and to
Procedure (Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
Customer Satisfaction the Canadian with the sales transaction or the
Procedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3 Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 operation of the vehicle will be
Customer Assistance Offices Reporting Safety Defects to resolved by your dealer's sales or
(Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 service departments. Sometimes,
Customer Assistance Offices however, despite the best intentions
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Vehicle Data Recording and of all concerned, misunderstandings
Customer Assistance for Text Privacy can occur. If your concern has not
Telephone (TTY) Users Vehicle Data Recording and been resolved to your satisfaction,
(Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 the following steps should be taken:
Online Owner Center Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-17
(Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 OnStar® (Canada) . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
GM Mobility Reimbursement Radio Frequency with a member of dealership
Program (Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-18 management. Normally, concerns
Roadside Assistance Program Radio Frequency Statement can be quickly resolved at that level.
(Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 (Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 If the matter has already been
Roadside Assistance Program reviewed with the sales, service,
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 or parts manager, contact the owner
Scheduling Service of your dealership or the general
Appointments (Canada) . . . 13-11 manager.
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, We believe our impartial program
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will offers advantages over courts in
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's most jurisdictions because it is
resolved by your dealership without facility. That is why we suggest informal, quick, and free of charge.
further help, call General Motors of following Step One first. For further information concerning
Canada Customer Care Centre at STEP THREE: In the event that eligibility in the Canadian Motor
1-800-263-3777 (English) or you do not feel your concerns have Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
1-800-263-7854 (French). been addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call
We encourage you to call the procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer Care
toll-free number in order to give your and Two, General Motors of Canada Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),
inquiry prompt attention. Have the Limited wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-7854 (French),
following information available to participation in a no-charge or write to:
give the Customer Care Mediation/Arbitration Program. The Mediation/Arbitration Program
representative: General Motors of Canada Limited c/o Customer Care Centre
. Vehicle Identification has committed to binding arbitration General Motors of Canada Limited
Number (VIN). This is available of owner disputes involving Mail Code: CA1-163-005
from the vehicle registration or factory-related vehicle service 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
title, or the plate at the top left of claims. The program provides for Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
the instrument panel and visible the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and Your inquiry should be accompanied
through the windshield. by the Vehicle Identification
may include an informal hearing
. Dealership name and location. before the arbiter. The program is Number (VIN).
. Vehicle delivery date and designed so that the entire dispute
present mileage. settlement process, from the time
you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in
about 70 days.
Customer Satisfaction the good intentions of all parties STEP THREE

involved, sometimes a
Procedure (Mexico) misunderstanding may occur.
If your case is not resolved in a
reasonable amount of time by your
If you have a problem that has not dealer, please call the General
been satisfactorily handled through Motors Customer Assistance
the normal means, we suggest the Center (CAC) and provide the
following steps: following information:
STEP ONE . Name
Explain your case to your dealer . Address
Did you get the Warranty Extension service agent, service manager, . Phone number
Plan? This plan is recommended by dealer sales agent, or sales
General Motors to supplement the manager, depending on your case.
. Model year
warranty included with the new . Brand
vehicle purchase. Make sure that they have all
necessary information. They are . Vehicle Identification
See your dealer for details. interested in your continual Number (VIN)
satisfaction.
Customer Assistance . Mileage
Procedure STEP TWO . Delivery date
Owner satisfaction and goodwill are If you are not satisfied, please . Description of the problem
very important to your dealer and contact the general manager or your
. Dealership name
General Motors. dealership owner to ask for their
help. If they are not able to resolve . Dealership address
Normally, any problem with the
your case, ask them to contact the
transaction, sale, or usage of the See Customer Assistance Offices
right people at General Motors for
vehicle must be handled by your (Canada) on page 13‑4 or Customer
support, if needed.
dealer sales or service departments. Assistance Offices (Mexico) on
However, we recognize that despite page 13‑4.
Customer Assistance Customer Assistance Guatemala

Offices (Canada) Offices (Mexico) 1-800-999-5252
Chevrolet encourages customers to To contact the Customer Assistance Panama
call the toll-free number for Center (CAC), use the phone
assistance. However, if a customer numbers listed in this section. 00-800-052-0001
wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, Customer assistance is available Dominican Republic
the letter should be addressed to: Monday through Friday, 08:00 to
20:00 hours, and Saturdays from 1-888-751-5301
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Care Centre, 08:00 to 15:00 hours. El Salvador
Mail Code: CA1-163-005 All e-mail inquiries to the Customer 800-6273
1908 Colonel Sam Drive Assistance Center (CAC) should be
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 sent to: cac.chevrolet@gm.com. Honduras
www.gm.ca 800-0122-6101
Mexico
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French) From Mexico City Customer Assistance for
1-800-263-3830 (For Text 5329-0811
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Text Telephone (TTY)
Roadside Assistance: From Other Mexico Locations Users (Canada)
1-800-268-6800 01-800-466-0811 To assist customers who are deaf,
Overseas hard of hearing, or speech-impaired
United States and Canada and who use Text Telephones
Please contact the local General 1-866-466-8190 (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
Motors Business Unit. equipment available at its Customer
Costa Rica Care Center. Any TTY user can
00-800-052-1005 communicate with Chevrolet by
dialing: 1-800-263-3830.

. Find the
Online Owner Center Chevrolet-recommended
Roadside Assistance
(Canada) maintenance services for your Program (Canada)
vehicle. Call 1-800-268-6800.
Chevrolet Owner Centre
(chevroletowner.ca) Service is available 24 hours a day,
GM Mobility 365 days a year.
Take a trip to the Chevrolet Owner Reimbursement Program
Centre: Calling for Assistance
(Canada)
. Chat live with online help When calling Roadside Assistance,
representatives. have the following information
. Use the Vehicle Tools section. ready:
. Your name, home address, and
. Access third party enthusiast
sites and social media networks. home telephone number.
. Locate owner resources such as . Telephone number of your
lease-end, financing, and location.
warranty information. This program is available to .
qualified applicants for cost Location of the vehicle.
. Retrieve your favorite articles, reimbursement of eligible . Model, year, color, and license
quizzes, tips and multimedia aftermarket adaptive equipment plate number of the vehicle.
galleries organized into the required for the vehicle, such as
Features and Auto Care
. Odometer reading, Vehicle
hand controls or a wheelchair/ Identification Number (VIN), and
Sections. scooter lift for the vehicle. delivery date of the vehicle.
. Download the owner manual for For more information on this offer,
your vehicle, quickly and easily.
. Description of the problem.
call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483).
TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
Coverage Services Provided responsibility for the repair or

replacement of the tire if it is not
Services are provided up to 5 years/ . Emergency Fuel Delivery:
covered by the warranty.
160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever Delivery of enough fuel for the
comes first. vehicle to get to the nearest . Battery Jump Start: Service to
service station. jump start a dead battery.
A person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not . Lock-Out Service: Service to Services Not Included in
covered. unlock the vehicle if you are Roadside Assistance
Roadside Assistance is not a part of locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar.
. Impound towing caused by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. violation of any laws.
Chevrolet and General Motors of For security reasons, the driver
Canada Limited reserve the right to must present identification . Legal fines.
make any changes or discontinue before this service is given. . Mounting, dismounting,
the Roadside Assistance program at . Emergency Tow from a Public or changing of snow tires,
any time without notification. Road or Highway: Tow to the chains, or other traction devices.
Chevrolet and General Motors of nearest Chevrolet dealer for . Towing or services for vehicles
Canada Limited reserve the right to warranty service, or if the vehicle
driven on a non-public road or
limit services or payment to an was in a crash and cannot be
highway.
owner or driver if they decide the driven. Assistance is also given
claims are made too often, or the when the vehicle is stuck in the Additional Service Details
same type of claim is made many sand, mud, or snow. . Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement
times. . Flat Tire Change: Service to is approximately $5 Canadian.
change a flat tire with the spare Diesel fuel delivery may be
tire. The spare tire, if equipped, restricted. Propane and other
must be in good condition and fuels are not provided through
properly inflated. It is the owner's this service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle parts and labor for repairs not Roadside Assistance is available
registration is required. covered by the warranty are the 24 hours a day, 365 days of
. Trip Interruption Benefits and owner responsibility. the year.
Assistance: Must be over This program expires two years
250 kilometers from where your Roadside Assistance from the date of the invoice for the
trip was started to qualify. Program (Mexico) vehicle, regardless of vehicle
General Motors of Canada mileage and changes in vehicle
Limited requires As a new owner, your vehicle is
ownership.
pre-authorization, original automatically enrolled in the
detailed receipts, and a copy of Roadside Assistance program. For more information about the
the repair orders. Once The services are available at no renewal of this program at the end
authorization has been received, cost under the terms and conditions of its term, contact the Chevrolet
the Roadside Assistance advisor of the program. The Roadside Customer Assistance Center at
will help to make arrangements Assistance program is not part of, 01-800-466-0800.
and explain how to receive or included, in the coverage
Services Provided
payment. provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. . Flat Tire Change: If unable to
. Alternative Service: If change a flat tire, Roadside
assistance cannot be provided Roadside Assistance provides Assistance will provide towing
right away, the Roadside assistance to the driver and service to the nearest authorized
Assistance advisor may give passengers while driving the vehicle Chevrolet dealership. It is the
permission to get local within your city of residence or on owner's responsibility for the
emergency road service. You will any passable road in Mexico, the repair or replacement of the tire.
receive payment, up to $100, United States, and Canada. This service is limited to the
after sending the original receipt Services are subject to the transfer of the vehicle to the
to Roadside Assistance. limitations described in the following repair facility.
Mechanical failures may be pages. Program coverage varies by
covered, however any cost for country.

. Emergency Fuel Delivery: . Emergency Towing: Tow to the If the vehicle cannot be received
Delivery of enough fuel for the nearest dealer for warranty by the nearest Chevrolet dealer
vehicle to get to the nearest service if the vehicle cannot be due to scheduling conflicts, the
service station. driven. vehicle will be taken to a safe
. Lock-Out Service: Service to If the vehicle is involved in an place where it will remain for up
unlock the vehicle if you are accident during the commission to 48 hours until it can be taken
locked out. of a crime, administrative to the dealer. If the storage costs
violation, or breach of traffic exceed the amount authorized,
. Battery Jump Start: Service to the owner is responsible to pay
jump start a dead battery. regulations, Roadside
Assistance will not provide the difference at the time of
. *Emergency Messages: service. When the vehicle is service. Contact Roadside
Transmission of urgent phone not accessible to be towed, all Assistance for more information
messages. maneuvers required to access it on authorized amounts.
. *Emergency Calls: Call for will be at the owner's expense.
emergency services. If the vehicle is in another city
. *Dealership Location outside of your residence,
Assistance: Information Roadside Assistance is limited
regarding addresses and to moving the vehicle to the
telephone numbers for Chevrolet nearest dealer. If you would like
dealers. the vehicle moved to a different
dealer, you will be asked to
cover the difference in cost at
the time of the move.

. *Trip Interruption: This service A rental car will be provided for
. *Complimentary
is provided if you are prevented up to two days and the vehicle Transportation for Vehicle
from further usage of your must be returned to its original Pick Up: Transportation to pick
vehicle while traveling and it is destination, excluding vehicles up your vehicle after repairs are
not possible for the nearest with a carrying capacity greater complete. Once the dealer has
Chevrolet dealership to repair than 3.5 tons. reported that the vehicle has
the vehicle the same day, been repaired, Roadside
requiring the vehicle to stay at Complimentary Transportation: Assistance will provide bus or
the dealership for a night or If you prefer to continue your trip commercial airline one-way
more. If this happens, in addition to the intended destination or service (subject to availability)
to the previously listed services return to your place of for the person designated by you
and prior to confirmation by the residence, and the trip requires to collect your vehicle at the
dealership, you are entitled to more than eight hours driving on dealership's location if you or the
choose one of the following the road, transportation for the designated person are not in the
alternatives, within the limits of driver and passengers by first same town or city as the
existing Roadside Assistance class bus or coach commercial dealership.
program guidelines. If the costs airline will be provided to a
location chosen by Roadside *These services are not provided
exceed the amount authorized for U.S. or Canada residents.
for these services, you must pay Assistance, depending on
availability at the chosen All services provided in the U.S. and
the difference at the time of Canada are at the owner's expense
service. destination. Restrictions apply
based on vehicle specifications. and will be reimbursed by Roadside
Roadside Assistance will Assistance.
coordinate hotel If you are on the road, taxi
accommodations for all vehicle service to the nearest bus
travelers for up to two nights. station or airport will be
provided.
Services Not Included in Roadside

. Food service, beverages, Contacting Roadside Assistance
Assistance telephone calls, or other extra
costs. Accommodation costs Roadside Assistance services are of
Roadside Assistance does not apply only to Mexico per the no cost to you and available
cover or reimburse services for the terms and conditions of the 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
following: Roadside Assistance program. Costs are only incurred in situations
. Events caused by fraud or bad that exceed the limits of the
. Any damage to the vehicle program, some of which are listed
faith by the driver. without intent, derived from the previously in this section.
. Vehicle immobilization situations services provided.
due to a major force or To contact Roadside Assistance by
. Cost of towing a trailer when phone, use the following numbers:
unforeseen circumstances, choosing a Chevrolet dealer that
such as natural phenomena of is nearest to the temporary Mexico
an extraordinary nature, storage facility for the disabled
earthquakes, volcanic eruptions, 01-800-466-0800
vehicle.
and other cyclonic storms. United States
. Cost of all maneuvers required
. Vehicle immobilization situations to access the vehicle when it is 1-866-466-8901
arising from car accidents not available to be towed.
caused by the driver of the Canada
. Cost of fuel provided.
vehicle or third parties. This 1-800-268-6800
means any occurrence that Routine vehicle repair costs are
causes physical injury to the E-mail
not covered by the Roadside
occupants and/or the vehicle Assistance program. For more asistencia.chevrolet@gm.com
caused by external forces. information, see your new vehicle Chevrolet reserves the right to make
. Acts of terrorism, riot or uproar, warranty. any changes or discontinue the
armed forces or police actions Roadside Assistance program at
which prevent timely delivery of any time without notification.
assistance services.
Scheduling Service Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options

Appointments (Canada) Program (Canada) Warranty service can generally be
completed while you wait. However,
When the vehicle requires warranty To enhance your ownership
if you are unable to wait, GM helps
service, contact your dealer and experience, we and our participating
to minimize inconvenience by
request an appointment. By dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
providing several transportation
scheduling a service appointment Transportation, a customer support
options. Depending on the
and advising the service consultant program for vehicles with the
circumstances, your dealer can
of your transportation needs, your Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
offer one of the following:
dealer can help minimize your Coverage period in Canada),
inconvenience. extended powertrain, and/or Shuttle Service
If the vehicle cannot be scheduled hybrid-specific warranties in both
Shuttle service is the preferred
into the service department the U.S. and Canada.
means of offering Courtesy
immediately, keep driving it until it Several Courtesy Transportation Transportation. Dealers may provide
can be scheduled for service, options are available to assist in shuttle service to get you to your
unless, of course, the problem is reducing inconvenience when destination with minimal interruption
safety related. If it is, please call warranty repairs are required. of your daily schedule. This includes
your dealership, let them know this, Courtesy Transportation is not a one-way or round-trip shuttle service
and ask for instructions. part of the New Vehicle Limited within reasonable time and distance
If your dealer requests you to bring Warranty. A separate booklet parameters of your dealer's area.
the vehicle for service, you are entitled “Limited Warranty and Public Transportation or Fuel
urged to do so as early in the work Owner Assistance Information” Reimbursement
day as possible to allow for furnished with each new vehicle
same-day repair. provides detailed warranty coverage If the vehicle requires overnight
information. warranty repairs, and public
transportation is used instead of
your dealer's shuttle service, the
expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up insurance coverage, credit card, etc. Collision Damage Repair
to the maximum amount allowed by You are responsible for fuel usage
GM for shuttle service. In addition, charges and may also be
(Canada)
for U.S. customers, should you responsible for taxes, levies, usage If the vehicle is involved in a
arrange transportation through a fees, excessive mileage, or rental collision and it is damaged, have the
friend or relative, limited usage beyond the completion of the damage repaired by a qualified
reimbursement for reasonable fuel repair. technician using the proper
expenses may be available. Claim It may not be possible to provide a equipment and quality replacement
amounts should reflect actual costs like vehicle as a courtesy rental. parts. Poorly performed collision
and be supported by original repairs diminish the vehicle resale
receipts. See your dealer for Additional Program value, and safety performance can
information regarding the allowance Information be compromised in subsequent
amounts for reimbursement of fuel collisions.
or other transportation costs. All program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at Collision Parts
Courtesy Rental Vehicle every dealer. Please contact your
Genuine GM Collision parts are new
Your dealer may arrange to provide dealer for specific information about
parts made with the same materials
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or availability. All Courtesy
and construction methods as the
reimburse you for a rental vehicle Transportation arrangements will be
parts with which the vehicle was
that you obtain if the vehicle is kept administered by appropriate dealer
originally built. Genuine GM
for an overnight warranty repair. personnel.
Collision parts are the best choice to
Rental reimbursement will be limited General Motors reserves the right to ensure that the vehicle's designed
and must be supported by original unilaterally modify, change, appearance, durability, and safety
receipts. This requires that you sign or discontinue Courtesy are preserved. The use of Genuine
and complete a rental agreement Transportation at any time and to GM parts can help maintain the GM
and meet state/provincial, local, and resolve all questions of claim New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
rental vehicle provider requirements. eligibility pursuant to the terms and
Requirements vary and may include conditions described herein at its
minimum age requirements, sole discretion.
Recycled original equipment parts collisions. Aftermarket parts are not Many insurance policies provide
may also be used for repair. These covered by the GM New Vehicle reduced protection to the GM
parts are typically removed from Limited Warranty, and any vehicle vehicle by limiting compensation for
vehicles that were total losses in failure related to such parts is not damage repairs through the use of
prior crashes. In most cases, the covered by that warranty. aftermarket collision parts. Some
parts being recycled are from insurance companies will not
undamaged sections of the vehicle. Repair Facility specify aftermarket collision parts.
A recycled original equipment GM GM also recommends that you When purchasing insurance, we
part may be an acceptable choice to choose a collision repair facility that recommend that you ensure that the
maintain the vehicle's originally meets your needs before you ever vehicle will be repaired with GM
designed appearance and safety need collision repairs. Your dealer original equipment collision parts.
performance; however, the history of may have a collision repair center If such insurance coverage is not
these parts is not known. Such parts with GM-trained technicians and available from your current
are not covered by the GM New state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be insurance carrier, consider switching
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any able to recommend a collision repair to another insurance carrier.
related failures are not covered by center that has GM-trained If the vehicle is leased, the leasing
that warranty. technicians and comparable company may require you to have
Aftermarket collision parts are also equipment. insurance that ensures repairs with
available. These are made by Insuring the Vehicle Genuine GM Original Equipment
companies other than GM and may Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
not have been tested for the vehicle. Protect your investment in the GM Genuine Manufacturer replacement
As a result, these parts may fit vehicle with comprehensive and parts. Read the lease carefully, as
poorly, exhibit premature durability/ collision insurance coverage. There you may be charged at the end of
corrosion problems, and may not are significant differences in the the lease for poor quality repairs.
perform properly in subsequent quality of coverage afforded by
various insurance policy terms.
If a Crash Occurs
. Vehicle make, model, and required replacement collision parts
model year. be original equipment parts, either
If there has been an injury, call . Vehicle Identification new Genuine GM parts or recycled
emergency services for help. Do not
Number (VIN). original GM parts. Remember,
leave the scene of a crash until all
recycled parts will not be covered by
matters have been taken care of. . Insurance company and policy the GM vehicle warranty.
Move the vehicle only if its position number.
puts you in danger, or you are Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
. General description of the but you must live with the repair.
instructed to move it by a police
damage to the other vehicle. Depending on your policy limits,
officer.
Choose a reputable repair facility your insurance company may
Give only the necessary information
that uses quality replacement parts. initially value the repair using
to police and other parties involved
See “Collision Parts” earlier in this aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
in the crash.
section. the repair professional, and insist on
For emergency towing see Genuine GM parts. Remember,
If the airbag has inflated, see What
Roadside Assistance Program if the vehicle is leased, you may be
Will You See after an Airbag
(Canada) on page 13‑5 or Roadside obligated to have the vehicle
Inflates? on page 3‑30.
Assistance Program (Mexico) on repaired with Genuine GM parts,
page 13‑7. Managing the Vehicle Damage even if your insurance coverage
Gather the following information: Repair Process does not pay the full cost.
. Driver name, address, and In the event that the vehicle requires If another party's insurance
telephone number. damage repairs, GM recommends company is paying for the repairs,
that you take an active role in its you are not obligated to accept a
. Driver license number. repair. If you have a pre-determined repair valuation based on that
. Owner name, address, and repair facility of choice, take the insurance company's collision policy
telephone number. vehicle there, or have it towed there. repair limits, as you have no
Specify to the facility that any contractual limits with that company.
. Vehicle license plate number.
In such cases, you can have control Owner Information Current and Past Models
of the repair and parts choices as
Owner publications are written Technical Service Bulletins and
long as the cost stays within
specifically for owners and intended Manuals are available for current
reasonable limits.
to provide basic operational and past model GM vehicles.
information about the vehicle.
Service Publications The Owner Manual includes the
ORDER TOLL FREE:
1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday
Ordering Information Maintenance Schedule for all 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
models.
Service Manuals For Credit Card Orders Only
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
Service Manuals have the diagnosis Owner Manual, and Warranty
and repair information on the Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
Booklet.
engines, transmission, axle, Or write to:
suspension, brakes, electrical, RETAIL SELL PRICE:
steering, body, etc. $35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and Helm, Incorporated
shipping fees. Attention: Customer Service
Service Bulletins 47911 Halyard Drive
Without Portfolio: Owner Plymouth, MI 48170
Service Bulletins give additional Manual only.
technical service information Prices are subject to change without
RETAIL SELL PRICE: notice and without incurring
needed to knowledgeably service
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and obligation. Allow ample time for
General Motors cars and trucks.
shipping fees. delivery.
Each bulletin contains instructions
to assist in the diagnosis and All listed prices are quoted in
service of the vehicle. U.S. funds. Make checks payable
in U.S. funds.
Reporting Safety Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data

Defects to General Motors Recording and
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Privacy
Reporting Safety Defects Transport Canada) in a situation like
this, notify General Motors. The vehicle has a number of
to the Canadian computers that record information
Government Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
about the vehicle’s performance and
If you live in Canada, and you Chevrolet Motor Division how it is driven. For example, the
believe that the vehicle has a safety Chevrolet Customer vehicle uses computer modules to
defect, notify Transport Canada Assistance Center monitor and control engine and
immediately, and notify General P.O. Box 33170 transmission performance, to
Motors of Canada Limited. Detroit, MI 48232-5170 monitor the conditions for airbag
Call Transport Canada at In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 deployment and deploy them in a
1-800-333-0510 or write to: (English) or 1-800-263-7854 crash, and, if equipped, to provide
(French), or write: antilock braking to help the driver
Transport Canada control the vehicle. These modules
Road Safety Branch General Motors of Canada Limited may store data to help the dealer
80 rue Noel Customer Care Centre, technician service the vehicle.
Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1 Mail Code: CA1-163-005 Some modules may also store data
1908 Colonel Sam Drive about how the vehicle is operated,
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 such as rate of fuel consumption or
average speed. These modules may
retain personal preferences, such as
radio presets, seat positions, and
temperature settings.
Event Data Recorders These data can help provide a GM will not access this data or
better understanding of the share it with others except: with the
This vehicle is equipped with an circumstances in which crashes and consent of the vehicle owner or,
event data recorder (EDR). The injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are if the vehicle is leased, with the
main purpose of an EDR is to recorded by your vehicle only if a consent of the lessee; in response
record, in certain crash or near non-trivial crash situation occurs; no to an official request by police or
crash-like situations, such as an air data are recorded by the EDR under similar government office; as part of
bag deployment or hitting a road normal driving conditions and no GM's defense of litigation through
obstacle, data that will assist in personal data (e.g., name, gender, the discovery process; or, as
understanding how a vehicle’s age, and crash location) are required by law. Data that GM
systems performed. The EDR is recorded. However, other parties, collects or receives may also be
designed to record data related to such as law enforcement, could used for GM research needs or may
vehicle dynamics and safety combine the EDR data with the type be made available to others for
systems for a short period of time, of personally identifying data research purposes, where a need is
typically 30 seconds or less. The routinely acquired during a crash shown and the data is not tied to a
EDR in this vehicle is designed to investigation. specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
record such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR,
. How various systems in your special equipment is required, and
vehicle were operating; access to the vehicle or the EDR is
. Whether or not the driver and needed. In addition to the vehicle
passenger safety belts were manufacturer, other parties, such as
buckled/fastened; law enforcement, that have the
.
special equipment, can read the
How far (if at all) the driver was information if they have access to
depressing the accelerator and/ the vehicle or the EDR.
or brake pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was
traveling.
OnStar® (Canada) Radio Frequency Radio Frequency

If the vehicle is equipped with Identification (RFID) Statement (Canada)
OnStar® and has an active RFID technology is used in some This vehicle has systems that
subscription, additional data may be vehicles for functions such as tire operate on a radio frequency that
collected through the OnStar pressure monitoring and ignition comply with Part 15 of the Federal
system. This includes information system security, as well as in Communications Commission (FCC)
about the vehicle’s operation; about connection with conveniences such rules and with Industry Canada
collisions involving the vehicle; the as Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Standards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.
use of the vehicle and its features; transmitters for remote door locking/
and, in certain situations, the Operation is subject to the following
unlocking and starting, and two conditions:
location and approximate GPS in-vehicle transmitters for garage
speed of the vehicle. Refer to the door openers. RFID technology in 1. The device may not cause
OnStar Terms and Conditions and GM vehicles does not use or record harmful interference.
Privacy Statement on the OnStar personal information or link with any
website. 2. The device must accept any
other GM system containing interference received, including
personal information. interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
OnStar 14-1
OnStar OnStar Overview Push = to:

. Make a call, end a call,
or answer an incoming call.
OnStar Overview .
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling
voice commands.
OnStar Services . Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Navigation voice commands.
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Requires the available Directions
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 If equipped, this vehicle has a and Connections service plan.
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 comprehensive, in-vehicle system
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 that can connect to a live Advisor Push Q to connect to a live
for Emergency, Security, Navigation, Advisor to:
OnStar Additional Information Connection, and Diagnostic
OnStar Additional Services.
. Verify account information or
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 update contact information.
The OnStar system status light is .
next to the OnStar buttons. If the Get driving directions. Requires
status light is: the available Directions and
Connections service plan.
. Solid Green: System is ready. . Receive On-Demand
. Flashing Green: On a call. Diagnostics for a check of the
. Red: Indicates a problem. vehicle’s key operating systems.
. Receive Roadside Assistance.
Push Q or call 1-888-4ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) to speak to an
Advisor.
14-2 OnStar
Push the OnStar Emergency OnStar Services equipped with automatic door locks,
button > to get a priority and can help police locate the
connection to an Emergency vehicle if it is stolen.
Emergency
Advisor available 24/7 to:
. Get help for an emergency.
With Automatic Crash Response, Navigation
the built-in system can automatically
OnStar navigation requires the
. Be a Good Samaritan or connect to help in most crashes,
Directions and Connections
respond to an AMBER Alert. even if help cannot be requested.
service plan.
. Get crisis assistance and Push > to connect to an
evacuation routes. Push Q to receive directions or
Emergency Advisor. GPS
have them sent to the vehicle
technology is used to identify the
navigation screen, if equipped.
vehicle location and can provide
Destinations can also be forwarded
critical information to emergency
to the vehicle from Google Maps™
personnel. The Advisor is also
or MapQuest.com. The OnStar
trained to offer critical assistance in
mapping database is continuously
emergency situations before first
updated. Visit www.onstar.com for
responders arrive.
coverage maps.
Security Turn-by-Turn Navigation
OnStar provides services like Stolen 1. Push Q to connect to a live
Vehicle Assistance, Remote Ignition Advisor.
Block, and Roadside Assistance,
if the vehicle is equipped with these 2. Request directions.
services. OnStar can unlock the 3. Directions are downloaded to
vehicle doors remotely, if it is the vehicle.
4. Follow the voice-guided
commands.
OnStar 14-3
Using Voice Commands Repeat Other Navigation Services

During a Planned Route 1. Push =. System responds:
Available from OnStar
Cancel Route “OnStar ready,” then a tone. OnStar eNav: Allows subscribers
to send destinations from Google
1. Push =. System responds: 2. Say “Repeat.” System responds
Maps and MapQuest.com to their
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. with the last direction given, then
Turn-by-Turn Navigation or
Say “Cancel route.” System responds with “OnStar ready,”
screen-based navigation system.
responds: “Do you want to then a tone.
When ready, the directions will be
cancel directions?” 3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice downloaded to the vehicle.
2. Say “Yes.” System responds: commands.
Destination Download: Push Q,
“OK, request completed, thank Get My Destination then request the Advisor to
you, goodbye.” download directions to the
1. Push =. System responds:
Route Preview navigation system in the vehicle.
“OnStar ready,” then a tone.
After the call ends, push the “Go”
1. Push =. System responds: 2. Say “Get my destination.” button on the navigation screen to
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. System responds with address begin driving directions.
2. Say “Route preview.” System and the distance to the
Destinations can also be
responds with the next three destination, then responds with
downloaded on the go. For
maneuvers. “OnStar ready,” then a tone.
information about eNav, Destination
3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice 3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice Download, and coverage maps visit
commands. commands. www.onstar.com.
14-4 OnStar
Connections Calling 911 Emergency Store a Name Tag for Speed

Dialing
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows 1. Press =. The system responds
calls to be made and received from “OnStar Ready,” followed by 1. Push =. System responds:
the vehicle. The vehicle can also be a tone. “OnStar ready.”
controlled from a cell phone through
2. Say “Call.” The system responds 2. Say “Store.” System responds:
the OnStar RemoteLink mobile app.
“Please say the name or number “Please say the number you
See www.onstar.com for
to call.” would like to store.”
coverage maps.
3. Say “911” without pausing. The 3. Say the entire number without
Hands-Free Calling system responds “911.” pausing. System responds:
1. Push =. System responds: 4. Say “Call.” The system responds “Please say the name tag.”
“OnStar ready.” “OK, dialing 911.” 4. Pick a name tag. System
2. Say “Call.” System responds: responds: “About to store <name
Retrieve My Number tag>. Does that sound OK?”
“Please say the name or number
to call.” 1. Push =. System responds: 5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to try
“OnStar ready.” again. System responds: “OK,
3. Say the entire number without
pausing, including a “1” and the 2. Say “My number.” System storing <name tag>.”
area code. System responds: responds: “Your OnStar Place a Call Using a Stored
“OK calling.” Hands-Free Calling number is.” Number
End a Call 1. Push =. System responds:
Push =. System responds: “Call “OnStar ready.”
ended.” 2. Say “Call <name tag>.” System
responds: “OK, calling
<name tag>.”
OnStar 14-5
Verify Minutes and Expiration Diagnostics OnStar Additional

Push = and say “Minutes” then OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics will Information
“Verify” to check how many minutes perform a vehicle check every
remain and their expiration date. month. It will check the engine, Transferring Service
transmission, antilock brakes, and
OnStar Mobile App major vehicle systems. It also Push Q to request account transfer
checks the tire pressures, if the eligibility information. The Advisor
Download the OnStar RemoteLink
vehicle is equipped with the Tire can assist in canceling or removing
mobile app to your iPhone, Android,
Pressure Monitoring System. If a account information. If OnStar
or BlackBerry smartphone to check
diagnostics check is needed receives information that vehicle
vehicle fuel level, oil life, or tire
ownership has changed, OnStar
pressure; to start the vehicle between e-mails, push Q, and an
may send a voice message to the
(if equipped) or unlock it; or to Advisor can run a check. vehicle, requesting updated account
connect to an OnStar Advisor. For
information.
OnStar RemoteLink information and
compatibility, see www.onstar.com. Reactivation for Subsequent
Owners
Push Q and follow the prompts to
speak to an Advisor as soon as
possible after acquiring the vehicle.
The Advisor will update vehicle
records and will explain the OnStar
service offers and options available.
14-6 OnStar
How OnStar Service Works OnStar service cannot work unless See Radio Frequency Statement
your vehicle is in a place where (Canada) on page 13‑18 for
Automatic Crash Response,
OnStar has an agreement with a information regarding Part 15 of the
Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
wireless service provider for service Federal Communications
Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
in that area, and the wireless Commission (FCC) rules and
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
service provider has coverage, Industry Canada Standards
Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn
network capacity, reception, and RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling
technology compatible with OnStar
are available on most vehicles. Not Services for People with
service. Service involving location
all OnStar services are available Disabilities
information about the vehicle cannot
everywhere or on all vehicles. For
work unless GPS signals are Advisors provide services to help
more information, a full description
available, unobstructed, and subscribers with physical disabilities
of OnStar services, system
compatible with the OnStar and medical conditions.
limitations, and OnStar terms and
hardware. OnStar service may not
conditions, see www.onstar.com Push Q for help with:
work if the OnStar equipment is not
(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada);
properly installed or it has not been . Locating a gas station with an
contact OnStar at 1-888-4ONSTAR
properly maintained. If equipment or attendant to pump gas.
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY
software is added, connected,
1-877-248-2080; or push Q to or modified, OnStar service may not
. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,
speak with an Advisor. OnStar work. Other problems beyond the that meets accessibility needs.
services require a vehicle electrical control of OnStar may prevent . Providing directions to the
system, wireless service, and GPS service such as hills, tall buildings, closest hospital or pharmacy in
satellite technologies to be available tunnels, weather, electrical system urgent situations.
and operating for features to design and architecture of the
function properly. These systems vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a
may not operate if the battery is crash, or wireless phone network
discharged or disconnected. congestion or jamming.
OnStar 14-7
TTY Users OnStar Personal Identification Potential Issues

OnStar has the ability to Number (PIN) Some OnStar services are disabled
communicate to the deaf, A PIN is needed to access some of after five days. OnStar cannot
hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired the OnStar services, like Remote perform Remote Door Unlock or
customers while in the vehicle. Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle Stolen Vehicle Assistance after the
The available dealer-installed TTY Assistance. You will be prompted to vehicle has been off continuously
system can provide in-vehicle change the PIN the first time when for five days. After five days, OnStar
access to all of the OnStar services, speaking with an Advisor. To can contact Roadside Assistance
except Virtual Advisor and OnStar change the OnStar PIN, call OnStar and a locksmith to help gain access
Turn-by-Turn Navigation. and provide the Advisor with the to the vehicle.
current number.
OnStar.com Global Positioning
The website provides access to Warranty System (GPS)
account information, manages the OnStar equipment may be . Obstruction of the GPS can
OnStar subscription, and allows warranted as part of the New occur in a large city with tall
viewing of videos of each service. Vehicle Limited Warranty. The buildings; in parking garages;
Get subscription plan pricing and manufacturer of the vehicle around airports; in tunnels,
sign up for OnStar Vehicle furnishes detailed warranty underpasses, or parking
Diagnostics. Click on the “My information. garages; or in an area with very
Account” tab on the home page. dense trees. If GPS signals are
Languages not available, the OnStar system
The vehicle can be programmed should still operate to call
to respond in French or Spanish. OnStar. However, OnStar could
Push Q and ask an Advisor. have difficulty identifying the
Advisors can speak French or exact location.
Spanish.
14-8 OnStar
. In emergency situations, OnStar Vehicle and Power Issues Third parties may unlawfully
can use the last stored GPS intercept or access transmissions
location to send to emergency OnStar services require a vehicle
and private communications without
responders. electrical system, wireless service,
consent.
and GPS satellite technologies to be
. A temporary loss of GPS can available and operating for features OnStar - libcurl and unzip
cause loss of the ability to send to function properly. These systems
a Turn-by-Turn Navigation route. acknowledgments
may not operate if the battery is
The Advisor may give a verbal discharged or disconnected. Certain OnStar components include
route or may ask for a call back libcurl and unzip software. Below
after the vehicle is driven into an Add-on Electrical Equipment are the notices and licenses
open area. The OnStar system is integrated associated with this software:
Cellular and GPS Antennas into the electrical architecture of the libcurl:
vehicle. Do not add any electrical
Avoid placing items over or near the equipment. See Add-On Electrical COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION
antenna to prevent blocking cellular Equipment on page 9‑44. Added NOTICE
and GPS signal reception. Cellular electrical equipment may interfere Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010,
reception is required for OnStar to with the operation of the OnStar Daniel Stenberg,
send remote signals to the vehicle. system and cause it to not operate. <daniel@haxx.se>.
Unable to Connect to OnStar Privacy All rights reserved.
Message Permission to use, copy, modify,
The complete OnStar Privacy
If there is limited cellular coverage Statement may be found at and distribute this software for any
or the cellular network has reached www.onstar.com. Privacy-sensitive purpose with or without fee is
maximum capacity, this message users of wireless communications hereby granted, provided that the
may come on. Push Q to try the are cautioned that the privacy of any above copyright notice and this
call again or try again after driving a information sent via wireless cellular permission notice appear in all
few miles into another cellular area. communications cannot be assured. copies.
OnStar 14-9
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED Except as contained in this notice, Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,
“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF the name of a copyright holder shall Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR not be used in advertising or Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT otherwise to promote the sale, use George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES or other dealings in this Software Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS without prior written authorization of Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE the copyright holder. Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,
AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO unzip: Rich Wales, Mike White
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR This is version 2005-Feb-10 of the This software is provided “as is,”
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE Info-ZIP copyright and license. without warranty of any kind,
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, The definitive version of this express or implied. In no event shall
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, document should be available Info-ZIP or its contributors be held
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/ liable for any direct, indirect,
CONTRACT, TORT OR license.html indefinitely. incidental, special or consequential
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. damages arising out of the use of or
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION All rights reserved. inability to use this software.
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN For the purposes of this copyright Permission is granted to anyone to
THE SOFTWARE. and license, “Info-ZIP” is defined as use this software for any purpose,
the following set of individuals: including commercial applications,
Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, and to alter it and redistribute it
Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois, freely, subject to the following
Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, restrictions:
Ed Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris 1. Redistributions of source code
Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, must retain the above copyright
Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson, notice, definition, disclaimer, and
Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, this list of conditions.
14-10 OnStar
2. Redistributions in binary form 3. Altered versions–including, but 4. Info-ZIP retains the right to
(compiled executables) must not limited to, ports to new use the names “Info-ZIP,”
reproduce the above copyright operating systems, existing ports “Zip,” “UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,”
notice, definition, disclaimer, with new graphical interfaces, “WiZ,” “Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket
and this list of conditions in and dynamic, shared, or static Zip,” and “MacZip” for its own
documentation and/or other library versions–must be plainly source and binary releases.
materials provided with the marked as such and must not be
distribution. The sole exception misrepresented as being the
to this condition is redistribution original source. Such altered
of a standard UnZipSFX binary versions also must not be
(including SFXWiz) as part of a misrepresented as being
self-extracting archive; that is Info-ZIP releases–including, but
permitted without inclusion of not limited to, labeling of the
this license, as long as the altered versions with the names
normal SFX banner has not “Info-ZIP” (or any variation
been removed from the binary thereof, including, but not limited
or disabled. to, different capitalizations),
“Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or
“MacZip” without the explicit
permission of Info-ZIP.
Such altered versions are
further prohibited from
misrepresentative use of the
Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail
addresses or of the
Info-ZIP URL(s).
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System (cont'd) Armrest

What Will You See after an Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Accessories and
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
When Should an Airbag Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Assistance Program,
Add-On Electrical
Where Are the Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5, 13-7
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26, 3-27 Audio
Additional Information
Airbags Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-26
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Adding Equipment to the Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Adjustments
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36 CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-12 Audio System
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-13
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . .7-18
Air Filter, Passenger
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-22, 3-24 Automatic
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Alarm Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Airbag System
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 10-24, 9-27 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
How Does an Airbag
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Antenna Automatic Transmission
Passenger Sensing
Multi-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Antilock Brake Shift Lock Control
What Makes an Airbag
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Auxiliary
Appearance Care Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
i-2 INDEX
B Bulb Replacement (cont'd) Cargo

Headlamps, Front Turn Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Signal, and Parking Cautions, Danger, and
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-31 CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-26
Sidemarker, Stoplamps, Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-13
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . 7-28, 7-30, 7-39
and Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . 10-30 Check
Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Brake
Ignition
System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-16
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 C Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-25
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Child Restraints
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28
California Infants and Young
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-40 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Perchlorate Materials Lower Anchors and
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-45
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-37 Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51, 3-53
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Capacities and Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Carbon Monoxide Cleaning
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
INDEX i-3
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Diagnostics

Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Text Telephone (TTY) Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Customer Information Door
Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Service Publications Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-12 Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-15 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-67 Customer Satisfaction Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3 Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4
Connections Drive Systems
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4 D All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-24, 9-27
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-12 Driver Information
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Danger, Warnings, and Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Driving
Coolant Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-17 Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Daytime Running Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Engine Temperature Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-20
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-7
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Descent Control If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Courtesy Transportation System (DCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 Descent Control System Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Devices Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
i-4 INDEX
E Engine (cont'd) Fog Lamps

Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Electrical Equipment,
Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Electrical System
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Front Fog Lamp
Engine Compartment
Reduced Power Light . . . . . . . . .5-22 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-22 Front Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Fuses and Circuit
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16 Front Seats
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-17 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Instrument Panel Fuse
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 F Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Filter, Filling a Portable Fuel
Emergency
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Engine
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4 Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61 Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-40
Check and Service Engine
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-21
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6
Fluid Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-12 Requirements, California . . . . .9-40
Coolant Temperature
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4 Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
INDEX i-5
Fuses General Information Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Engine Compartment Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44 Heater
Fuses and Circuit Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 GM Mobility Reimbursement Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1
Instrument Panel Fuse Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Rear Compartment Fuse H Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-7
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Hands-Free Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45 Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
G Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Gasoline Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40 Headlamps How to Wear Safety Belts
Gauges Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Daytime Running I
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Daytime Running Lamps Ignition Transmission Lock
Warning Lights and (DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . .5-22 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2 Infants and Young Children,
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-23 Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
i-6 INDEX
Instrument Panel Lamps (cont'd) Lights (cont'd)

Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-13 Engine Coolant
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Temperature Warning . . . . . . .5-19
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-20
J Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 LATCH System Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Replacing Parts after a High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
K LATCH, Lower Anchors and Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Keyless Entry Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-45 Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3 Liftgate Reduced Engine Power . . . . . .5-22
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 5-11
Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Service Vehicle Soon . . . . . . . . .5-16
L Lighting StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-42 Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Lamps Lights Traction Control System
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 (TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2 Antilock Brake System Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Ultrasonic Parking Sensor . . . .5-18
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-16 Up-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Front Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Warning, Power Steering . . . . .5-18
Headlamps, Front Turn Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Link
Signal, and Parking Daytime Running Smartphone . . . . . . 7-47, 7-49, 7-51
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Descent Control System . . . . . .5-17
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
INDEX i-7
Locks Mirrors Oil

Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Automatic Dimming Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . .10-11
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-38
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-21 Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 OnStar®
Lower Anchors and Tethers Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
for Children (LATCH Monitor System, Tire OnStar® Additional
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Movies . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52, 7-57, 7-59 OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
M N OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Maintenance Navigation OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Maintenance Schedule Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Recommended Fluids New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Operation, Infotainment
and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Ordering
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-13 O Service Publications . . . . . . . . 13-15
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Outlets
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Off-Road
Messages Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
i-8 INDEX
Overview, Phone Proposition 65 Warning,

Infotainment Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-28, 7-30, 7-39 California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3, 7-5, 7-7 Hands-Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-45
Pictures and R
P Movies . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52, 7-57, 7-59 Radio Frequency
Park Port Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-18
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Power Radios
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29 Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Brake and P (Park) Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-26 Reduced Engine Light . . . . . . . .5-22 Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-21 Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-18 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Ultrasonic Sensor Light . . . . . . .5-18 Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-37
Passenger Airbag Status Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-4
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Passenger Compartment Air Power Steering Warning Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-32 Pregnancy, Using Safety Recommended
Perchlorate Materials Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3 Privacy Recommended Fluids and
Personalization Radio Frequency Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-18 Records
Program Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16
Courtesy Transportation . . . . .13-11
INDEX i-9
Recreational Vehicle Roads Safety Defects Reporting

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71 Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-16
Reduced Engine Power Roadside Assistance General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5, 13-7 Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Reimbursement Program, Roof Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-11
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Seats
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4 Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Running the Vehicle While Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Replacement Parts Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37 Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15 S Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-5
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-37 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4
Replacing LATCH System Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Replacing Safety Belt How to Wear Safety Belts Underseat Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-21 Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14 Securing Child
Reporting Safety Defects Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15 Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51, 3-53
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-16 Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Security
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-21 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Restraints Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-20 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44 Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
i-10 INDEX
Service Spare Tire Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Accessories and Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Specifications and Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-16 StabiliTrak System
Maintenance, General OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31 Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Publications Ordering Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 T
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Scheduling Appointments . . . .13-11 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Taillamps
Vehicle Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4
Shift Lock Control Function Power, Warning Lights . . . . . . . .5-18 Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-10
Check, Automatic Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Shifting Stoplamps and Back-Up Lamps Tires
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Storage Areas Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Sidemarker Cargo Management System . . . 4-3 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Signals, Turn and Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Smartphone Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47, 7-49, 7-51 Underseat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
INDEX i-11
Tires (cont'd) Transmission V

Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-50 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Vehicle
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-49 Transportation Program,
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Identification
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Triangle, Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Terminology and Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 Turn and Lane-Change
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Uniform Tire Quality Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58 Turn Signal
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Wheel Alignment and Tire Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Service Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-60 U Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
When It Is Time for New Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-36 Vehicle Care
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Ultrasonic Parking Sensor Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Towing Underseat Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-44 Uniform Tire Quality
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-71 Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71 Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Traction USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-30 Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Control System (TCS)/
StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
i-12 INDEX
W Winter
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Warning
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-26
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Wipers
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Warning Triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Wheels
Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-44
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Windshield
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

2013 Chevrolet Trax Manual en CA

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2013 Chevrolet Trax Manual en CA

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chevrolet TRAX Owner Manual - 2013 - CRC - 3/6/13 Black plate (1,1)

2013 Chevrolet TRAX Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Bluetooth Phone/Devices . . . . . 7-52

2013 Chevrolet TRAX Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

Using this Manual Warning or Caution indicates a Symbols

A circle with a slash through it is a

Vehicle Symbol Chart " : Charging System * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

In Brief Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-18

Initial Drive 7 : For vehicle with this feature,

To open the liftgate, press K on the

See Liftgate on page 2‑8. Seat Adjustment Height Adjustment

Windows Manual Seats

If available, move the lever up or

Power Seats See Power Seat Adjustment on Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Seat Shown, Power Seat

To return the seatback to an upright Heated Seats Head Restraint

2. Push and pull on the seatback to To achieve a comfortable seating

Safety Belts Passenger Sensing Mirror Adjustment

The passenger sensing system

Interior Mirror Steering Wheel Interior Lighting

Reading Lamps Exterior Lighting ; : Turns on the parking lamps,

Windshield Wiper/Washer INT: Move the lever up to INT for

Climate Controls 3. Air Delivery Mode Control

Transmission 2. Press the + (plus) end of the

Climate Control System with

See Manual Transmission on Vehicle Features Storing a Favorite Station

Bluetooth® Steering Wheel Controls Press to silence the vehicle

Performance and StabiliTrak® System Tire Pressure Monitor

Always follow posted speed

limits or drive more slowly when

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, and Exterior Mirrors

2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

If it becomes difficult to turn the key

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-3

2-4 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-5

2-6 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-7

2-8 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Safety Locks Press { to activate the rear door Doors

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-9

WARNING (Continued) Vehicle Security

2-10 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Arming the System Disarming the System How to Detect a Tamper

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-11

2-12 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Power Mirrors For vehicles with folding mirrors and

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-13

Interior Mirrors Automatic Dimming Windows

2-14 Keys, Doors, and Windows

The vehicle aerodynamics are Express-Up/Express-Down

{ WARNING Programming the Power

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-15

2-16 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Roof Open/Close: Press and hold the

Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats and Safety Belt Use During Servicing the Airbag-Equipped

3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints Front Seats

Seats and Restraints 3-3